Infiniti Q60 Coupe 2020 User Manual



2020 OWNER’S MANUAL

AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or

off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals

including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and

lead, which are known to the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To

minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the

engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-

ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands

frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information

go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you

understand the operation and maintenance

of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many

miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please

read through this manual before operating

your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

is included in your Owner’s literature port-

folio. Always carry it with you when you

take your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer.

The Warranty Information Booklet con-

tents provide complete information about

all warranties covering this vehicle, the

requirements to keep the warranties in

effect as well as the INFINITI Roadside

Assistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care and

Lemon Law Information Booklet will ex-

plain how to resolve any concerns you may

have with your vehicle, as well as clarify

your rights under your state’s lemon law.

In addition to factory installed options, your

vehicle may also be equipped with additional

accessories installed by INFINITI or by your

INFINITI retailer prior to delivery. It is

important that you familiarize yourself with

all disclosures, warnings, cautions and in-

structions concerning proper use of such

accessories prior to operating the vehicle

and/or accessory. It is recommended you

see an INFINITI retailer for details concern-

ing the particular accessories with which

your vehicle is equipped.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE

SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your Own-

er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-

iarity with controls and maintenance

requirements, assisting you in the safe

operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

. NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

. ALWAYS observe posted speed lim-

its and never drive too fast for

conditions.

. ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that

could distract you.

. ALWAYS use your seat belts and

appropriate child restraint systems.

Pre-teen children should be seated in

the rear seat.

. ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety

features to all occupants of the

vehicle.

. ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-

ual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHI-

CLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Mod-

ification could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate

governmental regulations. In addition, da-

mage or performance problems resulting

from modification will not be covered

under the INFINITI warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-

agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses

the port during normal driving, for

example remote insurance company

monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,

telematics or engine reprogramming,

may cause interference or damage to

vehicle systems. We do not recommend

Foreword

or endorse the use of any aftermarket

OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by INFINITI. The vehicle war-

ranty may not cover damage caused by

any aftermarket plug-in device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on this

model. Features and equipment in your

vehicle may vary depending on model, trim

level, options selected, order, date of pro-

duction, region or availability. Therefore,

you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or installed

on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at the

time of printing. INFINITI reserves the right

to change specifications, performance, de-

sign or component suppliers without notice

and without obligation. From time to time,

INFINITI may update or revise this manual to

provide owners with the most accurate

information currently available. Please care-

fully read and retain with this manual all

revision updates sent to you by INFINITI to

ensure you have access to accurate and up-

to-date information regarding your vehicle.

Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals

and any updates can also be found in the

owner section of the INFINITI website at

https://owners.infinitiusa.com/owners/na-

vigation/manualsandGuides. If you have

questions concerning any information in

your Owner’s Manual, contact INFINITI

Consumer Affairs. See the INFINITI CUS-

TOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this

Owner’s Manual for contact information.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or mod-

erate personal injury or damage to your

vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the

procedures must be followed carefully.

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do

not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above in

an illustration, it means the arrow points to

the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above call attention to an item in the

illustration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material - special handling may

apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any form,

or by any means, electronic, mechanical,

photocopying, recording or otherwise, with-

out the prior written permission of Nissan

Motor Co., Ltd.

INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

INFINITI CARES ...

Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

INFINITI retailer are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your

INFINITI retailer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide INFINITI directly

with comments or questions, please contact

our (INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-662-6200

For Canadian customers

1-800-361-4792

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

. Your name, address, and telephone num-

ber

. Vehicle identification number (on dash

panel)

. Date of purchase

. Current odometer reading

. Your INFINITI retailer’s name

. Your comments or questions

You can write to INFINITI with the informa-

tion on the left at:

For U.S. customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

[email protected]

For Canadian customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.

com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.infinitiUSA.com (for U.S. customer) or

www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and

thank you for buying a quality INFINITI

vehicle.

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Table of

Contents

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) ...................................................................... 0-2

Exterior front ..................................................................... 0-3

Exterior rear ....................................................................... 0-4

Passenger compartment ................................................. 0-5

Cockpit ................................................................................. 0-6

Instrument panel .............................................................. 0-8

Meters and gauges .......................................................... 0-9

Engine compartment .................................................... 0-10

VR30DDTT engine ................................................ 0-10

Warning and indicator lights ...................................... 0-11

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0918X

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-38)

2. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bags (P.1-38)

3. Seat belts (P.1-11)

4. Head restraints (P.1-7)

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags (P.1-38)

6. Child restraint anchor points (for top

tether strap child restraint) (P.1-23,

P.1-30, P.1-34)

7. Occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors) (P.1-44)

8. Front seats (P.1-3)

9. Seat belts with pretensioners (P.1-54)

10. Rear seat walk-in mechanism (P.1-5)

11. Rear seats (P.1-6)

— Child restraints (P.1-19)

12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system (P.1-21)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

JVC0939X

1. Hood (P.3-22)

2. Windshield wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-34)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-10)

3. Headlights and turn signal lights

(P.2-38)

— Adaptive Front lighting System

(AFS) (if so equipped) (P.2-42)

4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P.2-55)

5. Power windows (P.2-52)

6. Outside mirrors (P.3-31)

— Side turn signal lights (P.2-43)

— Side view camera (if so equipped)

(P.4-11)

7. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P.4-11)

8. Sonar sensors (if so equipped)

— Camera aiding sonar function

(P.4-24)

— Sonar system (P.5-133)

9. Fog lights (P.2-44)

10. Tires

— Wheels and tires (P.8-25, P.10-9)

— Flat tire (P.6-3)

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) (P.2-14, P.5-5)

11. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system

(P.3-15)

— Remote engine start (if so equipped)

(P.3-19)

— Courtesy light (P.2-59)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR FRONT

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0940X

1. Trunk lid (P.3-22)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system

(P.3-15)

2. High-mounted stop light (P.8-22)

3. Satellite antenna (P.4-42)

4. Rear window defroster (P.2-37)/An-

tenna (P.4-42)

5. Sonar sensors (if so equipped)

— Camera aiding sonar function

(P.4-24)

— Sonar system (P.5-133)

6. Rear view camera

— RearView Monitor (if so equipped)

(P.4-3)

— Around View

Monitor (if so

equipped) (P.4-11)

7. Rear combination light (P.8-22)

8. Fuel-filler door (P.3-25)

— Fuel information (P.10-4)

EXTERIOR REAR

JVC0941X

1. Coat hooks (P.2-51)

2. Power window switch (P.2-52)

3. Outside mirror remote control switch

(P.3-31)

4. Automatic drive positioner switch (if so

equipped) (P.3-33)

5. Sun visors (P.3-29)

6. Moonroof switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-55)

7. SOS call switch* (if so equipped)

8. Map light (P.2-57)

9. Sunglasses holder (P.2-49)

10. Inside mirror (P.3-29)

— HomeLink

universal transceiver (if

so equipped) (P.2-59)

— Compass (if so equipped) (P.2-9)

11. Rear cup holders (P.2-48)

12. Console box (P.2-50)

— Power outlet (P.2-47)

— USB (Universal Serial Bus) connec-

tion ports and AUX (auxiliary) input

jack*

13. Front cup holders (P.2-48)

*: Refer to the INFINITI InTouch

Own-

er’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

WAA0093X

1. Side ventilator (P.4-34)

2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal

switch (P.2-38)

3. Steering wheel

— Horn (P.2-44)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-38)

— Heated steering wheel (if so

equipped) (P.2-47)

— Power steering (P.5-124)

4. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P.2-34)

5. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2)

6. Shift lever (P.5-16)

7. INFINITI controller*

8. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P.2-45, P.5-129)

9. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-23)

10. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-43)

11. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip od-

ometer (P.2-7)

12. Electric tilting/telescopic steering

wheel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-27)

13. Manual tilting/telescopic steering

wheel lever (if so equipped) (P.3-27)

14. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

— Audio control steering switch*

— Hands-Free Phone System switch*

— Voice recognition system switch*

15. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Trip computer switches (P.2-29)

— Cruise control switches (if so

equipped) (P.5-66)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P.5-68)

— Dynamic driver assistance switch (if

so equipped) (P. 5-25, P.5-45, P.5-89)

16. INFINITI Drive Mode Selector (P.5-21)

COCKPIT

*: Refer to the INFINITI InTouch

Own-

er’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0969X

1. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-18)

2. Meters and gauges (P.2-6)

— Clock (P.2-31)

3. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-11)

4. Center ventilator (P.4-34)

5. Heater and air conditioner control

(P.4-34)

6. Upper touch screen display* (upper

display) and Navigation system* (if so

equipped)

— RearView Monitor (if so equipped)

(P.4-3)

— Around View

Monitor (if so

equipped) (P.4-11)

7. Lower touch screen display* (lower

display)

8. Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch (P.2-37)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P.1-38)

10. Hood release handle (P.3-22)

11. Fuse box cover (P.8-17)

12. Parking brake (P.5-20)

13. Storage box (P.2-51) and power outlet

(P.2-47)

14. Seat heater switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-45)

15. Audio system*

16. Trunk release power cancel switch

(P.3-24)

17. Glove box (P.2-50)

*: Refer to the INFINITI InTouch

Own-

er’s Manual.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

JVC0428X

1. Tachometer (P.2-8)

2. Warning and indicator lights (P.2-12)

3. Speedometer (P.2-7)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P.2-8)

5. Vehicle information display (P.2-20)/

Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-7)

6. Fuel gauge (P.2-9)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

METERS AND GAUGES

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0968X

VR30DDTT ENGINE

1. Battery (P.8-11)

2. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-6)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-7)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-9)

5. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-17)

6. Air cleaner (P.8-15)

7. Engine drive belt location (P.8-13)

8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-3)

9. Intercooler cooling reservoir (P.8-5)

10. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-4)

11. Window washer fluid reservoir

(P.8-10)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

2-12

Brake warning light 2-13

Charge warning light 2-13

Forward Emergency Braking

(FEB) system warning light (if

so equipped)

2-13

Low fuel warning light 2-14

Low tire pressure warning

light

2-14

Master warning light 2-16

Power steering warning light 2-16

Seat belt warning light 2-17

Supplemental air bag warn-

ing light

2-17

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light

2-17

Indicator

light

Name Page

ECO drive indicator light 2-18

Exterior light indicator 2-18

Front fog light indicator light 2-18

Front passenger air bag sta-

tus light

2-18

High beam assist indicator

light (if so equipped)

2-18

High beam indicator light 2-18

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

2-18

Security indicator light 2-19

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

2-19

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light

2-19

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

MEMO

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system

Seats ...................................................................................... 1-2

Front seats ..................................................................... 1-3

Rear seats ....................................................................... 1-6

Head restraints/headrests .............................................. 1-7

Adjustable head

restraint/headrest components .............................. 1-8

Non-adjustable head

restraint/headrest components ............................... 1-9

Remove ........................................................................... 1-9

Install ............................................................................... 1-9

Adjust ........................................................................... 1-10

Seat belts ........................................................................... 1-11

Precautions on seat belt usage .............................. 1-11

Pregnant women ....................................................... 1-13

Injured persons ........................................................... 1-13

Pre-crash seat belts with comfort function

(front seats) (if so equipped) .................................. 1-13

Three-point type seat belt ...................................... 1-14

Seat belt extenders ................................................... 1-16

Seat belt maintenance ............................................. 1-17

Child safety ...................................................................... 1-17

Infants .......................................................................... 1-18

Small children ............................................................. 1-18

Larger children ........................................................... 1-18

Child restraints ................................................................ 1-19

Precautions on child restraints ............................ 1-19

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

System (LATCH) ...................................................... 1-21

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH ............................................................ 1-23

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts ............................................................ 1-25

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH ............................................................ 1-28

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ................................................ 1-31

Booster seats ........................................................... 1-35

Supplemental restraint system .................................. 1-38

Precautions on supplemental

restraint system ....................................................... 1-38

INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats) .............................................................. 1-44

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag systems ..... 1-52

Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ..... 1-54

Supplemental air bag warning labels ................ 1-55

Supplemental air bag warning light ................... 1-55

Repair and replacement procedure .................... 1-56

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0133

WARNING

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and

receive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat with

both feet on the floor and adjust the

seat belt properly. See “Precautions

on seat belt usage” (P.1-11).

. Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious accidents.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly

become high enough to cause a sig-

nificant risk of injury or death to

people and pets.

. The seatback should not be reclined

further than necessary for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when

the passenger sits well back and

straight up in the seat. If the seat-

back is reclined, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and being injured is

increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damages.

SEATS

FRONT SEATS

Front power seat adjustment

Operating tips:

. The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,

then reactivate the switch.

. Do not operate the power seat switch for

a long period of time when the engine is

off. This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” (P.3-33)

for the seat position memory function.

SSS1051

Forward and backward:

Moving the switch

forward or backward

will slide the seat forward or backward to

the desired position.

Reclining:

Move the recline switch

backward until

the desired angle is obtained. To bring the

seatback forward again, move the switch

forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different sizes

for added comfort and to help obtain proper

seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat belt

usage” (P.1-11).) Also, the seatback can be

reclined to allow occupants to rest when the

vehicle is parked.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1052

Seat lifter:

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

down to adjust the angle of the front portion

or height of the seat.

SSS1053

Type A (if so equipped)

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat):

The lumbar support feature provides lower

back support to the driver.

Type A (if so equipped)

Push the front or back end of the switch to

adjust the seatback lumbar area.

SSS0836

Type B (if so equipped)

Move the lever

up or down to adjust the

seatback lumbar area.

JVR0186X

Side support (if so equipped):

The side support feature allows you to

adjust the torso supports. Push the switch

inside

or outside to adjust the torso

area.

JVR0497X

Walk-in mechanism:

This feature makes it easier to get in and out

of the rear seat. Use the following procedure

when getting in and out of the rear seat.

If the sun visor is used, close it to the original

position before operating the walk-in fea-

ture.

1. Pull the seatback lever upward

to fold

the front seatback down. Make sure that

the front seatback is completely folded

down.

2. To slide the front seat forward, firmly

push the seatback switch

. The front

seat will move forward.

3. Get in or out of the vehicle.

4. To return the front seat to its original

position, raise the seatback and push the

seatback switch

again.

. To stop the seat sliding, push the seat-

back switch

again or operate the seat

sliding/lifter switches.

. The front passenger seat will stop re-

turning 6.5 in (165.8 mm) from its front-

most position to retain space for the rear

passenger.

. Depending on the seat position, the head

restraint may contact the roof headlining

during the walk-in operation. To prevent

possible interference, lower the seat

using the seat lifter switch.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

When returning the seat to its original

position, confirm the seat and seatback

are locked properly.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to pinch your hand or

foot or bump your head when oper-

ating the walk-in seat.

. While operating the walk-in seat, do

not operate the seatback reclining

switch. The reclining motor may be

damaged.

. Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. They may

be pinched and damaged.

The automatic forwarding and reversing will

not work or stop under the following condi-

tions:

. When the vehicle speed is moving (dri-

ver’s seat only).

. When the seat belt is fastened.

. When the shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position (driver’s seat only).

. When the door is closed (automatic

forwarding only).

. While the automatic drive positioner (if

so equipped) operates.

. When the automatic drive positioner

switches (if so equipped) are pushed.

. When the seatback switch is pushed.

. When the seat position is adjusted.

Note that the seat must be moved to the

front-most position by operating the walk-

in function after the battery is disconnected.

Otherwise, the seat will not move backward

during the walk-in function.

REAR SEATS

Folding

WARNING

. Never allow anyone to ride in the

trunk or on the rear seat when it is in

the fold-down position. Use of these

areas by passengers without proper

restraints could result in serious in-

jury in an accident or sudden stop.

. Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from

sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo

higher than the seatback. In a sudden

stop or collision, unsecured cargo

could cause personal injury.

. When returning the seatback to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched

position. If they are not completely

secured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

. Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

rear seatback and trunk lid securely

latched when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to car keys.

JVR0498X

The rear seatback can be folded according to

the following procedure.

Before folding the seatback:

Remove drink containers from the rear cup

holder.

To fold the seatback:

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Pull the strap located on the left side of

the trunk. The rear seatback will be

unlatched.

3. Fold the rear seatback down.

To return the seatback:

1. Fold up the rear seatback.

2. Securely lock the seatback in position.

WARNING

Head restraint/headrest supplement the

other vehicle safety systems. They may

provide additional protection against

injury in certain rear end collisions.

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

must be adjusted properly, as specified

in this section. Check the adjustment

after someone else uses the seat. Do not

attach anything to the head restraint/

headrest stalks or remove the head

restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat

if the head restraint/headrest has been

removed. If the head restraint/headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly

adjust the head restraint/headrest be-

fore an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion. Failure to follow these instructions

can reduce the effectiveness of the head

restraint/headrest. This may increase

the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0388X

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraint/headrest.

Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not

equipped with a head restraint or headrest.

. Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

. Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk to

lock them in a desired adjustment posi-

tion.

. The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch to

secure them to the seat frame.

. Proper Adjustment:

— For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of

your ear is approximately level with

the center of the head restraint/

headrest.

— If your ear position is still higher than

the recommended alignment, place

the head restraint/headrest at the

highest position.

. If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and

locked in place before riding in that

designated seating position.

SSS0992

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

JVR0203X

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RE-

STRAINT/HEADREST COMPO-

NENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

SSS1037

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the

head restraint/headrest.

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest prop-

erly in a secure place so it is not loose in

the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

SSS1038

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks

with the holes in the seat. Make sure that

the head restraint/headrest is facing the

correct direction. The stalk with the

adjustment notch

must be installed in

the hole with the lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/head-

rest before an occupant uses the seating

position.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0997

ADJUST

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears. If

your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

SSS1035

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it

up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the

notch before riding in that designated seat-

ing position.

SSS1036

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the

notch before riding in that designated seat-

ing position.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well

back in your seat with both feet on the floor,

your chances of being injured or killed in an

accident and/or the severity of injury may be

greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly en-

courages you and all of your passengers to

buckle up every time you drive, even if your

seating position includes a supplemental air

bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories specify that seat belts be worn at

all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136A

SSS0134A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

SEAT BELTS

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0016

SSS0014

WARNING

. Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be properly

restrained in the rear seat and, if

appropriate, in a child restraint.

. The seat belt should be properly

adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do

so may reduce the effectiveness of

the entire restraint system and in-

crease the chance or severity of injury

in an accident. Serious injury or death

can occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

. Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

. Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal

injuries in an accident.

. Be sure the seat belt tongue is

securely fastened to the proper

buckle.

. Do not wear the seat belt inside out

or twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

. Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

. Never carry more people in the ve-

hicle than there are seat belts.

. If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and

all seat belts fastened, it may indicate

a malfunction in the system. Have the

system checked. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

. No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do not

modify the seat belt, add material or

install devices that may change the

seat belt routing or tension. Doing so

may affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

. Once a seat belt pretensioner has

activated, it cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

. All seat belt assemblies, including

retractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

INFINITI recommends that all seat

belt assemblies in use during a colli-

sion be replaced unless the collision

was minor and the belts show no

damage and continue to operate

properly. Seat belt assemblies not in

use during a collision should also be

inspected and replaced if either da-

mage or improper operation is noted.

. All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s inspection in-

structions and replacement

recommendations. The child re-

straints should be replaced if they

are damaged.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant women

use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn

snug, and always position the lap belt as low

as possible around the hips, not the waist,

and place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never run

the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal

area. Contact your doctor for specific re-

commendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured persons

use seat belts, depending on the injury.

Check with your doctor for specific recom-

mendations.

PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS WITH

COMFORT FUNCTION (front

seats) (if so equipped)

The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat belt

with a motor to help restrain front seat

occupants. This helps reduce the risk of

injury in a collision.

The motor retracts the seat belt under the

following emergency conditions:

. During emergency braking.

. During sudden steering maneuvers.

. Activation of the Forward Emergency

Braking (FEB) with pedestrian detection

system. (See “Forward Emergency Brak-

ing (FEB) with pedestrian detection

system” (P.5-100).)

The pre-crash seat belt will not be active

when:

. The seat belt is not fastened.

. The vehicle speed is under 10 MPH (15

km/h) during emergency braking.

. The vehicle speed is under 19 MPH (30

km/h) during sudden steering maneu-

vers.

The pre-crash seat belt will not be active

when the brake pedal is not depressed

except when sudden steering maneuvers

occur or the FEB with pedestrian detection

system activates.

The motor also retracts the seat belt when

the seat belt is fastened or unfastened.

When the seat belt is fastened, the motor

tightens the seat belt for a snug fit. When

the seat belt is unfastened, the motor

retracts the seat belt. If the seat belt is not

fully retracted, the motor retracts the seat

belt when the door is opened.

Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit

upright and well back.

If the motor cannot retract the seat belt

when the seat belt is fastened or unfas-

tened, it may indicate the pre-crash seat belt

system has a malfunction. It is recommended

you have an INFINITI retailer check and

repair the system.

When the seat belt is retracted repeatedly in

a short period of time, the motor may not be

able to retract the seat belt. After a few

minutes, the motor normally reactivates and

retracts the seat belt. If the seat belt still

cannot be retracted by the motor, the pre-

crash seat belt system has a malfunction.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Have the system checked and repaired. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

. Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and

receive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat with

both feet on the floor and adjust the

seat belt properly.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes tight.

This can occur even if the vehicle is

parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release

the child.

SSS0292

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” (P.1-2).)

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the

retractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage.

The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

belt to move, and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothly

pull the belt out of the retractor.

SSS0290

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure

the shoulder belt is routed over your

shoulder and across your chest.

The three-point type seat belts have two

modes of operation:

. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode allows the seat belt to extend and

retract to allow the driver and passengers

some freedom of movement in the seat. The

ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle

slows down rapidly or during impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat

belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the seat

belt tongue is detached from the buckle and

fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the

ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts.

For additional information, see “Child re-

straints” (P.1-19).

The ALR mode should be used only for child

restraint installation. During normal seat

belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode

should not be activated. If it is activated, it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position. If they are not

completely secured, passengers may be

injured in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0326

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button

on the buckle. The seat belt automatically

retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat

belt movement by two separate methods:

. When the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

. When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

. Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service, or to learn more about seat belt

operation.

SSS0588

Shoulder belt arm (for front seats)

Before fastening the seat belt, pull the

shoulder belt arm forward until it clicks at

the lock position. The arm can also be folded

down for easier access for rear seat passen-

gers.

Pulling the arm forward will allow an easy

access to the belt.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it

is not possible to properly fit the lap-

shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that

is compatible with the installed seat belts is

available that can be purchased. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of

length and may be used for either the driver

or front passenger seating position. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for assistance with purchasing an extender if

an extender is required.

WARNING

. It is recommended only INFINITI seat

belt extenders, made by the same

company which made the original

equipment seat belts, be used with

the INFINITI seat belts.

. Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

. Never use seat belt extenders to

install child restraints. If the child

restraint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

. To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution re-

commended for cleaning upholstery or

carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and

allow the seat belts to dry in the shade.

Do not allow the seat belts to retract

until they are completely dry.

. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide

of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts

may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

. Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible

wires and anchors work properly. If loose

parts, deterioration, cuts or other da-

mage on the webbing is found, the entire

seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes tight.

This can occur even if the vehicle is

parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release

the child.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available

from many other sources, including doctors,

teachers, government traffic safety offices,

and community organizations. Every child is

different, so be sure to learn the best way to

transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

. Rear-facing child restraint

. Forward-facing child restraint

. Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year

and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed

in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-

facing child restraints are available for

children who outgrow rear-facing child re-

straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster

seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/

shoulder belt on a child who can no longer

use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly

fitting seat belt could cause serious or

fatal injury. Always use appropriate

child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. See

“Child restraints” (P.1-19).

A child restraint may be secured in the

vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower

Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system or

with the vehicle seat belt. See “Child re-

straints” (P.1-19) for more information.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

CHILD SAFETY

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens and

children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint system

(Air bag system) for the front passenger.

See “Supplemental restraint system” (P.1-

38).

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

INFINITI recommends that infants be placed

in child restraints that comply with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits your

vehicle and always follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh

at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-

facing child restraint as long as possible up

to the height or weight limit of the child

restraint. Children who outgrow the height

or weight limit of the rear-facing child

restraint and are at least 1 year old should

be secured in a forward-facing child re-

straint with a harness. Refer to the manu-

facturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommenda-

tions. INFINITI recommends that small chil-

dren be placed in child restraints that comply

with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child re-

straint that fits your vehicle and always

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for

installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they reach

the maximum height or weight limit allowed

by the child restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-fa-

cing child restraint, INFINITI recommends

that the child be placed in a commercially

available booster seat to obtain proper seat

belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the

booster seat should raise the child so that

the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle portion

of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not

cross the neck or face and should not fall off

the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly

across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the

abdomen.

A booster seat can only be used in seating

positions that have a three-point type seat

belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle

seat and have a label certifying that it

complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the child

can pass the seat belt fit test below:

. Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

. Is the child able to sit without slouching?

. Do the child’s knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on

the floor?

. Can the child safely wear the seat belt

(lap belt low and snug across the hips

and shoulder belt across mid-chest and

shoulder)?

. Is the child able to use the properly

adjusted head restraint/headrest?

. Will the child be able to stay in position

for the entire ride?

JVR0473X

If you answered no to any of these ques-

tions, the child should remain in a booster

seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and state

regulations to confirm your child is using the

correct restraint system before traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the cargo

area. The child could be seriously injured

or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0099

SSS0100

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-

STRAINTS

WARNING

. Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and in-

stallation of child restraints could

result in serious injury or death of a

child or other passengers in a sudden

stop or collision:

— The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always

follow all of the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for

installation and use.

— Infants and children should never

be held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

— Do not put a seat belt around

both a child and another passen-

ger.

— INFINITI recommends that all

child restraints be installed in the

rear seat. Studies show that chil-

dren are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seat than in

the front seat. If you must install a

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

forward-facing child restraint in

the front seat, see “Forward-

facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts” (P.1-31).

— Even with the INFINITI Advanced

Air Bag System, never install a

rear-facing child restraint in the

front seat. An inflating air bag

could seriously injure or kill a child.

A rear-facing child restraint must

only be used in the rear seat.

— Be sure to purchase a child re-

straint that will fit the child and

vehicle. Some child restraints may

not fit properly in your vehicle.

— Child restraint anchor points are

designed to withstand loads from

child restraints that are properly

fitted.

— Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts or harnesses.

— A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

— Keep seatbacks as upright as

possible after fitting the child

restraint.

— Infants and children should al-

ways be placed in an appropriate

child restraint while in the vehicle.

. When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH

system or a seat belt. In a sudden

stop or collision, loose objects can

injure occupants or damage the ve-

hicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system. Some child restraints in-

clude rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to these

anchors.

For details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren System (LATCH)” (P.1-21).

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints

for infants and small children of various

sizes. When selecting any child restraint,

keep the following points in mind:

. Choose only a restraint with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

. Check the child restraint in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

. If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the child

restraint and check the various adjust-

ments to be sure the child restraint is

compatible with your child. Choose a

child restraint that is designed for your

child’s height and weight. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

. If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5

kg), you may use either the LATCH

anchors or the seat belt to install the

child restraint (not both at the same

time).

. If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5

kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child re-

straint.

. Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child

restraints be secured to the designated

anchor point on the vehicle.

JVR0499X

Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren System (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with the LATCH (Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system

compatible child restraints. This system may

also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX

compatible system. With this system, you do

not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure

the child restraint unless the combined

weight of the child and child restraint

exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined

weight of the child and child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the

vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors)

to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or other

passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

. Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

. Do not secure a child restraint in the

rear center position using the LATCH

lower anchors. The child restraint will

not be secured properly.

. Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower anchor

area. Feel to make sure there are no

obstructions over the anchors such as

seat belt webbing or seat cushion

material. The child restraint will not

be secured properly if the lower

anchors are obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly fitted child restraints. Under

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

no circumstances are they to be used to

attach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

JVR0252X

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located,

under the covers labelled ISO FIX, at the

bottom of the rear seat cushions.

To access a LATCH lower anchor, insert

your finger into the cover and pull the cover

off.

CAUTION

Store the loose LATCH lower anchor

covers to avoid losing them and where

they will not get damaged.

SSS0643

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments

that can be connected to two anchors

located at certain seating positions in your

vehicle. With this system, you do not have to

use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child

restraint. Check your child restraint for a

label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in

the instructions provided by the child re-

straint manufacturer.

SSS0644

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

SSS0790

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear parcel

shelf.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap child restraint on the rear

seat, it is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly fitted child restraints. Under

no circumstances are they to be used to

attach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

REAR-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the

combined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0648

Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

Check to make sure the LATCH attach-

ment is properly attached to the lower

anchors.

SSS0649

Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

SSS0639

Rear-facing — step 3

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments, re-

move any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-

back while tightening the webbing of the

anchor attachments.

SSS0650

Rear-facing — step 4

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to

see if the LATCH attachment holds the

restraint in place. If the restraint is not

secure, tighten the LATCH attachment

as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint or

try installing by using the vehicle seat

belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints

fit in all types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” (P.1-46).

For additional information, refer to all

Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”

(P.1-17) and “Child restraints” (P.1-19) be-

fore installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the

combined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in

the rear seats:

SSS0100

Rear-facing — step 1

1. Child restraints for infants must be used

in the rear-facing direction and there-

fore must not be used in the front seat.

Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

SSS0654

Rear-facing — step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the buckle

until you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for belt

routing.

SSS0655

Rear-facing — step 3

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint

mode). It reverts to the Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when

the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0656

Rear-facing — step 4

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

SSS0657

Rear-facing — step 5

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rearward

firmly in the center of the child restraint

to compress the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0658

Rear-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of

vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child

restraint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child

restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the

combined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the LATCH

system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

SSS0645

Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

Check to make sure the LATCH attach-

ment is properly attached to the lower

anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to the

tether anchor point. See “Installing top

tether strap” (P.1-30). Do not install

child restraints that require the use of a

top tether strap in seating positions that

do not have a top tether anchor.

SSS0646

Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint and it is inter-

fering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a differ-

ent child restraint.

SSS0647

Forward-facing — step 4

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments, re-

move any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-

back while tightening the webbing of the

anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove

any slack.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0638

Forward-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to

see if the LATCH attachment holds the

restraint in place. If the restraint is not

secure, tighten the LATCH attachment

as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of

vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 6.

SSS0790

Installing top tether strap

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly fitted child restraints. Under

no circumstances are they to be used to

attach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seat-

ing positions only).

1. Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor

point which is located directly behind the

child restraint.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top

of the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point on the rear parcel shelf.

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint

installation procedure steps in this sec-

tion before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” (P.1-46).

SSS0640

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) —

step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the

combined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seats or in the front

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in the

front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in the

rear-facing direction and, therefore,

must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint or headrest to obtain the

correct child restraint fit. If the head

restraint or headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint or headrest when the

child restraint is removed. See “Head

restraints/headrests” (P.1-7) for head

restraint or headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest

and it is interfering with the proper child

restraint fit, try another seating position

or a different child restraint.

SSS0360B

Forward-facing — step 3

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the buckle

until you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for belt

routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to the

tether anchor point (rear seat installation

only). See “Installing top tether strap”

(P.1-34). Do not install child restraints

that require the use of a top tether strap

in seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

SSS0651

Forward-facing — step 4

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint

mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking

Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt

is fully retracted.

SSS0652

Forward-facing — step 5

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

SSS0653

Forward-facing — step 6

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rearward

firmly in the center of the child restraint

with your knee to compress the vehicle

seat cushion and seatback while pulling

up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove

any slack.

SSS0641

Forward-facing — step 8

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of

vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2

through 8.

JVR0192X

Forward-facing — step 10

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

should

illuminate. If this light is not illuminated,

see “Front passenger air bag and status

light” (P.1-46). Move the child restraint

to another seating position. Have the

system checked. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

SSS0790

Installing top tether strap

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly fitted child restraints. Under

no circumstances are they to be used to

attach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

1. Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor

point which is located directly behind the

child restraint.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top

of the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point on the rear parcel shelf.

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint

installation procedure steps in this sec-

tion before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision greatly increases:

. Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

. A booster seat must only be installed

in a seating position that has a lap/

shoulder belt.

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in

mind:

. Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

. Check the booster seat in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0453

. Make sure the child’s head will be

properly supported by the booster seat

or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at

or above the center of the child’s ears.

For example, if a low back booster seat

is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be

at or above the center of the child’s ears.

If the seatback is lower than the center

of the child’s ears, a high back booster

seat

should be used.

LRS0464

. If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the

booster seat and check the various

adjustments to be sure the booster seat

is compatible with your child. Always

follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats or

the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode when using a

booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety”, “Child restraints” and “Boos-

ter seats” sections earlier in this section

before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in

the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

SSS0640

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a forward-facing direc-

tion. Always follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions.

LRS0454

Front passenger position

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint or headrest to obtain the

correct booster seat fit. If the head

restraint or headrest is removed, store

it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint or headrest when the

booster seat is removed. See “Head

restraints/headrests” (P.1-7) for head

restraint or headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating

position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure

to follow the booster seat manufac-

turer’s instructions for adjusting the seat

belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat

belt toward the retractor to take up

extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the top, middle portion

of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow

the booster seat manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in “Seat belts” (P.1-11).

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0192X

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch

in the ON position. The front passenger

air bag status light

may or may not

illuminate depending on the size of the

child and the type of booster seat used.

See “Front passenger air bag and status

light” (P.1-46).

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLE-

MENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

section contains important information con-

cerning the following systems:

. Driver and passenger front-impact sup-

plemental air bags (INFINITI Advanced

Air Bag System)

. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

. Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and front passenger

in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help

cushion the impact force to the chest and

pelvis area of the driver and front passenger

in certain side impact collisions. The side air

bag is designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag system: This

system can help cushion the impact force

to the head of occupants in front and rear

outboard seating positions in certain side

impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact,

the curtain air bags are designed to inflate

on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In

a rollover, curtain air bags on both sides are

designed to inflate and remain inflated for a

short time.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate

in certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-

ments may cause the curtain air bags to

inflate.

These supplemental restraint systems are

designed to supplement the crash protection

provided by the driver and passenger seat

belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat

belts should always be correctly worn and

the occupant seated a suitable distance

away from the steering wheel, instrument

panel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts”

(P.1-11) for instructions and precautions on

seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

SSS0131B

SSS0132B

WARNING

. The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower sever-

ity frontal collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

. The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” (P.1-46).

. The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the

seat with both feet on the floor. The

front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the INFINITI Ad-

vanced Air Bag System, if you are

unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting

sideways or out of position in any

way, you are at greater risk of injury

or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from

the front air bag if you are up against

it when it inflates. Always sit back

against the seatback and as far-away

as practical from the steering wheel

or instrument panel. Always use the

seat belts.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

. The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The Advanced Air Bag

System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage then

inflates the air bags as needed. Fail-

ure to properly wear seat belts can

increase the risk or severity of injury

in an accident.

. The front passenger seat is equipped

with occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors) that turn the front

passenger air bag OFF under some

conditions. These sensors are only

used in this seat. Failure to be

properly seated and wearing the seat

belt can increase the risk or severity

of injury in an accident. See “Front

passenger air bag and status light”

(P.1-46).

. Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk of injury if the front air bag

inflates.

SSS0007

SSS0006

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

WARNING

. Never let children ride unrestrained

or extend their hands or face out of

the window. Do not attempt to hold

them in your lap or arms. Some

examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the illustrations.

. Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-

teens and children should be properly

restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

. Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating front air bag could

seriously injure or kill your child. See

“Child restraints” (P.1-19) for details.

SSS0059A

SSS0188A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0140

SSS0162

SSS0159

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted cur-

tain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bags:

. The side air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a front impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower sever-

ity side collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

. The curtain air bags ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a front

impact, rear impact, or lower severity

side collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

. The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side

air bag on the side of the seatback of

the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in

the front seats or rear outboard seats

to extend their hand out of the

window or lean against the door.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the previous

illustrations.

. When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the supplemental side air bag

inflates, you may be seriously injured.

Be especially careful with children,

who should always be properly re-

strained. Some examples of danger-

ous riding positions are shown in the

illustrations.

. Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0507X

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front air bag modules

(INFINITI Advanced Air Bags)

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bags

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags

5. Occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors)

6. Occupant classification system control

unit

7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag inflators

8. Pressure sensors in door

9. Satellite sensors

10. Seat belts with pretensioners

11. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

12. Lap outer pretensioners

INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG

SYSTEM (front seats)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s Advanced Air Bag System, ob-

serve the following items.

. Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

. Do not place heavy loads heavier

than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback,

head restraint or in the seatback

pocket.

. Make sure that there is nothing

pressing against the rear of the seat-

back, such as a child restraint in-

stalled in the rear seat or an object

stored on the floor.

. Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

. Make sure that there is no object

placed between the seat cushion and

center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

. Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status

light.

. Be sure that the front passenger seat

does not contact the rear seat, in-

strument panel, etc., or the head

restraint does not contact the roof.

. If you notice that the front passenger

air bag status light is not operating

as described in this section, it is

recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer to check the passenger seat

Advanced Air Bag System.

. Until you have confirmed with a

retailer that your passenger seat

Advanced Air Bag System is working

properly, position the occupants in

the rear seating positions.

. Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status

light may illuminate and the supple-

mental air bag warning light may

flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements

under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in

Canada. All of the information, cautions and

warnings in this manual apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

instrument panel above the glove box. The

front air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity frontal collisions, although

they may inflate if the forces in another type

of collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not inflate

in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage

(or lack of it) is not always an indication of

proper front air bag operation.

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System has

dual stage air bag inflators. The system

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat

belt buckle switches and the occupant

classification sensors (weight sensors). In-

flator operation is based on the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage for the driver.

For the front passenger, the occupant

classification sensors are also monitored.

Based on information from the sensors, only

one front air bag may inflate in a crash,

depending on the crash severity and whether

the front occupants are belted or unbelted.

Additionally, the front passenger air bag

may be automatically turned OFF under

some conditions, depending on the informa-

tion provided by the occupant classification

sensors. If the front passenger air bag is

OFF, the front passenger air bag status light

will be illuminated. (See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” (P.1-46) for further

details.) One front air bag inflating does not

indicate improper performance of the sys-

tem.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, it is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a dis-

ability, you may also contact an INFINITI

retailer. Contact information is contained in

the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by release of

smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does

not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not

to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on the

head and chest of the front occupants. They

can help save lives and reduce serious

injuries. However, an inflating front air bag

may cause facial abrasions or other injuries.

Front air bags do not provide restraint to the

lower body.

Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the driver

and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the steering wheel or

instrument panel. The front air bags inflate

quickly in order to help protect the front

occupants. Because of this, the force of the

front air bag inflating can increase the risk of

injury if the occupant is too close to, or is

against, the air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

JVR0192X

Front passenger air bag and status

light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully to

learn how it operates. Proper use of the

seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protection.

Failure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats, seat

belts and child restraints can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident.

Status light:

The front passenger seat is equipped with an

occupant classification sensors (weight sen-

sors) that turn the front passenger air bag on

or off depending on the weight applied to

the front passenger seat. The status of the

front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is

indicated by the front passenger air bag

status light

which is located on the

instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the front passenger air bag status

light illuminates for about 7 seconds and

then turns off or remains illuminated de-

pending on the front passenger seat occu-

pied status. The light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION

PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS LIGHT

(

)

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat

(illuminated)

INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody

Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small

Adult in the front passenger seat

(illuminated)

INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat

OFF

(dark)

ACTIVATED

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

In addition to the above, certain objects

placed on the front passenger seat may also

cause the light to operate as described

above depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the

normal operation and troubleshooting of

this occupant classification sensor system,

please refer to “Normal operation” (P.1-49)

and “Troubleshooting” (P.1-50).

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S.

regulations. If the front passenger air bag

is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver

air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are

not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requiring

the air bag to be automatically turned OFF.

Certain sensors are used to meet the

requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this

vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the seat

by weight. For example, if a child is in the

front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag

System is designed to turn the passenger air

bag OFF in accordance with the regulations.

Also, if a child restraint of the type specified

in the regulations is on the seat, its weight

and the child’s weight can be detected and

cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not cause

the passenger air bag to be automatically

turned OFF. For small adults it may be

turned OFF, however, if the occupant takes

his/her weight off the seat cushion (for

example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on

an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being

out of position), this could cause the sensor

to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be

seated and wearing the seat belt properly

for the most effective protection by the seat

belt and supplemental air bag.

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear seat.

INFINITI also recommends that appropriate

child restraints and booster seats be prop-

erly installed in a rear seat. If this is not

possible, the occupant classification sensor

is designed to operate as described above to

turn the front passenger air bag OFF for

specified child restraints as required by the

regulations. Failing to properly secure child

restraints and to use the ALR mode may

allow the restraint to tip or move in a

collision or sudden stop. This can also result

in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash

instead of being OFF. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Child restraints” (P.1-19)

for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the passenger air bag is designed not to

inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object’s weight

detected by the occupant classification

sensor. Other conditions could also result in

air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing

on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all

vehicle occupants are seated and restrained

properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front

passenger air bag is automatically turned

OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is

illuminated (indicating that the air bag is

OFF), it could be that the person is a small

adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or

not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the front passenger air bag status light

may or may not be illuminated, depending on

the size of the child and the type of child

restraint being used. If the front passenger

air bag status light is not illuminated (in-

dicating that the air bag might inflate in a

crash), it could be that the child restraint or

seat belt is not being used properly. Make

sure that the child restraint is installed

properly, the seat belt is used properly and

the occupant is positioned properly. If the

front passenger air bag status light is still not

illuminated, reposition the occupant or child

restraint in a rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light will

not illuminate even though you believe that

the child restraint, the seat belts and the

occupant are properly positioned, it is re-

commended that you take your vehicle to an

INFINITI retailer. An INFINITI retailer can

check system status by using a special tool.

However, until you have confirmed with

your retailer that your air bag is working

properly, reposition the occupant or child

restraint in a rear seat.

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System and

front passenger air bag status light will take

a few seconds to register a change in the

passenger seat status. This is normal system

operation and does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air bag

warning light

, located in the meter and

gauges area of the instrument panel, will be

illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the

system checked. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Normal operation:

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front passen-

ger based on weight, please follow the

precautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

. Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) hanging on

the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

. Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear of

the seatback.

. Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the

front passenger seat.

. Make sure that the front passenger seat

or seatback is not forced back against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

. Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

. Make sure that the front passenger seat

head restraint does not contact the roof

when adjusting the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in “Seats”

(P.1-2). Sit upright, leaning against the

seatback, and centered on the seat

cushion with your feet comfortably ex-

tended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your

lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in “Seat

belts” (P.1-11). Front passenger seat belt

buckle status is monitored by the occu-

pant classification sensor system, and is

used as an input to determine occupancy

status. So, it is highly recommended that

the front passenger fastens his/her seat

belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the front

passenger before the vehicle is put into

motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking

the front passenger air bag status light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor

system generally keeps the classification

locked during driving, so it is important that

you confirm that the front passenger is

properly classified prior to driving. How-

ever, the occupant classification sensor may

recalculate the weight of the occupant

under some conditions (both while driving

and when stopped), so the front passenger

seat occupant should continue to remain

seated as outlined above.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Troubleshooting:

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying

the front passenger seat:

Occupant is a small adult - the air bag

status light is functioning as intended.

The front passenger air bag is sup-

pressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the

following conditions that may be inter-

fering with the weight sensors:

Occupant is not sitting upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and cen-

tered on the seat cushion with his/her

feet comfortably extended to the

floor.

A child restraint or other object press-

ing against the rear of the seatback.

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

An object placed under the front

passenger seat.

An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or be-

tween the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions.

Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the

person should be advised not to ride in

the front passenger seat and the vehicle

should be checked by an INFINITI retailer

as soon as possible.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child

or child restraint occupying the front

passenger seat:

This may be due to the following condi-

tions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

Small adult or child is not sitting

upright, leaning against the seatback,

and centered on the seat cushion with

his/her feet comfortably extended to

the floor.

The child restraint is not properly

installed as outlined in “Child re-

straints” (P.1-19).

An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

A child restraint or other object press-

ing against the rear of the seatback.

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

An object placed under the front

passenger seat.

An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console.

The front passenger seat head re-

straint contacting the roof.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions.

Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small

adult, child or child restraint should be

repositioned in the rear seat and the

vehicle should be checked by an INFINITI

retailer as soon as possible.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passen-

ger and no objects on the front passen-

ger seat, the vehicle should be checked

by an INFINITI retailer as soon as

possible.

Other supplemental front-impact

air bag precautions

WARNING

. Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instru-

ment panel. Also, do not place any

objects between any occupant and

the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause in-

jury if the front air bags inflate.

. Do not place objects with sharp edges

on the seat. Also, do not place heavy

objects on the seat that will leave

permanent impressions in the seat.

Such objects can damage the seat or

occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors). This can affect the

operation of the air bag system and

result in serious personal injury.

. Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This

can damage the seat or occupant

classification sensors. This can also

affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious personal

injury.

. Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

. No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the air bag system. This is to prevent

accidental inflation of the supple-

mental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

. Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end struc-

ture. This could affect proper opera-

tion of the front air bag system.

. Tampering with the air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

Tampering includes changes to the

steering wheel and the instrument

panel assembly by placing material

over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by

installing additional trim material

around the air bag system.

. Removing or modifying the front

passenger seat may affect the func-

tion of the air bag system and result

in serious personal injury.

. Modifying or tampering with the

front passenger seat may result in

serious personal injury. For example,

do not change the front seats by

placing material on the seat cushion

or by installing additional trim mate-

rial, such as seat covers, on the seat

that is not specifically designed to

assure proper air bag operation.

Additionally, do not stow any objects

under the front passenger seat or the

seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classifica-

tion sensors.

. No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for work on and

around the front air bag. It is also

recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for installation of electrical

equipment. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or

disconnected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

. A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified

repair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air bag

system and guide the buyer to the appro-

priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SSS0521

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-

IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR

BAG AND ROOF-MOUNTED

CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT AND

ROLLOVER SUPPLEMENTAL AIR

BAG SYSTEMS

The side air bags are located in the outside

of the seatback of the front seats. The

curtain air bags are located in the side roof

rails. All of the information, cautions and

warnings in this manual apply and must be

followed. The side air bags and curtain air

bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity impact. They are designed to inflate

on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate

in certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-

ments may cause the curtain air bags to

inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper supplemental side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag opera-

tion.

When side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke. This smoke is

not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with

a history of a breathing condition should get

fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on the

chest of the front occupants. Curtain air

bags help to cushion the impact force to the

head of occupants in the front and rear

outboard seating positions in all rows. They

can help save lives and reduce serious

injuries. However, an inflating side air bags

and curtain air bags may cause abrasions or

other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air

bags do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and

the driver and passenger seated upright as

far as practical away from the side air bag.

Rear seat passengers should be seated as far

away as practical from the door finishers

and side roof rails. The side air bags and

curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to

help protect the occupants. Because of this,

the force of the side air bags and curtain air

bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if

the occupant is too close to, or is against,

these air bag modules during inflation. In a

rollover, the curtain air bags on both sides

are designed to inflate. Under both side-

impact situations, the curtain air bags will

remain inflated for a short period of time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the

systems are operational.

WARNING

. Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if side air bag inflates.

. Right after inflation, several side air

bags and curtain air bag system

components will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn your-

self.

. No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

side air bag and curtain air bags. This

is to prevent damage to or accidental

inflation of the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems.

. Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

side air bag and curtain air bag

systems.

. Tampering with the air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material near the

seatback or by installing additional

trim material, such as seat covers,

around the side air bags.

. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for work on and

around the side air bag and curtain

air bag. It is also recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for installa-

tion of electrical equipment. The

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not

be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the side-impact air bag

system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETEN-

SIONERS (front seats)

WARNING

. The pretensioners cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

. If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but a pretensioner is not

activated, be sure to have the pre-

tensioner system checked and, if

necessary, replaced. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

. No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioners. This is to prevent

damage to or accidental activation of

the pretensioner system. Tampering

with the pretensioner system may

result in serious personal injury.

. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for work on and

around the pretensioner system. It is

also recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for installation of

electrical equipment. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the

pretensioner system.

. If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner or scrap the vehicle, it is

recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service. Correct pre-

tensioner disposal procedures are set

forth in the appropriate INFINITI

Service Manual. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause personal in-

jury.

. If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should be

checked. It is recommended an

INFINITI retailer performs this ser-

vice to verify it is still functioning

correctly. The OCS should be checked

even if no air bags deploy as a result

of the impact. Failure to verify proper

OCS function may result in an im-

proper air bag deployment resulting

in injury or death.

The pretensioner system may activate with

the supplemental air bag system in certain

types of collisions. Working with the seat

belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certain

types of collisions, helping to restrain front

seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat

belt retractor. These seat belts are used the

same way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner seat belt activates,

smoke is released and a loud noise may be

heard. The smoke is not harmful, and it does

not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not

to inhale it as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters

allow the seat belt to release webbing (if

necessary) to reduce forces against the

chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light

is used to indicate malfunctions in the

pretensioner system. (See “Supplemental

air bag warning light” (P.1-55) for more

details.) If the operation of the supplemental

air bag warning light indicates there is a

malfunction, have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the seat belt

pretensioners and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SSS1016

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag systems are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SRS air bag

The warning labels are located on the

surface of the sun visors.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an air bag in front

of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause

serious injury or death.

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag systems,

pretensioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates for about 7 seconds and

then turns off. This means the SRS air bag

systems are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

air bag and/or pretensioner systems need

servicing:

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

1-56 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

. The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

. The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

. The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the air bag or

pretensioner systems may not operate prop-

erly. They must be checked and repaired. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air

bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or

pretensioner systems will not operate in

an accident. To help avoid injury to

yourself or others, have your vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

PROCEDURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioners are designed to

activate on a one-time-only basis. As a

reminder, unless it is damaged, the supple-

mental air bag warning light will remain

illuminated after inflation has occurred.

These systems should be repaired and/or

replaced as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,

curtain air bags, pretensioners and related

parts should be pointed out to the person

conducting the maintenance. The ignition

switch should always be in the LOCK

position when working under the hood or

inside the vehicle.

WARNING

. Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioner must also

be replaced. The air bag module and

pretensioner should be replaced. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service. However, the

air bag module and pretensioner

system cannot be repaired.

. The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag and the pretensioner system

should be inspected if there is any

damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

. If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner or

scrap the vehicle, it is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer. Correct

supplemental air bag and seat belt

pretensioner system disposal proce-

dures are set forth in the appropriate

INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect

disposal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

. If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should be

checked by an INFINITI retailer to

verify it is still functioning correctly.

The OCS should be checked even if no

air bags deploy as a result of the

impact. Failure to verify proper OCS

function may result in an improper air

bag deployment resulting in injury or

death.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

1-58 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit ................................................................................. 2-3

Instrument panel ............................................................... 2-5

Meters and gauges .......................................................... 2-6

Speedometer and odometer ..................................... 2-7

Tachometer ................................................................... 2-8

Engine coolant temperature gauge ....................... 2-8

Fuel gauge ..................................................................... 2-9

Compass (if so equipped) ............................................... 2-9

Zone variation change procedure ......................... 2-11

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ........................................................................... 2-12

Checking lights ........................................................... 2-12

Warning lights ............................................................ 2-12

Indicator lights ........................................................... 2-18

Audible reminders ..................................................... 2-19

Vehicle information display .......................................... 2-20

Indicators for operation .......................................... 2-23

Indicators for maintenance .................................... 2-26

Trip computer ............................................................. 2-29

Clock and outside air temperature ....................... 2-31

Security systems ............................................................. 2-32

Vehicle Security System .......................................... 2-32

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .................. 2-33

Wiper and washer switch ............................................ 2-34

Rain-sensing auto wiper system

(if so equipped) ........................................................ 2-36

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ................................................................................ 2-37

Headlight and turn signal switch ............................... 2-38

Headlight switch ..................................................... 2-38

Turn signal switch ................................................... 2-43

Fog light switch ...................................................... 2-44

Horn .................................................................................. 2-44

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ......... 2-45

Heated seats (if so equipped) ..................................... 2-45

Operation with switch ........................................... 2-46

Operation with touch screen ............................... 2-46

AUTO mode setting ............................................... 2-46

Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) ................... 2-47

Power outlets .................................................................. 2-47

Storage ............................................................................ 2-48

Cup holders .............................................................. 2-48

Soft bottle holder .................................................... 2-49

Sunglasses holder .................................................... 2-49

Glove box .................................................................. 2-50

Console box ............................................................. 2-50

Card holder ................................................................. 2-51

Storage box ................................................................ 2-51

Coat hooks .................................................................. 2-51

Trunk hooks ................................................................ 2-52

Windows ........................................................................... 2-52

Power windows ......................................................... 2-52

Moonroof (if so equipped) ........................................... 2-55

Power moonroof ....................................................... 2-55

Interior lights .................................................................... 2-57

Map lights ................................................................... 2-57

Console light (if so equipped) ................................ 2-57

Interior light control switch .................................... 2-57

Vanity mirror lights ........................................................ 2-58

Trunk light ........................................................................ 2-59

Courtesy light .................................................................. 2-59

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver

(if so equipped) ............................................................... 2-59

Programming HomeLink

.................................... 2-60

Programming HomeLink

for Canadian

customers and gate openers ............................... 2-61

Operating the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver ............................................. 2-62

Programming troubleshooting ............................ 2-62

Clearing the programmed information ............. 2-62

Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

button .................................................. 2-62

If your vehicle is stolen .......................................... 2-63

WAA0093X

1. Side ventilator (P.4-34)

2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal

switch (P.2-38)

3. Steering wheel

— Horn (P.2-44)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-38)

— Heated steering wheel (if so

equipped) (P.2-47)

— Power steering (P.5-124)

4. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P.2-34)

5. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2)

6. Shift lever (P.5-16)

7. INFINITI controller*

8. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P.2-45, P.5-129)

9. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-23)

10. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-43)

11. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip od-

ometer (P.2-7)

12. Electric tilting/telescopic steering

wheel switch (P.3-27)

13. Manual tilting/telescopic steering

wheel lever (P.3-27)

14. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

— Audio control steering switch*

— Hands-Free Phone System switch*

— Voice recognition system switch*

15. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Trip computer switch (P.2-29)

— Cruise control switches (if so

equipped) (P.5-66)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P.5-68)

— Dynamic driver assistance switch (if

so equipped) (P. 5-25, P.5-45, P.5-89)

16. INFINITI Drive Mode Selector (P.5-21)

Instruments and controls 2-3

COCKPIT

2-4 Instruments and controls

*: Refer to the INFINITI InTouch

Own-

er’s Manual.

JVC0969X

1. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-18)

2. Meters and gauges (P.2-6)

— Clock (P.2-31)

3. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-11)

4. Center ventilator (P.4-34)

5. Heater and air conditioner control

(P.4-34)

6. Upper touch screen display* (upper

display) and Navigation system* (if so

equipped)

— RearView Monitor (if so equipped)

(P.4-3)

— Around View

Monitor (if so

equipped) (P.4-11)

7. Lower touch screen display* (lower

display)

8. Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch (P.2-37)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P.1-38)

10. Hood release handle (P.3-22)

11. Fuse box cover (P.8-17)

12. Parking brake (P.5-20)

13. Storage box (P.2-51) and power outlet

(P.2-47)

14. Seat heater switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-45)

15. Audio system*

16. Trunk release power cancel switch

(P.3-24)

17. Glove box (P.2-50)

*: Refer to the INFINITI InTouch

Own-

er’s Manual.

Instruments and controls 2-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-6 Instruments and controls

JVC0428X

1. Tachometer* (P.2-8)

2. Warning and indicator lights (P.2-12)

3. Speedometer* (P.2-7)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge*

(P.2-8)

5. Vehicle information display (P.2-20)/

Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-7)

6. Fuel gauge* (P.2-9)

*: The needle indicators may move slightly

after the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position. This is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

. For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dam-

pened with water. Never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or cause discoloration to the

lens.

. Do not spray any liquid such as water

on the meter lens. Spraying liquid

may cause the system to malfunction.

METERS AND GAUGES

JVI0636X

Speedometer

SPEEDOMETER AND OD-

OMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per

hour (km/h).

JVI0637X

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer and twin trip odometer

are displayed in the vehicle information

display when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance

of individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

under the

combination meter panel changes the dis-

play as follows:

TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

for more

than 1 second resets the trip odometer to

zero.

Instruments and controls 2-7

2-8 Instruments and controls

WAC0191X

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev

the engine into the red zone

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce

engine speed. Operating the engine in

the red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

JVI0639X

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-

TURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range when the gauge needle points

within the zone

shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with

the outside air temperature and driving

conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature is near the hot (H) end of

the normal range, reduce vehicle speed

to decrease the temperature. If the

gauge is over the normal range, stop

the vehicle as soon as safely possible and

let the engine idle. If the engine is

overheated, continued operation of the

vehicle may seriously damage the engine.

See “If your vehicle overheats” (P.6-13)

for immediate action required.

JVI0640X

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down

hills.

The gauge needle returns to “0” (Empty)

after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge

registers “0” (Empty).

The low fuel warning light

illuminates on

the meter when the fuel level is getting low.

Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably

before the gauge reaches “0”. There will be a

small reserve of fuel in the tank when the

fuel gauge needle reaches “0”.

The

indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the right side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips, the

light should turn off. If the light

remains on after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

. For additional information, see “Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL)” (P.2-

18).

SIC3181

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, the compass display

will

indicate the direction of the vehicle’s head-

ing.

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the com-

pass by driving the vehicle in 3 complete

circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can

also calibrate the compass by driving your

Instruments and controls 2-9

COMPASS (if so equipped)

2-10 Instruments and controls

vehicle on your everyday route. The compass

will be calibrated once it has tracked 3

complete circles.

To turn on and off the compass manually,

push the

switch while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

SIC0611B

Zone map

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE

PROCEDURE

The difference between magnetic north and

geographical north is known as variance. In

some areas, this difference can sometimes

be great enough to cause false compass

readings. Follow these instructions to set the

variance for your particular location if this

happens:

1. Push the

switch for more than 3

seconds. The current zone number will

appear in the display.

2. Find your current location and variance

number on the zone map.

3. Push the

switch repeatedly until the

new zone number appears in the display,

then release the switch. After you re-

lease the switch, the display will show a

compass direction within a few seconds.

If the compass deviates from the

correct indication soon after repeated

adjustment, it is recommended you

have the compass checked at an

INFINITI retailer.

The compass may not indicate the

correct compass point in tunnels or

while driving up or down a steep hill.

(The compass returns to the correct

compass point when the vehicle

moves to an area where the geomag-

netism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

. Do not install a ski rack, antenna,

etc., which are attached to the vehi-

cle by means of a magnet. They affect

the operation of the compass.

. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it

may cause the liquid cleaner to enter

the mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-11

2-12 Instruments and controls

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light

Power steering warning light

High beam assist indicator light (if so

equipped)

Brake warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime High beam indicator light

Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Charge warning light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light

Security indicator light

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) sys-

tem warning light (if so equipped)

ECO drive indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light Exterior light indicator

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off in-

dicator light

Low tire pressure warning light Front fog light indicator light

Master warning light Front passenger air bag status light

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if

so equipped) will come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) will

come on briefly and then go off:

, or , , , ,

If any light does not come on or operates in a

way other than described, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunc-

tion. It is recommended you have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Some indicators and warnings are also

displayed in the vehicle information display

between the speedometer and tachometer.

(See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-20).)

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminates and then

turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-

tional.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may

indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked. It is recommended

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock

assistance. (See “Brake system” (P.5-126).)

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the light comes on when the

parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid

level. If the light comes on while the engine is

running with the parking brake not applied,

stop the vehicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid

is necessary, add fluid and have the

system checked. It is recommended you

have this service performed by an

INFINITI retailer. (See “Brake fluid”

(P.8-9).)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked. It is recom-

mended you have this service performed

by an INFINITI retailer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator:

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the

brake warning light and the Anti-lock Brak-

ing System (ABS) warning light illuminate, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the brake system checked,

and if necessary repaired. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

(See “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn-

ing light” (P.2-12).)

WARNING

. Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for re-

pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle

towed because driving it could be

dangerous.

. Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or low brake

fluid level may increase your stopping

distance and braking will require

greater pedal effort as well as pedal

travel.

. If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging system

is not functioning properly. Turn the engine

off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken, missing or if the light remains

on, have your vehicle serviced immediately. It

is recommended you visit an INFINITI re-

tailer for this service.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Forward Emergency Braking

(FEB) system warning light (if so

equipped)

This light comes on when the ignition switch

is placed in the ON position. It turns off after

the engine is started.

Instruments and controls 2-13

2-14 Instruments and controls

This light illuminates when the FEB with

pedestrian detection system is set to OFF on

the lower display.

If the light illuminates when the FEB with

pedestrian detection system is ON, it may

indicate that the system is unavailable. See

“Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with

pedestrian detection system” (P.5-100) for

more details.

Low fuel warning light

This light illuminates when the fuel in the

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

reaches the 0 (empty) position.

There will be a small reserve of fuel remain-

ing in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches

the 0 position.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors

the tire pressure of all tires except the spare

tire (if so equipped).

The low tire pressure warning light warns of

low tire pressure and flat tire (if so equipped)

or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning

properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1

second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

also appears in the vehicle information dis-

play.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the

tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label. The low tire pressure

warning light does not automatically turn

off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After

the tire is inflated to the recommended

pressure, the vehicle must be driven at

speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate

the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to

check the tire pressure.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning is

active as long as the low tire pressure

warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, see “Vehicle

information display” (P.2-20), “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5) and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

(P.6-3).

Flat tire warning (if so equipped):

The flat tire warning warns of a flat tire.

If the vehicle is being driven with one or more

flat tires, the low tire pressure warning light

will illuminate continuously and a chime will

sound for 10 seconds. A “Flat Tire - Visit

dealer” warning also appears in the vehicle

information display.

The chime will only sound at the first

indication of a flat tire and the warning light

will illuminate continuously. When the flat

tire warning is activated, have the system

reset and the tire checked, and replaced if

necessary. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for these services. Even if

the tire is inflated to the specified COLD tire

pressure, the warning light will continue to

illuminate until the system is reset by an

INFINITI retailer.

Your vehicle can be driven for a limited time

on a flat tire. See “Run-flat tires” (P.6-4).

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The light

will remain on after the 1 minute. Have the

system checked. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service. The “Tire

Pressure Low - Add Air” warning does not

appear if the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, see “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5).

WARNING

. Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment man-

ufacturer for the possible influences

before use.

. If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch pushed ON, have

the vehicle checked as soon as possi-

ble. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

. If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop the vehicle as soon as

possible. Driving with under-inflated

tires may permanently damage the

tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in serious

personal injury. Check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD

tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn the

low tire pressure warning light OFF.

If the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS

may be malfunctioning. If you have a

flat tire, replace it with a spare tire (if

so equipped) or repair it with the

emergency tire puncture repair kit (if

so equipped) as soon as possible. If no

tire is flat and all tires are properly

inflated, it is recommended you con-

sult an INFINITI retailer.

. For models with run-flat tires,

although you can continue driving

with a punctured run-flat tire, re-

member that vehicle handling stabi-

lity is reduced, which could lead to an

accident and personal injury. Also,

driving a long distance at high speeds

may damage the tires.

— Do not drive at speeds above 50

MPH (80 km/h) and do not drive

more than approximately 93 miles

(150 km) with a punctured run-

flat tire. The actual distance the

vehicle can be driven on a flat tire

depends on outside temperature,

vehicle load, road conditions and

other factors.

— If you detect any unusual sounds

or vibrations while driving with a

punctured run-flat tire, pull off

the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble. The tire may be seriously

damaged and need to be replaced.

. Since the spare tire is not equipped

with the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced, the

TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash

for approximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after the 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or

TPMS system reset as soon as pos-

sible. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for these services.

. Replacing tires with those not origin-

ally specified by INFINITI could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

. The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

. If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the

Instruments and controls 2-15

2-16 Instruments and controls

TPMS may not operate correctly.

. Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the master warning light illumi-

nates if any of the following warnings

appear in the vehicle information display:

. No key warning

. PUSH warning

. Key ID Incorrect warning

. Low washer fluid warning

. Door/trunk open warning

. Loose fuel cap warning

. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning

. Flat Tire - Visit dealer warning (if so

equipped)

. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning (if so

equipped)

. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)

warning (if so equipped)

. Intelligent Key system warning

. Chassis control warning

. Parking brake release warning

. SHIFT “P” warning

. Low oil pressure warning

See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-20).

If the driver assist system warnings appear

in the vehicle information display, the master

warning light also illuminates. See “Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) system” (P.5-

33), “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-37),

“Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI)” (P.5-45),

“Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)” (P.5-

57), “Distance Control Assist (DCA)” (P.5-

89), “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)

with pedestrian detection system” (P.5-

100) and “Predictive Forward Collision

Warning (PFCW)” (P.5-110).

Power steering warning light

Models with Direct Adaptive Steering :

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the power steering warning light

illuminates. After starting the engine, the

power steering warning light stays on for a

few seconds and turns off. This indicates

that Direct Adaptive Steering is operational.

Drive the vehicle after the power steering

warning light turns off.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while driving, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop the vehicle. If the

power steering warning light turns off, you

can drive again. If the power steering

warning light continues to illuminate, it is

recommended you have Direct Adaptive

Steering checked by an INFINITI retailer.

(See “Direct Adaptive Steering type” (P.5-

124).)

Models with electric power steering :

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the power steering warning light

illuminates. After starting the engine, the

power steering warning light turns off. This

indicates the electric power steering is

operational.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the electric power steering is not

functioning properly and may need servicing.

It is recommended you have the electric

power steering checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, the

power assist to the steering will cease

operation but you will still have control of

the vehicle. At this time, greater steering

efforts are required to operate the steering

wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

See “Electric power steering type” (P.5-124).

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever

the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, and will remain illuminated until the

driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same

time, the chime will sound for about 6

seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front

passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is

not fastened when the front passenger’s

seat is occupied.

See “Seat belts” (P.1-11) for precautions on

seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the supplemental front air bag

and supplemental side air bag, curtain side-

impact air bag systems and/or pretensioner

seat belt are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

supplemental front air bag, supplemental

side air bag, supplemental curtain side-

impact air bag and pretensioner seat belt

needs servicing.

. The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

. The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

. The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supple-

mental Restraint Systems and/or the pre-

tensioner seat belt may not function

properly.

For additional information, see “Supplemen-

tal restraint system” (P.1-38).

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the supple-

mental front air bag, supplemental side

air bag, curtain side-impact air bag

systems and/or pretensioner seat belt

will not operate in an accident. To help

avoid injury to yourself or others, have

your vehicle checked. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light illuminates and then

turns off.

The light will blink when the VDC system or

the traction control system is operating, thus

alerting the driver that the vehicle is nearing

its traction limits. The road surface may be

slippery.

When the VDC warning light illuminates

when the VDC system is turned on, this light

alerts the driver to the fact that the VDC

system’s fail-safe mode is operating, for

example the VDC, active trace control func-

tion, Brake Force Distribution or hill start

assist system may not be functioning prop-

erly. Have the system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service. If a malfunction occurs in the

system, the VDC system function will be

canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For

additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” (P.5-129).

Instruments and controls 2-17

2-18 Instruments and controls

INDICATOR LIGHTS

ECO drive indicator light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light will come on and then turn

off.

When the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector is

turned to the ECO mode, the ECO drive

indicator light will illuminate, blink or remain

off depending on the accelerator pedal

operation to help assist the driver to drive

economically. For more details, see “ECO

mode” (P.5-22).

Exterior light indicator

This indicator illuminates when the headlight

switch is turned to the AUTO,

position and the exterior lights (such as front

parking lights, headlights, etc.) are on. The

indicator turns off when these lights are

turned off.

Front fog light indicator light

The front fog light indicator light illuminates

when the front fog lights are on. (See “Fog

light switch” (P.2-44).)

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light

(

) located on the instrument panel will be

lit and the passenger front air bag will be

OFF depending on how the front passenger

seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light

operation, see “INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System (front seats)” (P.1-44).

High beam assist indicator

light (if so equipped)

The indicator light illuminates when the

headlights come on while the headlight

switch is in the AUTO position with the high

beam selected. This indicates that the high

beam assist system is operational. (See

“High beam assist” (P.2-39).)

High beam indicator light

This light comes on when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam

is selected.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on

steady or blinks while the engine is running,

it may indicate a potential emission control

malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also

come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose

or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel.

Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is

installed and closed tightly, and that the

vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (11.4 liters)

of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the

light should

turn off if no other potential emission

control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indicates

that the vehicle is not ready for an emission

control system inspection/maintenance test.

(See “Readiness for Inspection/Mainte-

nance (I/M) test (US only)” (P.10-21).)

Operation:

The malfunction indicator light will come on

in one of two ways:

. Malfunction indicator light on steady —

An emission control system malfunction

has been detected. Check the fuel-filler

cap if the Loose Fuel Cap warning

appears in the vehicle information dis-

play. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few driving

trips. If the

light does not turn off

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service. You do

not need to have your vehicle towed to

the retailer.

. Malfunction indicator light blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which

may damage the emission control sys-

tem.

To reduce or avoid emission control

system damage:

1) Do not drive at speeds above 45

MPH (72 km/h).

2) Avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion.

3) Avoid steep uphill grades.

4) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop

blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the retailer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary could

lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel

economy, and possible damage to the

emission control system.

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switch is in

the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This

function indicates the security system

equipped on the vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning, this

light will remain on while the ignition switch

is in the ON position. For additional informa-

tion, see “Security systems” (P.2-32).

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light will come on and then turn

off.

The light comes on when the VDC off switch

is pushed to OFF. This indicates that the

VDC system and traction control system are

not operating.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side door is

opened while the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC position. Make sure the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position, and

take the Intelligent Key with you when

leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver side door

is opened with the light switch in the

position and the ignition switch in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the

vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-19

2-20 Instruments and controls

Parking brake reminder chime

The parking brake reminder chime will sound

if the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH (7

km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop

the vehicle and release the parking brake.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a brake pad requires repla-

cement, it will make a high pitched scraping

sound when the vehicle is in motion. This

scraping sound will first occur only when the

brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of

the brake pad, the sound will always be

heard even if the brake pedal is not

depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon

as possible if the warning sound is heard.

JVI0641X

The vehicle information display is located

between the tachometer and the speed-

ometer, and it displays the warnings and

information. The following items are also

displayed if the vehicle is equipped with

them:

. Automatic Transmission (AT)

— “Driving the vehicle” (P.5-16)

. All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

— “Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD)”

(P.5-121)

. Cruise control

— “Cruise control” (P.5-66)

. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

— “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” (P.5-

68)

. Active Lane Control

— “Active Lane Control” (P.5-25)

. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

— “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys-

tem” (P.5-33)

. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

— “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-37)

. Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI)

— “Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI)” (P.5-

45)

. Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)

— “Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)”

(P.5-57)

. Distance Control Assist (DCA)

— “Distance Control Assist (DCA)” (P.5-

89)

. Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with

pedestrian detection system

— “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)

with pedestrian detection system”

(P.5-100)

. Predictive Forward Collision Warning

(PFCW)

— “Predictive Forward Collision Warning

(PFCW)” (P.5-110)

. Active trace control

— “Active trace control” (P.5-130)

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

. Intelligent Key system

— “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-6)

Instruments and controls 2-21

2-22 Instruments and controls

WAC0156X

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. Engine start operation indicator

This indicator appears when the shift lever is

in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will

start by pushing the ignition switch with the

brake pedal depressed. You can start the

engine directly in any position of the ignition

switch.

2. NO KEY warning

The warning appears when the door is

closed with the Intelligent Key left outside

the vehicle and the ignition switch in the

ACC or ON position. Make sure that the

Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-6) for more

details.

3. SHIFT “P” warning

This warning appears when the ignition

switch is pushed to stop the engine with

the shift lever in any position except the P

(Park) position.

If this warning appears, move the shift lever

to the P (Park) position or push the ignition

switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound. (See

“Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-14).)

4. “PUSH” warning

This warning appears when the shift lever is

moved to the P (Park) position with the

ignition switch in the ACC position after the

SHIFT “P” warning appears.

To push the ignition switch to the OFF

position, perform the following procedure:

. SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the shift

lever to “P”) ? PUSH warning ? (Push

the ignition switch ? ignition switch

position is turned to ON) ? PUSH

warning ? (Push the ignition switch ?

ignition switch position is turned to OFF)

5. Intelligent Key battery discharge

indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent

Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the battery

with a new one. (See “Intelligent Key battery

replacement” (P.8-19).)

6. Engine start operation for Intel-

ligent Key system indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent

Key battery is running out of power and

when the Intelligent Key System and vehicle

are not communicating normally.

If this indicator appears, touch the ignition

switch with the Intelligent Key while depres-

sing the brake pedal. (See “Intelligent Key

battery discharge” (P.5-14).)

7. Remote engine start indicator (if

so equipped)

This indicator appears when the engine has

been started using the remote engine start

function. To start the vehicle, depress the

brake pedal and place the ignition switch in

the ON position.

For more details, see “Remote engine start”

(P.3-19).

8. Key ID Incorrect warning

This warning appears when the ignition

switch is pushed from the LOCK position

and the Intelligent Key cannot be recognized

by the system. You cannot start the engine

with an unregistered key. Use the registered

Intelligent Key.

See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-6).

9. Parking brake release warning

This warning appears when the vehicle

speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the

parking brake is applied.

10. Low fuel warning

This warning appears when the fuel level in

the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

Instruments and controls 2-23

2-24 Instruments and controls

reaches the empty (0) position.

There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in

the tank when the fuel gauge reaches the

empty (0) position.

11. Low washer fluid warning

This warning appears when the washer tank

fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as

necessary. (See “Window washer fluid” (P.8-

10).)

12. Door/trunk open warning

This warning appears if any of the doors

and/or the trunk lid are open or not closed

securely. The vehicle icon indicates which

door or the trunk lid is open on the display.

13. Intelligent Key system warning

This warning appears if there is a malfunc-

tion in the Intelligent Key system.

If this warning appears while the engine is

stopped, the engine cannot be started. If this

warning appears while the engine is running,

the vehicle can be driven. However, in these

cases, have the system checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

14. Loose Fuel Cap warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the

vehicle has been refueled. (See “Fuel-filler

cap” (P.3-25).)

15. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

warning

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and low tire pressure is detected. The

warning appears each time the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position as long

as the low tire pressure warning light

remains illuminated. If this warning appears,

stop the vehicle and adjust the pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Information

label. (See “Low tire pressure warning light”

(P.2-14) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)” (P.5-5).)

16. Flat Tire - Visit dealer warning

(if so equipped)

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and one or more flat tires are detected

while driving. A chime also sounds for

approximately 10 seconds. (See “Low tire

pressure warning light” (P.2-14) and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-

5).)

17. Low oil pressure warning

This warning appears if low engine oil

pressure is detected. If the warning appears

during normal driving, pull off the road in a

safe area, stop the engine immediately and

call an INFINITI retailer or other authorized

repair shop.

The low oil pressure warning is not designed

to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” (P.8-6).)

18. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning

(if so equipped)

This warning appears when the Intelligent

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not func-

tioning properly while the engine is running.

The displayed message will vary depending

on the condition of the AWD system mal-

function. (See “Intelligent All-Wheel Drive

(AWD)” (P.5-121).)

19. Extended storage fuse warning

(if so equipped)

This warning may appear if the extended

storage fuse switch is not pushed in

(switched on). When this warning appears,

push in (switch on) the extended storage

fuse switch to turn off the warning. For

more information, see “Extended storage

fuse switch” (P.8-19).

20. Adaptive Front lighting System

(AFS) warning (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the Adaptive

Front lighting System (AFS) is not function-

ing properly. It is recommended you have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

(See “Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)”

(P.2-42).)

21. Power will turn off to save the

battery warning

This warning appears after a period of time

if the shift lever has not moved from the “P”

(Park) position with the ignition switch in the

ACC or ON position.

22. Power turned off to save the

battery warning

This warning appears after the ignition

switch is automatically turned OFF to save

the battery.

23. Light reminder warning

This warning appears when the driver side

door is opened with the headlight switch is

left ON and the ignition switch is placed in

the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. Place the

headlight switch to “OFF” or “AUTO” posi-

tion. For additional information, see “Head-

light and turn signal switch” (P.2-38).

24. “TIMER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set “TIMER”

indicator activates. You can set the time for

up to 6 hours in the [Alarms] under the

[Settings] menu on the lower display. (See

the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Manual.)

25. Low outside temperature

warning

This warning appears if the outside tem-

perature is below 37°F (3°C). The warning

can be set not to be displayed in the [Alarms]

under the [Settings] menu on the lower

display. (See the INFINITI InTouch

Own-

er’s Manual.)

26. Chassis control warning

This warning appears if Active Lane Control

(if so equipped), the active trace control

system and/or chassis control are not

functioning properly. It is recommended

you have the system checked by an INFINITI

retailer. (See “Active Lane Control” (P.5-25),

“Active trace control” (P.5-130) and “Chas-

sis control” (P.5-132).)

27. Cruise indicator

Models without Intelligent Cruise Control

(ICC) system:

This indicator shows the cruise control

system status. The status is shown by the

color.

See “Cruise control” (P.5-66) for details.

Models with Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system:

This indicator shows the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode status. The

status is shown by the color.

See “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode” (P.5-85) for details.

28. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system ON indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system status. The status is

shown by the color. (See “Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC)” (P.5-68).)

29. Driver assist system indicator (if

so equipped)

This indicator shows the status of the

following systems.

. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

. Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI)

. Distance Control Assist (DCA)

. Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with

pedestrian detection system

Instruments and controls 2-25

2-26 Instruments and controls

. Predictive Forward Collision Warning

(PFCW)

For more details, see “Lane Departure

Warning (LDW) system” (P.5-33), “Blind

Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-37), “Blind Spot

Intervention

(BSI)” (P.5-45), “Distance

Control Assist (DCA)” (P.5-89), “Forward

Emergency Braking (FEB) with pedestrian

detection system” (P.5-100) and “Predictive

Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)” (P.5-

110).

The figure and color of this indicator will

change depending on the conditions of the

above systems. (In each section, the name of

this indicator is referred to as, “driver assist

system lane indicator”, “driver assist system

blind spot indicator” or “driver assist system

forward indicator” depending on the sys-

tems.)

30. INFINITI Drive Mode Selector

indicator

When a driving mode is selected using the

INFINITI Drive Mode Selector, the selected

mode indicator is displayed.

. PERSONAL

. SPORT

. SPORT+ (if so equipped)

. STANDARD

. ECO

. SNOW

(See “INFINITI Drive Mode Selector” (P.5-

21).)

31. Automatic Transmission (AT)

position indicator

This indicator shows the automatic shift

position.

In the manual shift mode, when the trans-

mission does not shift to the selected gear

due to a transmission protection mode, the

AT position indicator will blink and a chime

will sound.

See “Automatic Transmission (AT)” (P.5-16)

for further details.

JVI0681M

INDICATORS FOR MAINTE-

NANCE

For setting the indicators for maintenance,

see the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Man-

ual.

1. Engine oil and filter replacement

indicator

This indicator appears when the customer

set time comes for changing the engine oil

and filter. You can set or reset the distance

for changing the engine oil and filter.

2. Tire replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the customer

set distance comes for replacing tires. You

can set or reset the distance for replacing

tires.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, includ-

ing tire pressure checks. See “Changing

wheels and tires” (P.8-33). Many factors

including tire inflation, alignment, driv-

ing habits and road conditions affect tire

wear and when tires should be replaced.

Setting the tire replacement indicator

for a certain driving distance does not

mean your tires will last that long. Use

the tire replacement indicator as a guide

only and always perform regular tire

checks. Failure to perform regular tire

checks, including tire pressure checks

could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle

damage could occur and may lead to a

collision, which could result in serious

personal injury or death.

3. Other indicator

This indicator appears when the customer

set time comes for replacing items other

than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. You

can set or reset the distance for replacing

the items.

Instruments and controls 2-27

2-28 Instruments and controls

WAC0145X

JVI1484X

TRIP COMPUTER

Switches for the trip computer are located

on the right side of the steering wheel. To

operate the trip computer, push the

switches.

Each time the

or switch is pushed,

the display will change.

The display items for trip computer are

changed on the lower display. For details,

see the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Man-

ual.

1. Distance to empty (dte — mile or

km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides

you with an estimation of the distance that

can be driven before refueling. The dte is

constantly being calculated, based on the

amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual

fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is

displayed on the screen.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the

dte display will change to “——”.

. If the amount of fuel added is small, the

display just before the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position may continue

to be displayed.

. When driving uphill or rounding curves,

the fuel in the tank shifts, which may

momentarily change the display.

2. Vehicle speed (MPH or km/h)

The vehicle speed mode shows the current

vehicle speed and the average vehicle speed

since the last reset.

Average vehicle speed:

Resetting is done by pushing the

switch for longer than 1 second.

The average vehicle speed display is updated

every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after

a reset, the display shows “——”.

3. Elapsed time and trip odometer

(mile or km)

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode shows the time since

the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing

the

or switch for longer than 1

second. (The trip odometer is also reset at

the same time.)

Trip odometer:

The trip odometer mode shows the total

distance the vehicle has been driven since

the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing

the

or switch for longer than 1

second. (The elapsed time is also reset at the

same time.)

4. Current fuel consumption and

average fuel consumption (MPG, l

(liter)/100 km or km/l)

Current fuel consumption:

The current fuel consumption mode shows

the current fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption:

The average fuel consumption mode shows

the average fuel consumption since the last

reset. Resetting is done by pushing the

or switch for longer than 1 second.

The average fuel consumption is also reset

Instruments and controls 2-29

2-30 Instruments and controls

on the lower display. See the INFINITI

InTouch

Owner’s Manual.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a

reset, the display shows “——”.

5. Navigation (if so equipped)

When the route guidance is set in the

navigation system, this item shows the

navigation route information.

For more details, see the INFINITI In-

Touch

Owner’s Manual.

6. Audio

The audio mode shows the status of audio

information.

For more details, see the INFINITI In-

Touch

Owner’s Manual.

7. Driving aids (if so equipped)

The driving aids mode shows the operating

condition for the following systems.

. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

. Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI)

. Distance Control Assist (DCA)

. Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with

pedestrian detection system

. Predictive Forward Collision Warning

(PFCW)

For more details, see “Lane Departure

Warning (LDW) system” (P.5-33), “Blind

Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-37), “Blind Spot

Intervention

(BSI)” (P.5-45), “Distance

Control Assist (DCA)” (P.5-89), “Forward

Emergency Braking (FEB) with pedestrian

detection system” (P.5-100) and “Predictive

Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)” (P.5-

110).

8. Tire pressure

The tire pressure mode shows the pressure

of all four tires while the vehicle is driven.

When the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” or

“Flat Tire - Visit dealer” (if so equipped)

warning appears, the display can be

switched to the tire pressure mode by

pushing the

or switch.

The tire pressure unit can be changed in the

[TPMS setting] under the [Settings] menu

on the lower display. (See the INFINITI

InTouch

Owner’s Manual.)

NOTE:

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, it may take a period of time for the

tire pressure to be displayed while the

vehicle is driven. Depending on the radio

wave circumstance, tire pressure may not

correctly be displayed.

9. Chassis control

When Active Lane Control (if so equipped) or

the active trace control system is operated, it

shows the operating condition. See “Active

Lane Control” (P.5-25) and “Active trace

control” (P.5-130) for more details.

10. Oil control system

Engine oil information informs the distance

to oil change.

Distance to oil change:

The distance to oil change is displayed if the

distance to oil change comes to be less than

940 miles (1,500 km).

Oil replacement indicator:

When the set mileage approaches, the

engine oil replacement indicator will appear

on the display. After the oil is changed, reset

the oil control system by pushing the

switch for longer than 1 second.

The oil change interval cannot be adjusted

manually. The distance to oil change interval

is calculated depending on the driving con-

ditions and set automatically by the oil

control system.

CAUTION

If the oil replacement indicator is dis-

played, change the engine oil as soon as

possible. Operating your vehicle with

deteriorated oil can damage the engine.

Warning check

The present warnings are displayed. If no

warning is present, “No Warning” is dis-

played.

JVI0679M

CLOCK AND OUTSIDE AIR TEM-

PERATURE

The clock and outside air temperature

are displayed on the upper side of the vehicle

information display.

Clock

The clock can be adjusted on the lower

display. See the INFINITI InTouch

Own-

er’s Manual.

Outside air temperature (°F or °C)

The outside air temperature is displayed in °F

or °C in the range of −22 to 131°F (−30 to

55°C).

The outside temperature sensor is located in

front of the radiator. The sensor may be

affected by road or engine heat, wind

directions and other driving conditions. The

display may differ from the actual outside

temperature or the temperature displayed

on various signs or billboards.

Instruments and controls 2-31

2-32 Instruments and controls

SIC2132

Your vehicle has two types of security

systems, as follows:

. Vehicle security system

. INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by the

security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual

and audio alarm signals if someone opens

the doors, hood, or trunk lid when the

system is armed. It is not, however, a motion

detection type system that activates when a

vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-

nents in all situations. Always secure your

vehicle even if parking for a brief period.

Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in the

vehicle, and always lock it when unattended.

Be aware of your surroundings, and park in

secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection,

such as component locks, identification

markers, and tracking systems, are available

at auto supply stores and specialty shops.

Your INFINITI retailer may also offer such

equipment. Check with your insurance com-

pany to see if you may be eligible for

discounts for various theft protection fea-

tures.

SIC2045

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the

windows are open.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the

vehicle.

4. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all

doors. The doors can be locked with the

Intelligent Key, door handle request

switch or power door lock switch.

SECURITY SYSTEMS

5. Confirm that the security indicator light

comes on. The security indicator light

stays on for about 30 seconds. The

vehicle security system is now pre-

armed. After about 30 seconds the

vehicle security system automatically

shifts into the armed phase. The security

light begins to flash once every approxi-

mately 3 seconds. If, during this 30-

second pre-arm time period, the door is

unlocked, or the ignition switch is pushed

to ACC or ON, the system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will activate

with all doors, hood, and trunk lid locked

with the ignition switch in the LOCK

position. When pushing the ignition switch

to the ACC or ON position, the system will

be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the

following alarm:

. The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

. The alarm automatically turns off after

approximately 1 minute. However, the

alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tam-

pered with again.

The alarm is activated by:

. Unlocking the door or opening the trunk

lid without using the UNLOCK button on

the Intelligent Key, the door handle

request switch or one touch unlock

sensor. (Even if the door is opened by

releasing the door inside lock knob or

using the mechanical key, the alarm will

activate.)

. Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by

pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key, the door handle request switch or

touching the one touch unlock sensor. The

alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position.

If the Intelligent Key battery is discharged:

If the Intelligent Key battery is discharged,

the alarm will not stop by pushing the

UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key, the

door handle request switch or one touch

unlock sensor. In such a case, unlock the

driver’s door using the mechanical key and

touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key to stop the alarm. See “Intelligent Key

battery discharge” (P.5-14) for details.

If the system does not operate as described

above, it is recommended you have it

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered Intelligent Key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-33

2-34 Instruments and controls

SIC2045

Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located on the

meter panel. It indicates the status of the

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the ignition switch was

in the LOCK, ACC or OFF position. This

function indicates the security systems

equipped on the vehicle are operational.

If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, this light will remain on

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, seek service for the

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System as

soon as possible. Please bring all registered

keys that you have. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm windshield with

the defroster before you wash the wind-

shield.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

. Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

. Do not fill the window washer re-

servoir tank with washer fluid con-

centrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based washer fluid

concentrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

window washer reservoir tank.

. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir tank. Do not use the win-

dow washer reservoir tank to mix the

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

washer fluid concentrate and water.

JVI0737X

Type A (if so equipped)

JVI0738X

Type B (if so equipped)

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at

the following speed:

INT (Type A) (if so equipped) — inter-

mittent operation can be adjusted by

turning the knob toward

(Slower) or

(Faster). When the speed sensing

wiper interval function is turned on, the

intermittent operation speed varies in

accordance with the vehicle speed. (For

example, when the vehicle speed is

high, the intermittent operation speed

will be faster.) To turn this function on

and off, see the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Manual.

AUTO (Type B) (if so equipped) — For

models with the rain-sensing auto

wiper system, see “Rain-sensing auto

wiper system” (P.2-36).

LO — continuous low speed operation

HI — continuous high speed operation

MIST — one sweep operation of the

wiper

Pull the lever toward you

to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate

several times.

Pulling up the wiper arm:

The wiper arm should be in the up position

Instruments and controls 2-35

2-36 Instruments and controls

when replacing the windshield wiper blade.

To replace the windshield wiper blades,

follow the procedure below:

1. When the ignition switch is ON or within

60 seconds after placing the ignition

switch from the ON to OFF position,

place the windshield wiper and washer

lever into the OFF position.

2. Rapidly lift the lever

upwards twice

within 0.5 seconds. This action will cause

the wipers to automatically take the

service position.

To return the wiper arm, place the wiper arm

in the down position and operate the wiper

switch once.

CAUTION

Do not operate the windshield wiper

while the wiper arm is pulled up. The

wiper arm may be damaged.

Wiper drip wipe system:

The wiper will also operate once about 3

seconds after the washer and wiper are

operated. This operation is to wipe washer

fluid that has dripped on the windshield.

JVI0739X

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can

automatically turn on the wipers and adjust

the wiper speed depending on the rainfall

and the vehicle speed by using the rain

sensor located on the upper part of the

windshield.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,

push the lever down to the AUTO position

. The wiper will sweep once while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be

adjusted by turning the knob toward

(High) or toward (Low).

. High — High sensitive operation

. Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system

off, push up the lever to the OFF position, or

pull down the lever to the LO or HI position.

CAUTION

Do not touch the rain sensor and around

it when the wiper switch is in the AUTO

position and the ignition switch is in the

ON position. The wipers may operate

unexpectedly and cause to an injury or

may damage a wiper.

. The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-

tended for use during rain. If the switch

is left in the AUTO position, the wipers

may operate unexpectedly when dirt,

fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck

on or around the sensor. The wipers may

also operate when exhaust gas or

moisture affect the rain sensor.

. The rain-sensing auto wipers may not

operate if rain does not hit the rain

sensor even if it is raining.

. When the windshield glass is coated

with water repellent, the speed of the

rain-sensing auto wipers may be higher

even though the amount of the rainfall is

small.

. Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto

wiper system when you use a car wash.

. Using genuine wiper blades is recom-

mended for proper operation of the

rain-sensing auto wiper system. (See

“Windshield wiper blades” (P.8-15) for

wiper blade replacement.)

JVI1441X

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and

outside mirrors, start the engine and push

the switch

on. The indicator light will

come on. Push the switch again to turn the

defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approxi-

mately 15 minutes.

If the engine is started using the remote start

function (if so equipped) when the outside

air temperature, the interior temperature

and the engine coolant temperature are

low, the rear window glass and outside

mirror defroster may turn on automatically.

For additional information about the remote

engine start function, see “Remote engine

start” (P.3-19).

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

Instruments and controls 2-37

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

2-38 Instruments and controls

JVI1485X

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

Turn the switch to the position:

The front parking, side marker, tail and

license plate lights will come on.

Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the

other lights remain on.

JVI1486X

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights

to be set so they turn on and off auto-

matically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns

the headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF,

or position.

The autolight system can turn on the head-

lights automatically when it is dark and turn

off the headlights when it is light.

The headlights will turn on automatically at

twilight or in rainy weather (when the

windshield wiper is operated continuously).

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position and one of the doors is opened and

this condition is continued, the headlights

remain on for 5 minutes.

Automatic headlights off delay:

You can keep the headlights on for up to 180

seconds after you place the ignition switch in

the OFF position and open any door then

close all the doors.

You can adjust the period of the automatic

headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF)

to 180 seconds. The factory default setting

is 45 seconds.

For automatic headlights off delay setting,

see the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Man-

ual.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

SIC3784

Be sure not to put anything on top of the

photo sensor

located on the top of the

instrument panel. The photo sensor controls

the autolight; if it is covered, the photo

sensor reacts as if it is dark and the head-

lights will illuminate.

JVI1487X

To select the low beam, put the lever in

the neutral position as shown.

To select the high beam, push the lever

forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to select the low

beam.

Pulling the lever toward you will flash

the headlight high beam even when the

headlight switch is in the OFF position.

Headlight beam select

High beam assist (if so equipped)

The high beam assist system will operate

when the vehicle is driven at speeds of

approximately 19 MPH (30 km/h) and

above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading

vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when

the headlight high beam is on, the headlight

will be switched to the low beam automa-

tically.

Precautions on high beam assist:

WARNING

. The high beam assist system is a

convenience but it is not a substitute

for safe driving operation. The driver

should remain alert at all times,

ensure safe driving practices and

switch the high beams and low beam

manually when necessary.

. The high beam or low beam may not

switch automatically under the fol-

lowing conditions. Switch the high

beam and low beam manually.

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, wind, etc.).

— When a light source similar to a

headlight or tail light is in the

vicinity of the vehicle.

— When the headlights of the on-

coming vehicle or the leading

vehicle are turned off, when the

color of the light is affected due to

foreign materials on the lights, or

Instruments and controls 2-39

2-40 Instruments and controls

when the light beam is out of

position.

— When there is a sudden, contin-

uous change in brightness.

— When driving on a road that

passes over rolling hills, or a road

that has level differences.

— When driving on a road with

many curves.

— When a sign or mirror-like sur-

face is reflecting intense light

towards the front of the vehicle.

— When the container, etc. being

towed by a leading vehicle is

reflecting intense light.

— When a headlight on your vehicle

is damaged or dirty.

— When the vehicle is leaning at an

angle due to a punctured tire,

being towed, etc.

. The timing of switching the low beam

and high beam may change under the

following situations.

— The brightness of the headlights

of the oncoming vehicle or leading

vehicle.

— The movement and direction of

the oncoming vehicle and the

leading vehicle.

— When only one light on the on-

coming vehicle or the leading

vehicle is illuminated.

— When the oncoming vehicle or the

leading vehicle is a two-wheeled

vehicle.

— Road conditions (incline, curve,

the road surface, etc.).

— The number of passengers and

the amount of luggage.

JVI1488X

High beam assist operations:

To activate the high beam assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the AUTO

position

and push the lever forward

(high beam position). The high beam assist

indicator light in the meter will illuminate

while the headlights are turned on.

If the high beam assist indicator light does

not illuminate in the above condition, it may

indicate that the system is not functioning

properly. It is recommended you have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than

approximately 12 MPH (20 km/h), the

headlight remains the low beam.

To turn off the high beam assist system, turn

the headlight switch to the

position or

select the low beam position by placing the

lever in the neutral position.

JVS0823X

Ambient image sensor maintenance:

The ambient image sensor

for the high

beam assist system is located above the

inside mirror. To keep the proper operation

of the high beam assist system and prevent a

system malfunction, be sure to observe the

following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the ambient image sensor.

. Do not strike or damage the areas around

the ambient image sensor.

If the ambient image sensor is damaged due

to an accident, it is recommended you

contact an INFINITI retailer.

Battery saver system

A chime will sound and the light reminder

warning will appear in the vehicle informa-

tion display when the driver side door is

opened with the light switch in the

position and the ignition switch in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

When the headlight switch is in the

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the lights will automatically

turn off after a period of time when the

ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF

position.

When the headlight switch remains in the

or position after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will turn on

when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position.

CAUTION

. When you turn on the headlight

switch again after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will not

turn off automatically. Be sure to

turn the light switch to the OFF

position when you leave the vehicle

for extended periods of time, other-

wise the battery will be discharged.

Instruments and controls 2-41

2-42 Instruments and controls

. Never leave the light switch on when

the engine is not running for a period

of time even if the headlights turn off

automatically.

Daytime running light system

The daytime running lights automatically

illuminate when the engine is started with

the parking brake released. The daytime

running lights operate with the headlight

switch in the OFF, AUTO or

position.

Turn the headlight switch to the

position

for full illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the daytime running lights

do not illuminate. The daytime running lights

illuminate once the parking brake is released.

The daytime running lights will remain on

until the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system

is active, tail lights on your vehicle are

not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on

your headlights. Failure to do so could

cause an accident injuring yourself and

others.

Adaptive Front lighting System

(AFS) (if so equipped)

The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)

will automatically adjust the headlights (low

beam) toward the turning direction to

improve the driver’s view. When the head-

light switch is ON and the driver operates

the steering wheel in a turn, the AFS system

will be activated.

The AFS will operate:

. when the headlight switch is ON.

. when the shift lever is in any position

other than P (Park) or R (Reverse).

. when the vehicle is driven at above 3

MPH (5 km/h) for the left-side head-

light. Note that the right-side low beam

headlight will swivel but the left-side

headlight will not swivel when the vehicle

is below 3 MPH (5 km/h) and the

steering wheel is turned.

AFS will also adjust the headlight to a proper

axis automatically, depending on the number

of occupants in the vehicle, the load the

vehicle is carrying and the road conditions.

If the AFS warning appears in the vehicle

information display after the ignition switch

has been pushed to the ON position, this

may indicate that the AFS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service. When the engine is started,

the headlights will vibrate to check the

system condition. This is not a malfunction.

JVI0644X

JVI0937X

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control switch

can be operated when the ignition switch is

in the ON position. When the switch is

operated, the vehicle information display

switches to the brightness adjustment

mode.

Push the + side of the switch

to brighten

the instrument panel lights. The bar

moves

to the + side.

Push the - side of the switch

to dim the

instrument panel lights. The bar

moves to

the − side. When the brightness level reaches

the minimum, the instrument panel lights will

turn off during the nighttime.

When the brightness level reaches the max-

imum or minimum, a beep will sound.

The vehicle information display returns to

the normal display when the instrument

brightness control switch is not operated

for more than 5 seconds.

JVI1489X

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

. Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does

not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold

the lever until the lane change is com-

pleted.

. Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does

not latch, and release the lever. The turn

Instruments and controls 2-43

2-44 Instruments and controls

signal will automatically flash three

times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a

lane change based on road and traffic

conditions.

JVI1490X

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the

position, then turn the

switch to the

position. To turn them off,

turn the switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on with the low

beams selected for the fog lights to operate.

The fog lights automatically turn off when

the high beam headlights are selected.

JVI1491X

To sound the horn, push the center pad area

of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air

bag system may result in serious perso-

nal injury.

HORN

SIC4336

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most

driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be

reduced even if the accelerator is depressed

to the floor. If maximum engine power is

needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC

system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The

indicator light will

illuminate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. (See

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

(P.5-129).)

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

those body parts in contact with the

seat. Use of the seat heater by such

people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

. The battery could run down if the

seat heater is operated while the

engine is not running.

. Do not use the seat heater for

extended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a blan-

ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-

wise, the seat may become

overheated.

. Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in

damage to the heater.

Instruments and controls 2-45

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL

(VDC) OFF SWITCH

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

2-46 Instruments and controls

. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

. When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar ma-

terials.

. If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

JVR0505X

The front seats can be warmed by built-in

heaters. The heating system of driver’s seat

and front passenger seat can be operated

independently.

OPERATION WITH SWITCH

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the switch on the instrument panel.

Each time the switch is pushed, the

seat heating mode will change in the

following order.

AUTO ? High ? Mid ? Low ? OFF

The indicator light on the switch will

illuminate when the heater is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or

before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

off the seat heater.

OPERATION WITH TOUCH

SCREEN

Push the CLIMATE button and touch [ ]

or [

] on the lower display. Select an item

from [AUTO], [High], [Mid], [Low] or [OFF].

AUTO MODE SETTING

When in the AUTO mode, the heater will

turn on or off automatically according to the

conditions such as the temperature inside

the vehicle compartment. Depending on the

conditions, the heater will not turn on even if

AUTO is selected. The settings for the AUTO

mode can be changed. For details, see

“Climate settings” (P.4-40).

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to come

into contact with the heated steering

wheel if you or the occupants cannot

monitor elevated steering wheel tem-

peratures or have an inability to feel pain

in those body parts in contact. Use of the

heated steering wheel by such people

could result in serious injuries.

CAUTION

. The battery could run down if the

steering wheel heater is operated

while the engine is not running.

. Do not use the steering wheel heater

for extended periods of time as it may

cause burns and overheating.

. Any liquid spilled on the steering

wheel should be removed immedi-

ately with a dry cloth.

. When cleaning the steering wheel,

never use gasoline, thinner, or any

similar materials.

. If any malfunctions are found or the

steering wheel heater does not oper-

ate, turn the heater off and have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

Push the CLIMATE button and touch

[Steering Heater] on the lower display to

turn on or off the steering wheel heating

manually. The steering wheel heating will

turn off automatically 30 minutes after it

has been turned on. When the steering

wheel heating is turned on, the indicator

above [Steering Heater] will turn on.

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is above the temperature within which

the system is designed to operate, the

system will not heat the steering wheel. This

is not a malfunction.

Automatic steering wheel heating can be

turned on or off from the climate control

settings screen. For details, see “Climate

settings” (P.4-40).

SIC4316

In the storage box

Instruments and controls 2-47

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so

equipped)

POWER OUTLETS

2-48 Instruments and controls

WAC0146X

In the console box

The power outlets are located in the storage

box and in the console box.

CAUTION

. The outlet and plug may be hot

during or immediately after use.

. Do not use with accessories that

exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

draw. Do not use double adapters or

more than one electrical accessory.

. Use power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

. Avoid using power outlet when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear

window defroster is on.

. This power outlet is not designed for

use with a cigarette lighter unit.

. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may blow.

. Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

. When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any liquid

to contact the outlet.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

. Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid

is hot, it can scald you or your

passenger.

. Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

STORAGE

JVI0649X

Front

JVI1492X

Rear

JVI1500X

SOFT BOTTLE HOLDER

CAUTION

. Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

. Do not use bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

JVI0651X

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while

driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s

view and to help prevent an accident.

To open the sunglasses holder, push the

holder.

Instruments and controls 2-49

2-50 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

. Do not use for anything other than

glasses.

. Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses

holder while parking in direct sun-

light. The heat may damage the

glasses.

JVI0763X

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle

To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.

To lock

/unlock the glove box, use the

mechanical key. For the mechanical key

usage, see “Keys” (P.3-2).

JVI0653X

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, push up the knob

and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until latched.

The console box light illuminates when the

headlight switch is in the

position.

SIC4348

CARD HOLDER

The card holder is located on the driver’s sun

visor.

To use the card holder, slide the card in the

card holder.

SIC4316

STORAGE BOX

To open, push the storage box lid.

Do not place valuable items in the storage

box.

Do not use the storage box as an ashtray.

JVI1511X

COAT HOOKS

To use the coat hook, push the hook to

release

CAUTION

Do not place items which are more than

2 lb (1 kg) on the hook.

Instruments and controls 2-51

2-52 Instruments and controls

JVI1493X

TRUNK HOOKS

WARNING

. Always make sure that the cargo is

properly secured. Use the suitable

ropes and hooks.

. Unsecured cargo can become danger-

ous in an accident or sudden stop.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than

22 lb (10 kg) to a single hook.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

. Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before

closing the windows. Use the window

lock switch to prevent unexpected

use of the power windows.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not

leave children, people who require

the assistance of others or pets

unattended in your vehicle. Addition-

ally, the temperature inside a closed

vehicle on a warm day can quickly

become high enough to cause a sig-

nificant risk of injury or death to

people and pets.

The power windows operate when the

ignition switch is in the ON position or for

about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s or

front passenger’s door is opened during this

period of about 45 seconds, power to the

windows is canceled.

WINDOWS

JVI1494X

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Window lock button

Main power window switch (dri-

ver’s side)

To open or close the window, push down

or pull up the switch and hold it. The main

switch (driver side switches) will open or

close all the windows.

Locking passenger’s window

When the lock button is pushed in, only

the driver side window can be opened or

closed. Push it in again to cancel.

SIC4353

Front passenger side power win-

dow switch

The front passenger side switch will open or

close the front passenger side window. To

open or close the window, push down or pull

up the switch and hold it.

JVI1495X

Automatic operation

To fully open or close the window, comple-

tely push down or pull up the switch and

release it; it need not be held. The window

will automatically open or close all the way.

To stop the window, just push or lift the

switch in the opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will cause

the window to open or close until the switch

is released.

Instruments and controls 2-53

2-54 Instruments and controls

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught

in the window as it is closing, the window

will be immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated

when the window is closed by automatic

operation when the ignition switch is in the

ON position or for 45 seconds after the

ignition switch is pushed to the OFF posi-

tion.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window

occurs.

Automatic adjusting function

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from

the battery terminal, do not close either

of the front doors. The automatic win-

dow adjusting function will not work and

the side roof panel may be damaged.

The power window has an automatic ad-

justing function. When the door is being

opened, the window is automatically low-

ered slightly to avoid contact between the

window and the side roof panel. When the

door is closed, the window is automatically

raised slightly.

While the automatic adjusting function does

not work, the window will be controlled as

follows:

. When the door is opened, the window

lowers for approximately 2 seconds.

. While the door is open, the window

cannot be raised.

If the windows do not close auto-

matically

If the power window automatic function

(closing only) does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initialize

the power window system.

1. Push the ignition switch to start the

engine.

2. Close the door.

3. After starting the engine, open the

window completely by operating the

power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it

to close the window, and then hold the

switch more than 3 seconds after the

window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Op-

erate the window by the automatic

function to confirm the initialization is

complete.

6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for

other windows.

If the power window automatic function

does not operate properly after performing

the procedure above, it is recommended you

have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

WARNING

. In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an open

moonroof. Always use seat belts

and child restraints.

. Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the moonroof opening while the

vehicle is in motion or while the

moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

. Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before

opening.

. Do not place any heavy object on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof only operates when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

The moonroof is operational for about 45

seconds, even if the ignition switch is pushed

to the OFF position. If the driver’s door or

the passenger’s door is opened during this

period of about 45 seconds, power to the

moonroof is canceled.

JVI0655X

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatically when

the moonroof is opened. However, it must

be closed manually.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then

push the switch to the tilt up position

and

release it; it need not be held. To tilt down

the moonroof, push the switch to the tilt

down position

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push

the switch to the open

or close position

and release it; it need not be held. The roof

Instruments and controls 2-55

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

2-56 Instruments and controls

will automatically open or close all the way.

To stop the roof, push the switch once more

while it is opening or closing.

Operating moonroof with Intelli-

gent Key (if so equipped)

The moonroof can be opened by pushing the

UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key. This

function will not operate while the moonroof

timer is activated or when the moonroof

need to be initialized. For details about the

Intelligent Key button usage, see “How to

use remote keyless entry system” (P.3-16).

Opening:

To open the sunroof, push the UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key for about 3

seconds after the door is unlocked.

To stop opening, release the

button.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

If the control unit detects something caught

in the moonroof when it is closing, the

moonroof will be immediately opened.

The auto reverse function can be activated

when the moonroof is closed by automatic

operation when the ignition switch is in the

ON position or for about 45 seconds after

the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

If the moonroof cannot be closed automa-

tically when the auto reverse function

activates due to a malfunction, push and

hold the moonroof switch to the close

position

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the moonroof

occurs.

If the moonroof does not operate

If the moonroof does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initialize

the moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by

repeatedly pushing the moonroof switch

to the close position

to tilt the moon-

roof up.

2. Push and hold the switch to the close

position

3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof moves slightly up and down.

4. Push and hold the switch to the open

position

to fully tilt the moonroof

down.

5. Check if the moonroof switch operates

normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly

after performing the procedure above, have

your moonroof checked and repaired. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

JVI0656X

MAP LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn the

light on or off.

JVI0726X

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)

The console light will turn on whenever the

front parking lights or headlights are illumi-

nated.

JVI0657X

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL

SWITCH

ON switch

When the ON switch is pushed in, the map

lights will illuminate. When the switch is

pushed off, the lights will not illuminate,

regardless of the condition.

DOOR OFF switch

When the DOOR OFF switch is not

pushed in, the map lights will illuminate

under the following conditions:

. ignition switch is switched to the OFF

position

Instruments and controls 2-57

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-58 Instruments and controls

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

. doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-

LOCK button on the Intelligent Key or

one touch unlock sensor with the ignition

switch in the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

. any door is opened and then closed with

the ignition switch in the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

. any door is opened

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go

off.

When the DOOR OFF switch

is pushed in,

the map lights will not illuminate under the

above condition. The map lights can be

turned on only with the ON switch

The lights will also turn off after a period of

time when the lights remain illuminated

after the ignition switch has been pushed

to the OFF or LOCK position to prevent the

battery from becoming discharged.

When [Lamp ON when Door Unlocks] is set

to the OFF position on the lower display (see

the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Manual),

the lights will illuminate under the following

condition:

. any door is opened with the ignition

switch in any position

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go

off.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could

result in a discharged battery.

SIC3869

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on

when the cover on the vanity mirror is

opened.

When the cover is closed, the light will turn

off.

The lights will also turn off after a period of

time when the lights remain illuminated to

prevent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is

opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the

light will turn off.

The light will also turn off after a period of

time when the light remains illuminated

after the ignition switch has been pushed

to the OFF or LOCK position to prevent the

battery from becoming discharged.

JVI1496X

When the doors are unlocked by pushing the

UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key or

touching the one touch unlock sensor with

the ignition switch in the LOCK position, the

courtesy light

will illuminate.

To activate or deactivate the courtesy light,

set [Lamp ON when Door Unlocks] on the

lower display. See the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Manual.

The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the

functions of up to three individual hand-held

transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver:

. Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates,

home and office lighting, entry door

locks and security systems.

. Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the

vehicle’s battery is discharged or is

disconnected, HomeLink

will retain all

programming.

When the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver

is programmed, retain the original trans-

mitter for future programming procedures

(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon

sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes. For

additional information, refer to “Program-

ming HomeLink

” (P.2-60).

WARNING

. Do not use the HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by fed-

eral safety standards. (These stan-

Instruments and controls 2-59

TRUNK LIGHT COURTESY LIGHT

HomeLink

UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

2-60 Instruments and controls

dards became effective for opener

models manufactured after April 1,

1982). A garage door opener which

cannot detect an object in the path of

a closing garage door and then auto-

matically stop and reverse, does not

meet current federal safety stan-

dards. Using a garage door opener

without these features increases the

risk of serious injury or death.

. During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people

or objects are clear of the garage

door, gate, etc. that you are pro-

gramming.

. Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming the

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver.

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink

buttons, refer to the HomeLink

web site

at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

NOTE:

It is also recommended that a new battery

be placed in the hand-held transmitter of

the device being programmed to

HomeLink

for quicker programming and

accurate transmission of the radio-fre-

quency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away

from the HomeLink

surface, keeping

the HomeLink

indicator light in view.

JVI0428X

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press

and hold the desired HomeLink

button

and handheld transmitter button. DO

NOT release until the HomeLink

indi-

cator light

flashes slowly and then

rapidly. When the indicator light flashes

rapidly, both buttons may be released.

(The rapid flashing indicates successful

programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices to be programmed may

require you to replace Step 2 with the

cycling procedure noted in the “Pro-

gramming HomeLink

for Canadian cus-

tomers and gate openers” (P.2-61).

JVI0429X

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink

button and observe the in-

dicator light.

If the indicator light is solid/con-

tinuous, programming is complete

and your device should activate when

the HomeLink

button is pressed and

released.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly

for two seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue with

Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A

second person may make the follow-

ing steps easier. Use a ladder or other

device. Do not stand on your vehicle

to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage

door opener motor in the garage, locate

the “learn” or “smart” button (the name

and color of the button may vary by

manufacturer but it is usually located

near where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the unit). If there is difficulty

locating the button, reference the garage

door opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”

button.

NOTE:

Once the button is pressed, you have

approximately 30 seconds to initiate the

next step.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the programmed HomeLink

button for two seconds and release.

Repeat the “press/hold/release” se-

quence up to 3 times to complete the

programming process. HomeLink

should now activate your rolling code

equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink

buttons, refer to the HomeLink

web

site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-

800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND

GATE OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink

to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian law,

some U.S. gate operators are designed to

“time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the “Program-

ming HomeLink

” procedures, replace “Pro-

gramming HomeLink

” Step 2 with the

following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”

process to prevent possible damage to the

garage door opener components.

Step 2: Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink

button and the hand-held transmitter but-

ton. During programming, your hand-held

transmitter may automatically stop trans-

mitting. Continue to press and hold the

desired HomeLink

button while you press

and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-

Instruments and controls 2-61

2-62 Instruments and controls

mitter every two seconds until the frequency

signal has been learned. The HomeLink

indicator light will flash slowly and then

rapidly after several seconds upon success-

ful programming. DO NOT release until the

HomeLink

indicator light flashes slowly and

then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes

rapidly, both buttons may be released. The

rapid flashing indicates successful program-

ming.

Proceed with “Programming HomeLink

”

step 3 to complete.

Remember to plug the device back in when

programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HomeLink

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver, after

it is programmed, can be used to activate the

programmed device. To operate, simply

press and release the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink

Universal Transceiver

button. The amber indicator light will illumi-

nate while the signal is being transmitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter

of the device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

SHOOTING

If the HomeLink

does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

. replace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.

. position the hand-held transmitter with

its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink

surface.

. press and hold both the HomeLink

and

hand-held transmitter buttons without

interruption.

. position the hand-held transmitter 1-3 in

(26-76 mm) away from the HomeLink

surface. Hold the transmitter in that

position for up to 15 seconds. If

HomeLink

is not programmed within

that time, try holding the transmitter in

another position - keeping the indicator

light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink

buttons, refer to the HomeLink

web site

at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-

3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-

ever, individual buttons can be repro-

grammed, see “Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

button” (P.2-62).

To clear all programming

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons until the indicator light begins to

flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do

not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink

is now in the programming mode

and can be programmed at any time begin-

ning with “Programming HomeLink

” - Step

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HomeLink

BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink

Universal Trans-

ceiver button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink

button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink

” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com or 1-

800-355-3515.

The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver but-

ton has now been reprogrammed. The new

device can be activated by pushing the

HomeLink

button that was just pro-

grammed. This procedure will not affect

any other programmed HomeLink

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change

the codes of any non-rolling code device that

has been programmed into HomeLink

Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device

or call the manufacturer or retailer of those

devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink

Univer-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-63

2-64 Instruments and controls

MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ...................................................................................... 3-2

Intelligent Key .............................................................. 3-2

Valet hand-off ............................................................. 3-4

Doors .................................................................................... 3-4

Locking with mechanical key ................................... 3-4

Locking with inside lock knob ................................. 3-5

Locking with power door lock switch ................... 3-5

Automatic door locks ................................................. 3-5

Intelligent Key system ..................................................... 3-6

Intelligent Key operating range ............................... 3-8

Door locks/unlocks precaution .............................. 3-8

Intelligent Key operation ........................................... 3-9

Battery saver system ............................................... 3-13

Warning signals ......................................................... 3-13

Troubleshooting guide ............................................. 3-14

Log-in function .......................................................... 3-15

Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 3-15

How to use remote keyless entry system .......... 3-16

Remote engine start (if so equipped) ........................ 3-19

Remote engine start operating range ................ 3-20

Remote starting the engine .................................. 3-20

Extending engine run time ..................................... 3-20

Canceling a remote engine start ........................... 3-21

Conditions the remote engine start will

not work .................................................................... 3-21

Hood .................................................................................. 3-22

Trunk lid ............................................................................ 3-22

Trunk lid release switch ......................................... 3-23

Trunk open request switch ................................... 3-23

TRUNK button ......................................................... 3-23

Trunk release power cancel switch .................... 3-24

Interior trunk lid release ........................................ 3-24

Fuel-filler door ................................................................ 3-25

Opening the fuel-filler door ................................. 3-25

Fuel-filler cap ........................................................... 3-25

Tilt/telescopic steering ................................................. 3-27

Manual operation (if so equipped) ..................... 3-28

Electric operation (if so equipped) ..................... 3-28

Sun visors ......................................................................... 3-29

Mirrors .............................................................................. 3-29

Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-29

Outside mirrors ........................................................ 3-31

Vanity mirror ............................................................ 3-32

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ........... 3-33

Entry/exit function ................................................. 3-33

Memory storage ...................................................... 3-33

System operation .................................................... 3-34

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in a

safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

duplicates by using the key number. INFINITI

does not record any key numbers so it is very

important to keep track of your key number

plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can

be duplicated without knowing the key

number.

WAD0067X

Type A (if so equipped)

WAD0068X

Type B (if so equipped)

1. Intelligent Keys (2)

2. Mechanical keys (inside the Keys) (2)

3. Key number plate (1)

INTELLIGENT KEY

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to your

vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components

and INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

components. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys

can be registered and used with one vehicle.

The new keys must be registered by an

INFINITI retailer prior to use with the

Intelligent Key system and INFINITI Vehicle

Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the

registration process requires erasing all

memory in the Intelligent Key components

when registering new keys, be sure to take

all Intelligent Keys that you have to the

INFINITI retailer.

It is possible that the Intelligent Key func-

tions become canceled. Contact an INFINITI

retailer.

CAUTION

. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when driving. The Intelli-

gent Key is a precision device with a

built-in transmitter. To avoid dama-

ging it, please note the following.

KEYS

— The Intelligent Key is water re-

sistant; however, wetting may

damage the Intelligent Key. If the

Intelligent Key gets wet, immedi-

ately wipe until it is completely

dry.

— Do not bend, drop or strike it

against another object.

— If the outside temperature is

below 14°F (−10°C), the battery

of the Intelligent Key may not

function properly.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key

for an extended period in a place

where temperatures exceed

140°F (60°C).

— Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key.

— Do not use a magnet key holder.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key

near an electric appliance such as

a television set or personal com-

puter.

— Do not allow the Intelligent Key

to come into contact with water

or salt water, and do not wash it

in a washing machine. This could

affect the system function.

. If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

INFINITI recommends erasing the ID

code of that Intelligent Key. This will

prevent the Intelligent Key from un-

authorized use to unlock the vehicle.

For information regarding the eras-

ing procedure, it is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer.

WAD0069X

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release the

lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it

into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob

returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

driver’s door and glove box, if they are

equipped with a key cylinder.

See “Doors” (P.3-4) and “Glove box” (P.2-

50).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-

stalled in the key.

VALET HAND-OFF

When you have to leave a key with a valet,

give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep

the mechanical key with you to protect your

belongings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunk from

being opened during valet hand-off, follow

the procedures below.

1. Push the trunk release power cancel

switch to the OFF (cancel) side.

2. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

3. Lock the glove box with the mechanical

key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet,

keeping the mechanical key in your

pocket or bag for insertion into the

Intelligent Key when you retrieve your

vehicle.

See “Trunk lid” (P.3-22) and “Glove box”

(P.2-50).

WARNING

. Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help

keep out intruders.

. Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not

leave children, people who require

the assistance of others or pets

unattended in your vehicle. Addition-

ally, the temperature inside a closed

vehicle on a warm day can quickly

become high enough to cause a sig-

nificant risk of injury or death to

people and pets.

SPA2457

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL

KEY

To lock the driver’s door, turn the driver’s

door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle

To unlock the driver’s door, turn the driver’s

door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle

To lock or unlock the other doors and the

trunk lid, use the Intelligent Key function

(one touch unlock sensor, request switch or

UNLOCK button). (See “Intelligent Key sys-

tem” (P.3-6).)

DOORS

SPA2726

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door individually, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position

then close

the door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the

unlock position

When locking the door without an Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the Intelligent

Key inside the vehicle.

JVP0319X

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will

lock or unlock all the doors and trunk lid. The

switches are located on the driver’s and

front passenger’s door armrests.

To lock the doors and trunk lid, push the

power door lock switch to the lock position

with the driver’s or front passenger’s door

open, then close the door.

When locking the door this way, be certain

not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock the doors including the fuel-filler

door and trunk lid, push the power door lock

switch to the unlock position

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved

to the lock position and any door open, all

doors will lock and unlock automatically.

With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle

and any door open, all doors will unlock

automatically and a chime will sound after

the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelli-

gent Key from being accidentally locked

inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

. All doors and trunk lid lock automatically

when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH

(24 km/h).

. All doors and trunk lid unlock automati-

cally when the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position or when the shift lever

is moved to the P (Park) position, if

selected.

The automatic unlock function can be

deactivated or activated. To deactivate or

activate the automatic door unlock system,

perform the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,

push and hold the power door lock

switch to the

position (UNLOCK)

for more than 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will

flash twice. When deactivated, the ha-

zard indicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the

OFF and ON position again between

each setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is

deactivated, the doors do not unlock when

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position. To unlock the door manually, use

the inside lock knob or the power door lock

switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).

The automatic door unlock function can be

changed on the lower display. (See the

INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Manual.)

WARNING

. Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment man-

ufacturer for the possible influences

before use.

. The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pushed.

The FAA advises that the radio

waves may affect aircraft navigation

and communication systems. Do not

operate the Intelligent Key while on

an airplane. Make sure the buttons

are not operated unintentionally

when the unit is stored during a

flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all

the doors and the trunk lid using the remote

controller function, using one touch unlock

function or pushing the request switch on

the vehicle without taking the key out from a

pocket or purse. The operating environment

and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent

Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using

the Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehicle.

. Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating

with the vehicle as it receives radio waves.

The Intelligent Key system transmits weak

radio waves. Environmental conditions may

interfere with the operation of the Intelligent

Key system under the following operating

conditions.

. When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such

as a TV tower, power station and broad-

casting station.

. When in possession of wireless equip-

ment, such as a cellular telephone,

transceiver, and CB radio.

. When the Intelligent Key is in contact

with or covered by metallic materials.

. When any type of radio wave remote

control is used nearby.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed near

an electric appliance such as a personal

computer.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

. When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi-

tions before using the Intelligent Key func-

tion or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies

depending on the operating conditions, the

battery’s life is approximately 2 years. If the

battery is discharged, replace it with a new

one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged, see “Intelligent Key battery dis-

charge” (P.5-14) to start the engine.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously

receiving radio waves, if the key is left near

equipment which transmits strong radio

waves, such as signals from a TV and

personal computer, the battery life may

become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a

battery, see “Intelligent Key battery replace-

ment” (P.8-19).

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. For

information about the purchase and use of

additional Intelligent Keys, contact an

INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

. Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with

water or salt water. This could affect

the system function.

. Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

. Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

. Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

. Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is comple-

tely dry.

. Do not place the Intelligent Key for

an extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

. If the outside temperature is below

14°F (−10°C), the battery of the

Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

. Do not attach the Intelligent Key

with a key holder that contains a

magnet.

. Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment

and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may

prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-

gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-

mation regarding the erasing procedure,

contact an INFINITI retailer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0453X

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING

RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range from the one

touch unlock sensor/door request switch

and trunk open request switch .

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent

Key system’s operating range becomes nar-

rower, and the Intelligent Key may not

function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80

cm) from each one touch unlock sensor/door

handle request switch

and trunk open

request switch

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper, the one touch

unlock sensor and request switches may not

function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the

operating range, it is possible for anyone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key to use

the one touch unlock sensor or request

switches to lock or unlock the doors and

open the trunk lid.

WAD0070X

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRE-

CAUTION

. Do not push the door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key held in

your hand as illustrated. The close dis-

tance to the door handle will cause the

Intelligent Key system to have difficulty

recognizing that the Intelligent Key is

outside the vehicle.

. Within 2 seconds after the door are

locked using the door handle request

switch, make sure that the doors have

been securely locked by operating the

door handles. If you keep holding the

door handle for more than 2 seconds

after locking the doors using the door

handle request switch, the door will be

unlocked.

. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left inside the vehicle or the trunk, make

sure you carry the key with you and then

lock the doors or the trunk.

. The Intelligent Key system (opening/

closing doors with the door handle

request switch or one touch unlock

sensor) can be set to remain inactive.

(See the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s

Manual.)

. The door cannot be unlocked using one

touch unlock operation after locking the

door within 2 seconds. To unlock the

door, release the one touch unlock

sensor once and touch it again.

. If a large amount of water runs down on

the door handle (for example, when

washing the vehicle or in a heavy rain),

the door may unlock if the Intelligent Key

is within the range of operation. To

prevent the door from being unlocked,

the Intelligent Key should be away from

the vehicle more than 7 ft (2 m).

. Do not hold and pull the door handle

quickly. The door will be unlocked but will

not open. Release the door handle once

and pull it again to open the door.

. If you pull the door handle with your

gloved hand, the one touch unlock

operation may not function.

WAD0071X

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the key out from your pocket or bag.

JVP0448X

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,

you can lock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch

(driver’s or front

passenger’s) within the range of operation.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0449X

You can also unlock the corresponding door

by touching the one touch unlock sensor

(driver’s or front passenger’s) within the

range of operation, and can unlock the other

doors using the door handle request switch

When you lock or unlock the doors or the

trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash and

the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as

a confirmation. For details, see “Setting

hazard indicator and horn mode” (P.3-18).

CAUTION

. After locking the doors using the

request switch, make sure that the

doors have been securely locked by

operating the door handles.

. When locking the doors using the

request switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession

before operating the request switch

to prevent the Intelligent Key from

being left in the vehicle.

. The request switch and one touch

unlock sensor are operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been

detected by the Intelligent Key sys-

tem.

Welcome light and farewell light

function

When you lock or unlock the doors and fuel-

filler door, front and rear side marker lights,

parking lights, tail lights and the license plate

light will illuminate for a period of time. The

welcome light and farewell light function can

be disabled. For information about disabling

the welcome light and farewell light func-

tion, see the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s

Manual.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout

protection is equipped with the Intelligent

Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the

doors are locked, and then the Intelligent

Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors

are closed; the lock will automatically unlock

and the door buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelligent

Key is in the same hand that is operating the

request switch to lock the door. Put the

Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your

other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function

under the following conditions:

. When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed

inside the glove box or a storage bin.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed

inside the door pockets.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed

inside or near metallic materials.

JVP0448X

Locking doors, trunk lid and fuel-

filler door

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position and make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the door handle request switch

(driver’s or front passenger’s)

while

carrying the Intelligent Key with you.*3

4. All the doors, trunk lid and fuel-filler door

will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and

the outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key

while the ignition switch is in the ACC

or ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent

Key while the driver’s door is open.

*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch with the Intelli-

gent Key inside the vehicle. However,

when an Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle, doors can be locked with

another registered Intelligent Key.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0449X

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Touch the one touch unlock sensor

(driver’s or front passenger’s) while car-

rying the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and

the outside chime sounds once. The

corresponding door will unlock.

3. Push the door handle request switch

within 1 minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and

the outside chime sounds once again. All

the doors, trunk lid and fuel-filler door

will unlock.

All doors, trunk lid and fuel-filler door will be

locked automatically unless one of the

following operations is performed within 1

minute after pushing the request switch or

touch unlock operation while the doors are

locked.

. Opening any door

. Pushing the ignition switch

During this 1-minute time period, if the

UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key

is pushed, all doors will be locked automa-

tically after another 1 minute.

WAD0081X

JVP0451X

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the trunk open request switch for

more than 1 second while carrying the

Intelligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. An outside chime

will sound four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection:

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout

protection is equipped with the Intelligent

Key system.

When the trunk lid is closed with the

Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside

chime will sound and the trunk will open.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met

for a period of time, the battery saver

system will cut off the power supply to

prevent battery discharge.

. The ignition switch is in the ACC position,

and

. All doors are closed, and

. The shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the

Intelligent Key listed on the following chart

or to help prevent the vehicle from being

stolen, chime or beep sounds inside and

outside the vehicle and a warning displays in

the vehicle information display.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning

displays, be sure to check the vehicle and

Intelligent Key.

See “Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-14) and

“Vehicle information display” (P.2-20).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition

switch to stop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the

display and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Shift the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

When shifting the shift lever to

the P (Park) position.

The inside warning chime sounds continu-

ously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

When opening the driver’s door

to get out of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds continu-

ously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

When closing the door after

getting out of the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the

display, the outside chime sounds 3 times

and the inside warning chime sounds for a

few seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

The SHIFT P warning appears on the

display and the outside chime sounds

continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

OFF position and the shift lever is not

in the P (Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position and push the ignition switch to

the OFF position.

When closing the door with the

inside lock knob turned to

LOCK

The outside chime sounds for a few

seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle or trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the request

switch or LOCK button on the

Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few

seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle or trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

When closing the trunk lid

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately 10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

LOG-IN FUNCTION

After setting up the user information, the

system will automatically recognize the user

upon turning on the vehicle.

There will be a personalized welcome greet-

ing and screen prompt to log-in.

This feature allows 4 drivers to use their

own registration, drive mode, driving posi-

tion, air conditioner, and auto settings and

memorizes these custom settings.

The log-in user can be changed on the

welcome greeting screen or User Profiles

screen. For more details, see the INFINITI

InTouch

Owner’s Manual.

The log-in function is linked to the following

items:

. Meter

. Audio

. Navigation system display (if so

equipped)

. Navigation settings (if so equipped)

. Air conditioner

. Automatic drive positioner (if so

equipped)

. Engine/Transmission

. Steering

. Suspension (if so equipped)

. Active trace control system

. Driver assistance* (if so equipped)

. Vehicle settings

*: except for the Forward Emergency Brak-

ing (FEB) with pedestrian detection system

WARNING

The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pushed.

The FAA advises that the radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane.

Make sure the buttons are not operated

unintentionally when the unit is stored

during a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors and

fuel-filler door, open the trunk lid, activate

the panic alarm and open the windows by

pushing the buttons on the Intelligent Key

from outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function can

operate at a distance of approximately 33

ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective

distance depends upon the conditions

around the vehicle.)

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used

with one vehicle. For information concerning

the purchase and use of additional Intelli-

gent Keys, contact an INFINITI retailer.

The buttons on the Intelligent Key will not

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

operate when:

. the distance between the Intelligent Key

and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).

. the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

After locking with the remote keyless entry

function, pull the door handle to make sure

the doors are securely locked.

The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies

depending on the environment. To securely

operate the lock and unlock buttons, ap-

proach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from

the door.

WAD0074X

Type A (if so equipped)

WAD0075X

Type B (if so equipped)

LOCK button

UNLOCK button

TRUNK button

PANIC button

Remote engine start button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

When you lock or unlock the doors or the

trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash and

the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as

a confirmation. For details, see “Setting

hazard indicator and horn mode” (P.3-18).

Locking doors, trunk lid and fuel-

filler door

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position and make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.

3. Push the LOCK

button on the

Intelligent Key.

4. All the doors, trunk lid and fuel-filler door

will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and

the horn chirps once.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key

while the ignition switch is in the ACC

or ON position.

Unlocking doors, trunk lid and fuel-

filler door

1. Push the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door will unlock.

3. Push the UNLOCK

button on the

Intelligent Key again within 1 minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again.

All the doors, trunk lid and the fuel-filler

door will unlock.

All doors, trunk lid and the fuel-filler door

will be locked automatically unless one of

the following operations is performed within

1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key while the doors

are locked. If during this 1-minute time

period, the UNLOCK

button on the

Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will be

locked automatically after another 1 minute.

. Opening any door

. Pushing the ignition switch

Opening windows (if so equipped)

The UNLOCK button operation also

allows you to open the window that is

equipped with the automatic open/close

function. (See “Power windows” (P.2-52).)

To open the window, push the door UN-

LOCK

button on the Intelligent Key

for about 3 seconds after the door is

unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK

button .

If the window open operation is stopped in

mid-operation while pushing the UNLOCK

button , release and push the

UNLOCK

button again until the

window opens completely.

Window cannot be closed using the Intelli-

gent Key.

Opening moonroof (if so equipped)

The moonroof can be opened by pushing the

UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent

Key. This function will not operate while the

moonroof timer is activated or when the

moonroof needs to be initialized.

To open the moonroof, push the UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key for

about 3 seconds after the door is unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK

button .

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button on the

Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The trunk will unlatch.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel

threatened, you may activate the alarm to

call attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC

button on the key

for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights

will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

It has run for 25 seconds, or

Any of the buttons on the Intelligent

Key are pushed. (Note: PANIC

button or TRUNK button

should be pushed for more than 1

second.)

Remote engine start (if so equipped)

The remote engine start button is on

the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has remote

engine start function. This function allows

the engine to start from outside the vehicle.

See “Remote engine start” (P.3-19) for more

details.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and

horn mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps

once. When the UNLOCK

button is

pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes twice. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, neither the hazard

indicator nor the horn operates.

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle or trunk

request switch)

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME -

twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME -

once

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - 4

times

Remote keyless entry system

(Using

, or button)

HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle or trunk

request switch)

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME -

none

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME -

none

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME -

none

Remote keyless entry system

(Using

, or button)

HAZARD - twice

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Switching procedure:

To switch the hazard indicator and horn

(chime) operation, push the LOCK

and

UNLOCK

buttons on the Intelligent

Key simultaneously for more than 2 seconds.

. When the hazard indicator mode is set,

the hazard indicator flashes 3 times.

. When the hazard indicator and horn

mode is set, the hazard indicator flashes

once and the horn chirps once.

WARNING

To avoid risk of injury or death, do not

use the remote engine start function

when the vehicle is in an enclosed area

such as a garage.

WAD0076X

The remote engine start button is on the

Intelligent Key if the vehicle has remote

engine start function. This function allows

the engine to start from outside the vehicle.

Automatic climate control system will auto-

matically adjust the passenger compartment

to be the set appropriate temperature when

the remote engine start function is used.

Laws in some local communities may restrict

the use of remote engine starters. For

example, some laws require a person using

remote engine start to have the vehicle in

view. Check local regulations for any re-

quirements.

Other conditions may affect the remote

engine start function. See “Conditions the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

remote engine start will not work” (P.3-21).

Other conditions can affect the performance

of the Intelligent Key transmitter. See “In-

telligent Key system” (P.3-6) for additional

information.

REMOTE ENGINE START OPER-

ATING RANGE

The remote engine start function can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range from the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or other strong radio wave sources

are present near the operating location, the

Intelligent Key operating range becomes

narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not

function properly.

The remote engine start operating range is

approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the

vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE ENGINE

To use the remote start function to start the

engine, perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Push the LOCK

button to lock all

doors.

3. Within 5 seconds push and hold the

remote engine start

button until

the turn signal lights flash and the tail

lights illuminate. If the vehicle is not

within view, push and hold the remote

engine start

button for at least 2

seconds.

The following events will occur when the

engine starts:

. The front parking lights will turn on and

remain on as long as the engine is

running.

. The doors will be locked and the air

conditioner system may turn on.

. The engine will continue to run for about

10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend

the time for an additional 10 minutes.

See “Extending engine run time” (P.3-

20).

. The rear window glass and outside mirror

defroster may turn on automatically

when the outside air temperature, the

interior temperature and the engine

coolant temperature are low.

Depress and hold the brake pedal, then place

the ignition switch in the ON position before

driving. For further instructions, see “Driving

the vehicle” (P.5-16).

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The remote engine start function can be

extended one time by performing the steps

listed in “Remote starting the engine” (P.3-

20). Run time will be calculated as follows:

. The first 10 minute run time will start

when the remote engine start function is

performed.

. The second 10 minutes will start imme-

diately when the remote engine start

function is performed. For example, if

the engine has been running for 5

minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the

engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.

. Extending engine run time will count

towards the two remote engine start

limit.

A maximum of two remote engine starts, or

a single start with an extension, are allowed

between ignition cycles.

The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON

position and then back to the OFF position

before the remote engine start procedure

can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE

START

To cancel a remote engine start, perform one

of the following:

. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

push and hold the remote engine start

button until the parking lights turn

off.

. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

. Cycle the ignition switch ON and then

OFF.

. The extended engine run time has ex-

pired.

. The first 10 minute timer has expired.

. The engine hood has been opened.

. The shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

. The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into

the vehicle.

. The ignition switch is pushed without an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

. The ignition switch is pushed with an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the

brake pedal is not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE EN-

GINE START WILL NOT WORK

The remote engine start will not operate if

any of the following conditions are present:

. The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

. The hood is not securely closed.

. The hazard warning lights are on.

. The engine is still running. The engine

must be completely stopped. Wait at

least 6 seconds if the engine goes from

running to off. This is not applicable

when extending engine run time.

. The remote engine start

button is

not pushed and held for at least 2

seconds.

. The remote engine start

button is

not pushed and held within 5 seconds of

pushing LOCK

button.

. The brake pedal is depressed.

. The doors are not closed and locked.

. The trunk is open.

. The Intelligent Key warning message is

displayed in the vehicle information dis-

play.

. The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into

the vehicle.

. Two remote engine starts, or a single

remote engine start with an extension,

have already been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

. The remote engine start function has

been switched to OFF in the settings

menu on the lower display. For additional

information, see the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Manual.

The remote engine start may display a

warning or indicator in the vehicle informa-

tion display. For an explanation of the

warning or indicator, see “Indicators for

operation” (P.2-23).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0452X

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

located below the instrument panel; the

hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever

up at the front of the

hood with your fingertips and raise the

hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the

hood down to latch both the right and

left locks. Push the hood down to lock

the hood securely into place.

WARNING

. Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the hood

to fly open and result in an accident.

. If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

WARNING

. Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

See “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)”

(P.5-4) of this manual.

. Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

trunk closed, when not in use, and

prevent children’s access to Intelli-

gent Keys.

HOOD TRUNK LID

JVP0202X

TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH

The trunk lid release switch is located on

the instrument panel.

To open the trunk lid, push the release

switch. To close, push the trunk lid down.

JVP0451X

TRUNK OPEN REQUEST SWITCH

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the

trunk open request switch

when the

Intelligent Key is within the operating range

of the trunk lock/unlock function regardless

of the inside lock knob position.

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the

trunk open request switch

even if the

Intelligent Key is not within the operating

range of the trunk lock/unlock function,

when all doors are unlocked by the power

door lock system, and the automatic unlock

function.

(See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-6).)

TRUNK BUTTON

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the

TRUNK

button on the Intelligent Key for

more than 1 second.

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the

trunk open request switch

even if the

Intelligent Key is not within the operating

range of the trunk lock/unlock function,

when all doors are unlocked by the power

door lock system, and the automatic unlock

function.

(See “Remote keyless entry system” (P.3-

15).)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0203X

TRUNK RELEASE POWER CAN-

CEL SWITCH

When the switch located inside the glove

box is in the OFF position

, the power to

the trunk lid will be canceled and the trunk lid

cannot be opened by the trunk lid release

switch, the trunk open request switch or the

TRUNK button on the Intelligent Key.

When you have to leave the vehicle with a

valet and want to keep your belongings safe

in the glove box and the trunk, push this

switch to OFF and lock the glove box with

the mechanical key. Then leave the vehicle

and the Intelligent Key with the valet and

keep the mechanical key with you.

(See “Keys” (P.3-2).)

To connect the power to the trunk lid, push

the switch to the ON

position.

JVP0460X

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from play-

ing and becoming locked in the trunk

where they could be seriously injured.

Keep the car locked, with the trunk lid

securely latched, when not in use, and

prevent children’s access to Intelligent

Keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism

allows opening of the trunk lid in the event

that people become locked inside the trunk.

Releasing inside the trunk

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the

release handle

until the lock releases and

push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is

made of a material that glows in the dark

after a brief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located on the back of the

trunk lid as illustrated.

JVP0461X

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER

DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-

filler door by using one of the following

operations, then push the upper left side of

the door

. Touch the one touch unlock sensor on

one of the door handles and then push

the door handle request switch while

carrying the Intelligent Key.

. Push the UNLOCK button on the Intel-

ligent Key twice.

. Push the power door lock switch to the

UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely

and lock all doors by operating the door

handle request switch, the LOCK button on

the Intelligent Key or the power door lock

switch.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

. Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or ser-

iously injured if it is misused or

mishandled. Always stop engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames or

sparks near the vehicle when refuel-

ing.

. Do not attempt to top off the fuel

tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts

off automatically. Continued refuel-

ing may cause fuel overflow, resulting

in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

. Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious

malfunction and possible injury. It

could also cause the Malfunction

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.

. Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

. Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

— Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices

when filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

— Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid

paint damage.

. Insert the cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube, then tighten the fuel-filler

cap until a single click is heard. Failure

to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly

may cause the

Malfunction In-

dicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If

the

light illuminates because the

fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,

tighten or install the cap and con-

tinue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the

light does

not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

. The Loose Fuel Cap warning will

appear if the fuel-filler cap is not

properly tightened. It may take a few

driving trips for the warning to be

displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-

filler cap properly after the Loose

Fuel Cap warning appears may cause

the

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to illuminate.

. For additional information, see “Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL)” (P.2-

18).

JVP0454X

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise

to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

JVP0455X

Loose Fuel Cap warning

The Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the

vehicle information display when the fuel-

filler cap is not tightened correctly after the

vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few

driving trips for the warning to be displayed.

To turn off the warning, perform the

following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

soon as possible. (See “Fuel-filler cap”

(P.3-25).)

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single

click is heard.

3. Push the

or switch on the

steering wheel for longer than 1 second

to turn off the Loose Fuel Cap warning

after tightening the fuel-filler cap.

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving. You could lose control

of your vehicle and cause an accident.

. Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and com-

fort. The driver’s air bag inflates with

great force. If you are unrestrained,

leaning forward, sitting sideways or

out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious or

fatal injuries from the air bag if you

are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel. Always use the seat

belts.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2328

MANUAL OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt or telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever down and adjust the

steering wheel up, down, forward or rear-

ward to the desired position.

Push the lock lever up securely to lock the

steering wheel in place.

JVP0205X

ELECTRIC OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the switch to adjust the steering

wheel up or down, forward or rearward to

the desired position.

Entry/Exit function operation:

The automatic drive positioner system will

make the steering wheel move up automa-

tically when the driver’s door is opened with

the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

This lets the driver get into and out of the

seat more easily.

For more information, see “Automatic drive

positioner” (P.3-33).

SPA2471

1. To block glare from the front, swing

down the sun visor

2. To block glare from the side, remove the

sun visor from the center mount and

swing the visor to the side

3. Slide the sun visor

in or out as needed

(for driver’s side only).

SPA2447

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the height and the angle of the inside

mirror to the desired position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

SUN VISORS MIRRORS

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2143

Manual anti-glare type

The night position will reduce glare from

the headlights of vehicles behind you at

night.

Use the day position

when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

SPA2422A

Type A (if so equipped)

SPA2450

Type B (if so equipped)

Automatic anti-glare type

The inside mirror is designed so that it

automatically changes reflection according

to the intensity of the headlights of the

following vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automatically

turned on when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position.

The anti-glare system also operates for the

outside mirrors (if so equipped).

When the anti-glare system is turned on, the

indicator light

will illuminate and excessive

glare from the headlights of the vehicle

behind you will be reduced.

Type A (if so equipped): Push the

switch

to make the inside mirror operate normally

and the indicator light will turn off. Push the

switch again to turn the system on.

Type B (if so equipped): Push the “*” switch

to make the inside mirror operate nor-

mally. The indicator light will turn off. Push

the “I” switch

to turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the sensors

or apply glass cleaner on them. Doing so

will reduce the sensitivity of the sensor,

resulting in improper operation.

For the compass (if so equipped) operation,

see “Compass” (P.2-9).

For the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver (if

so equipped) operation, see “HomeLink

Universal Transceiver” (P.2-59).

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

JVP0246X

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located

on the driver’s armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only when

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Move the switch

right or left to select the

right or left side mirror, then adjust using the

control switch

Defrosting outside mirrors

The outside mirrors will be heated when the

rear window defroster switch is operated.

If the engine is started using the remote start

function (if so equipped) when the outside

air temperature, the interior temperature

and the engine coolant temperature are

low, the rear window glass and outside

mirror defroster may turn on automatically.

For additional information about the remote

engine start function, see “Remote engine

start” (P.3-19).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA1829

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward

the rear of the vehicle.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so

equipped)

When backing up the vehicle, the right and

left outside mirrors will turn downward

automatically to provide better rear visibility.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

position.

3. Select the right or left side mirror by

operating the outside mirror control

switch.

4. The outside mirror surface moves down-

ward.

When one of the following conditions has

occurred, the outside mirror surface will

return to its original position.

. The shift lever is moved to any position

other than R (Reverse).

. The outside mirror control switch is set to

the center position.

. The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

Automatic anti-glare (if so

equipped)

The outside mirrors are designed so that

they automatically change reflection ac-

cording to the intensity of the headlights of

the vehicle following you.

The anti-glare system will be automatically

turned on when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position.

SIC3869

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the

sun visor and pull up the cover.

The automatic drive positioner system has

the following features:

. Entry/exit function

. Memory storage

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the steering

column will automatically move when the

shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This

allows the driver to get into and out of the

driver’s seat more easily.

The steering wheel will move up when the

driver’s door is opened with the ignition

switch in the LOCK position.

The steering wheel will return to the pre-

vious position when the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC position.

Cancel or activate entry/exit func-

tion

All the following conditions must be met

before cancelling or activating the entry/exit

function.

. The ignition switch is placed in the LOCK

position.

. The entry/exit function is not in opera-

tion.

. The following switches are not operated.

— Seat memory switches

— Power seat switches

— Electric tilting/telescopic steering

wheel switch

The entry/exit function can be activated or

canceled by pushing and holding the SET

switch for more than 10 seconds.

The entry/exit function can also be acti-

vated or canceled if the [Lift Steering Wheel

on Exit] key is turned to ON or OFF in the

[Settings] menu on the lower display. (See

the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Manual.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software versions.)

Initialize entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the entry/exit function will not

work though this function was set on before.

In such a case, after connecting the battery

or replacing with a new fuse, open and close

the driver’s door more than two times after

the ignition switch is switched from the ON

position to the LOCK position. The entry/

exit function will be activated.

JVP0462X

MEMORY STORAGE

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering

column and outside mirrors can be stored in

the automatic drive positioner memory.

Follow these procedures to use the memory

system.

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column

and outside mirrors to the desired posi-

tions by manually operating each adjust-

ing switch. For additional information,

see “Seats” (P.1-2), “Tilt/telescopic

steering” (P.3-27) and “Outside mirrors”

(P.3-31).

2. Push the SET switch and, within 5

seconds, push the memory switch (1 or

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER

(if so equipped)

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

2) fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed mem-

ory switch will stay on for approximately

5 seconds after pushing the switch.

When the memory is stored in the

memory switch (1 or 2), a buzzer will

sound.

If memory is stored in the same memory

switch, the previous memory will be

deleted.

Confirming memory storage

Push the SET switch. If the main memory

has not been stored, the indicator light will

come on for approximately 0.5 seconds.

When the memory has stored in position,

the indicator light will stay on for approxi-

mately 5 seconds.

Selecting the memorized position

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for

at least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, steering column and

outside mirrors will move to the memor-

ized position with the indicator light

flashing, and then the light will stay on

for approximately 5 seconds.

Linking log-in function to a stored

memory position

The log-in function can be linked to a stored

memory position with the following proce-

dure.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position while carrying an Intelligent

Key that was registered to the vehicle

with the log-in function. For more de-

tails, see “Log-in function” (P.3-15).

2. Adjust the position of the driver’s seat,

steering column and outside mirrors

manually. See “Seats” (P.1-2), “Tilt/tele-

scopic steering” (P.3-27) and “Outside

mirrors” (P.3-31).

3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The next time you log in (selecting the user

on the display) after placing the ignition

switch in the ON position while carrying the

Intelligent Key, the system will automatically

adjust to the memorized driving position.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will

not work or will stop operating under the

following conditions:

. When the vehicle is moving.

. When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the automatic drive posi-

tioner is operating.

. When the adjusting switch for the dri-

ver’s seat and steering column is turned

on while the automatic drive positioner is

operating.

. When the memory switch 1 or 2 is pushed

for less than 1 second.

. When the seat has already been moved

to the memorized position.

. When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

. While the walk-in function operates.

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice re-

cognition systems

INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Manual ........................ 4-2

Safety precautions ........................................................... 4-2

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ............................. 4-3

RearView Monitor system operation .................... 4-4

How to read the displayed lines ............................. 4-4

Difference between predictive and actual

distances ........................................................................ 4-5

How to park with predictive course lines ............ 4-6

RearView Monitor settings ...................................... 4-7

RearView Monitor system limitations ................... 4-9

System maintenance ............................................... 4-10

Around View

Monitor (if so equipped) .................. 4-11

Around View

Monitor system operation ......... 4-12

Around View

Monitor settings ........................... 4-19

Around View

Monitor system limitations ........ 4-21

System maintenance ................................................ 4-23

Camera aiding sonar function (for models with

Around View

Monitor) ............................................... 4-24

Sonar system operation .......................................... 4-25

Turning on and off the sonar function ............... 4-25

Sonar system limitations ...................................... 4-28

System maintenance ............................................. 4-28

Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if

so equipped) .................................................................... 4-29

MOD system operation ........................................ 4-30

Turning the MOD system ON and OFF ........... 4-31

MOD system limitations ....................................... 4-32

System maintenance .............................................. 4-33

Ventilators ....................................................................... 4-34

Center ventilators .................................................. 4-34

Side ventilators ....................................................... 4-34

Heater and air conditioner ......................................... 4-34

Automatic air conditioner ..................................... 4-36

Climate settings ...................................................... 4-40

Operating tips ......................................................... 4-40

Servicing air conditioner ........................................ 4-41

Antenna ........................................................................... 4-42

Window antenna .................................................... 4-42

Satellite antenna .................................................... 4-42

Car phone or CB radio ................................................ 4-42

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Refer to the INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s

Manual that includes the following informa-

tion.

. Navigation system (if so equipped)

. Audio system

. Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone system

. INFINITI InTouch

Services (if so

equipped)

. SiriusXM Traffic

(if so equipped)

. SiriusXM

Travel Link (if so equipped)

. SiriusXM

Radio

. Viewing information

. Other settings

. Voice recognition (if so equipped)

. Meter settings

. General system information

WARNING

. Do not adjust the display controls,

heater and air conditioner controls or

audio controls while driving so that

full attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

. If you noticed any foreign objects

entering the system hardware, spilled

liquid on the system, or noticed

smoke or fumes coming out from the

system, or any other unusual opera-

tion is observed, stop using the

system immediately and contact the

nearest INFINITI retailer. Ignoring

such conditions may lead to an acci-

dent, fire or electric shock.

. Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may lead to an

accident, fire, or electric shock.

. Park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake to view

images on the touch screen display.

CAUTION

. Do not use the system when the

engine is not running for extended

periods of time to prevent battery

discharge.

. The glass screen on the liquid crystal

display may break if it is hit with a

hard or sharp object. If the glass

screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing

so could result in an injury.

. Extreme temperature conditions [be-

low −4°F (−20°C) and above 158°F

(70°C)] could affect the performance

of the system.

INFINITI INTOUCH

OWNER’S MANUAL

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WAE0191X

1. Upper touch-screen display (upper dis-

play)

2. Lower touch-screen display (lower dis-

play)

3. MENU button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in

serious injury or death.

. The RearView Monitor is a conveni-

ence but it is not a substitute for

proper backing. Always turn and look

out the windows, and check mirrors

to be sure that it is safe to move

before operating the vehicle. Always

back up slowly.

. The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in showing large stationary

objects directly behind the vehicle, to

help avoid damaging the vehicle.

. The distance guide line and the

vehicle width line should be used as

a reference only when the vehicle is

on a level paved surface. The distance

viewed on the monitor is for refer-

ence only and may be different than

the actual distance between the

vehicle and displayed objects.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automatically

shows a rear view of the vehicle in the upper

display when the shift lever is shifted into

the "R” (Reverse) position. When activating

the RearView Monitor, the guide lines, the

icons and the messages may not be dis-

played immediately.

The radio can still be heard while the Rear-

View Monitor is active.

WAE0195X

To display the rear view, the RearView

Monitor system uses a camera

located

just above the vehicle’s license plate.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the “ON” position,

move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse)

position to operate the RearView Monitor.

WAE0241X

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with refer-

ence to the bumper line

are displayed on

the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the bumper.

. Red line

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

. Yellow line

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

. Green line

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

Indicate the approximate vehicle width.

Predictive course lines :

Indicate the predictive course when backing

up. The predictive course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the shift

lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position and the

steering wheel is turned. The predictive

course lines will move depending on how

much the steering wheel is turned and will

not be displayed while the steering wheel is

in the neutral position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width

of the predictive course lines are wider than

the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PRE-

DICTIVE AND ACTUAL DIS-

TANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations

on the ground are for approximate reference

only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces

or projecting objects will be actually located

at distances different from those displayed

in the monitor relative to the guide lines

(refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn

around and view the objects as you are

backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to

view the positioning of objects behind the

vehicle.

JVH1268X

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

farther than it appears on the monitor.

JVH1269X

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown farther than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

closer than it appears on the monitor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object

The predictive course lines do not touch

the object in the display. However, the

vehicle may hit the object if it projects over

the actual backing up course.

SAA2244

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position is shown farther than the

position

in the display. However, the

position

is actually at the same distance

as the position

. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position

how to park with the object projects over

the actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDIC-

TIVE COURSE LINES

WARNING

. If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predictive course lines

may not be displayed correctly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predictive course lines and the

actual course line.

. The displayed lines will appear

slightly off to the right because the

rearview camera is not installed in the

rear center of the vehicle.

. If the battery is disconnected or

becomes discharged, the predictive

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

— Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine is running.

— Drive the vehicle on a straight

road for more than 5 minutes.

SAA1897

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen

when the shift lever is

moved to the “R” (Reverse) position.

SAA1898

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predictive

course lines

enter the parking space .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

parallel to

the parking space

while referring to

the predictive course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the

“P” (Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

REARVIEW MONITOR SETTINGS

The RearView Monitor settings can be

changed using the following procedures.

1. Push the MENU button.

2. Touch [Settings] on the lower display.

3. Touch [Camera].

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software versions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Available setting items:

Setting items Action

Predictive Course Lines When this item is turned on, the predictive course lines

are displayed on the RearView Monitor screen. (See

“How to park with predictive course lines” (P.4-6).)

Display Settings

(Available only when cam-

era screen is displayed on

the upper display.)

Brightness Adjust display settings by touching the “+”/“-” key.

Contrast

Tint

Color

Black Level

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the RearView Monitor settings while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for RearView Monitor. Failure to oper-

ate the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. The system cannot completely elim-

inate blind spots and may not show

every object.

. Underneath the bumper and the

corner areas of the bumper cannot

be viewed on the RearView Monitor

because of its monitoring range lim-

itation. The system will not show

small objects below the bumper, and

may not show objects close to the

bumper or on the ground.

. Objects viewed in the RearView

Monitor differ from actual distance

because a wide-angle lens is used.

. Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and

outside mirrors.

. Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, ve-

hicle position, road conditions and

road grade.

. Make sure that the trunk lid is

securely closed when backing up.

. Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

. When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray

it around the camera. Otherwise,

water may enter the camera unit

causing water condensation on the

lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric

shock.

. Do not strike the camera. It is a

precision instrument. Otherwise, it

may malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

. When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not clearly display

objects.

. When strong light is directly coming on

the camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

. Vertical lines may be seen in objects on

the screen. This is due to strong reflected

light from the bumper.

. The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

. The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

. Objects on the monitor may not be clear

in a dark environment.

. There may be a delay when switching to

the RearView Monitor.

. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera, the RearView Monitor may not

display object clearly. Clean the camera.

. Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe

off any wax with a clean cloth dampened

with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then

wipe with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0195X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera

, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera by

wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping

it with a dry cloth.

WAE0192X

1. Upper touch-screen display (upper dis-

play)

2. Lower touch-screen display (lower dis-

play)

3. CAMERA button

4. MENU button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for the proper use of the

Around View

Monitor system could

result in serious injury or death.

. The Around View

Monitor is a

convenience feature and is not a

substitute for proper vehicle opera-

tion because it has areas where

objects cannot be viewed. The four

corners of the vehicle in particular,

are areas where objects do not al-

ways appear in the bird’s-eye, front,

or rear views. Always check your

surroundings to be sure that it is safe

to move before operating the vehicle.

Always operate the vehicle slowly.

Always look out the windows and

check mirrors to be sure that it is safe

to move.

. The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

AROUND VIEW

MONITOR (if so

equipped)

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

Do not scratch the lens when cleaning

dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The Around View

Monitor system is de-

signed as an aid to the driver in situations

such as slot parking or parallel parking.

The monitor displays various views of the

position of the vehicle in a split screen

format. All views are not available at all

times.

Available views:

. Front view

An approximately 150-degree view of

the front of the vehicle.

. Rear view

An approximately 150-degree view of

the rear of the vehicle.

. Bird’s-eye view

The surrounding view of the vehicle from

above.

. Front-side view

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

. Front-wide view

An approximately 180-degree view of

the front of the vehicle.

WAE0196X

To display the multiple views, the Around

View

Monitor system uses cameras

located in the front grill, on the vehicle’s

outside mirrors and one just above the

vehicle’s license plate.

AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SYS-

TEM OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the “ON” position,

move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse)

position or push the CAMERA button to

display the Around View

Monitor on the

upper display.

Available views

WARNING

. The distance guide line and the

vehicle width line should be used as

a reference only when the vehicle is

on a paved, level surface. The dis-

tance viewed on the monitor is for

reference only and may be different

than the actual distance between the

vehicle and displayed objects.

. Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-

eye view as a reference. The lines and

the bird’s-eye view are greatly af-

fected by the number of occupants,

fuel level, vehicle position, road con-

dition and road grade.

. If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predictive course lines

and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-

played incorrectly.

. When driving the vehicle up a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

farther than they appear. When driv-

ing the vehicle down a hill, objects

viewed in the monitor are closer than

they appear.

. Objects in the rear view will appear

visually opposite compared to when

viewed in the rear view and outside

mirrors.

. Use the mirrors or actually look to

properly judge distances to other

objects.

. The distance between objects viewed

in the rear view differs from actual

distance because a wide-angle lens is

used.

. On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predictive course lines and the

actual course line.

. The vehicle width and predictive

course lines are wider than the actual

width and course.

. The displayed lines on the rear view

will appear slightly off to the right

because the rearview camera is not

installed in the rear center of the

vehicle.

SAA1840

Front view

WAE0216X

Rear view

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front and rear view:

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate

vehicle width and distances to objects with

reference to the vehicle body line

, are

displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

- :

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

. Red line

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

. Yellow line

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

. Green line

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

. Green line

(front view only): approx. 10

ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

Indicate the approximate vehicle width.

Predictive course lines

Indicate the predictive course when operat-

ing the vehicle. The predictive course lines

will move depending on how much the

steering wheel is turned. The predictive

course lines in the rear view will not be

displayed while the steering wheel is in the

straight ahead position.

The front view will not be displayed when

the vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view

and the steering wheel turns about 90

degrees or less from the straight ahead

position, both the right and left predictive

course lines

are displayed. When the

steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or

more, a line is displayed only on the

opposite side of the turn.

WAE0231X

Bird’s-eye view:

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead

view of the vehicle which helps confirm the

vehicle position and the predictive course to

a parking space.

The vehicle icon

shows the position of the

vehicle. Note that the distance between

objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view differs

from the actual distance.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover

are indicated in black.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

"ON" position, the unviewable area

highlighted in yellow for a few seconds after

the bird’s-eye view is displayed.

Predictive course lines ( and ) indicate the

predictive course when operating the vehi-

cle. The predictive course lines (

and ) will

be displayed on the monitor when the

steering wheel is turned. The predictive

course lines (

and ) will move depending

on how much the steering wheel is turned.

WARNING

. Objects in the bird’s-eye view will

appear farther than the actual dis-

tance.

. Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

. Objects that are above the camera

cannot be displayed.

. The view for the bird’s-eye view may

be misaligned when the camera posi-

tion alters.

. A line on the ground may be mis-

aligned and is not seen as being

straight at the seam of the views.

The misalignment will increase as the

line proceeds away from the vehicle.

. Tire angle display does not indicate

the actual tire angle.

JVH1141X

Front-side view:

Guiding lines:

Guiding lines that indicate the width and the

front end of the vehicle are displayed on the

monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line

shows the front

part of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line

shows the vehicle

width including the outside mirror.

The extensions

of both the front and

side

lines are shown with a green dotted

line.

CAUTION

The turn signal light may look like the

side-of-vehicle line. This is not a mal-

function.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

JVH1142X

Front-wide view:

The front-wide view shows a wider area on

the entire screen and allows checking of the

blind corners on the right and left sides. The

front-wide view displays an approximately

180-degree area while the front view dis-

plays an approximately 150-degree area.

The predictive course lines are not displayed

on the front-wide view.

Distance guide lines

- :

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

. Red line

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

. Yellow line

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

. Green line

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

. Green line

: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

Indicates the approximate vehicle width.

Difference between predictive and

actual distances

The displayed guidelines and their locations

on the ground are for approximate reference

only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces

or projecting objects will be actually located

at distances different from those displayed

in the monitor relative to the guide lines

(refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn

around and view the objects as you are

backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to

view the positioning of objects behind the

vehicle.

JVH1268X

Backing up on a steep uphill:

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

farther than it appears on the monitor.

JVH1269X

Backing up on a steep downhill:

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown farther than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

closer than it appears on the monitor.

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object:

The predictive course lines

do not touch

the object in the display. However, the

vehicle may hit the object if it projects over

the actual backing up course.

SAA2244

Backing up behind a projecting object:

The position

is shown farther than the

position

in the display. However, the

position

is actually at the same distance

as the position

. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position

the object projects over the actual backing

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

up course.

How to park with predictive course

lines

WARNING

. If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predictive course lines

may not be displayed correctly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predictive course lines and the

actual course line.

. The displayed lines will appear

slightly off to the right because the

rearview camera is not installed in the

rear center of the vehicle.

. If the battery is disconnected or

becomes discharged, the predictive

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

— Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine is running.

— Drive the vehicle on a straight

road for more than 5 minutes.

SAA1897

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen

when the shift lever is

moved to the “R” (Reverse) position.

SAA1898

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predictive

course lines

enter the parking space .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

parallel to

the parking space

while referring to

the predictive course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the

“P” (Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

WAE0218X

How to switch the display

The Around View

Monitor can display two

split views as well as a single view of the

front-wide view. Push the CAMERA button,

change the shift lever position or touch

[Change View]

to switch between the

available views.

If the vehicle is equipped with Back-up

Collision Intervention (BCI) system, the BCI

system key (“BCI”) may be displayed on the

Around View

Monitor screen. For details,

see “Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)”

(P.5-57).

AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SET-

TINGS

The Around View

Monitor settings can be

changed using the following procedures.

1. Push the MENU button.

2. Touch [Settings] on the lower display.

3. Touch [Camera].

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software versions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Available setting items:

Setting item Action

Camera MOD Turn the MOD system on/off. (See “Moving Object Detection (MOD)” (P.4-

29).)

MOD Volume The volume setting of the MOD detection warning chime can be adjusted.

Unviewable Area Reminder When this item is turned on, the unviewable area is highlighted in yellow for

several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is displayed for the first time when the

ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position.

Predictive Course Lines When this item is turned on, the predictive course lines are displayed in the front,

rear and bird’s-eye view screen.

Auto Show Sonar Image The automatic sonar display can be turned on/off.

Display Settings

(Available only

when camera screen

is displayed on the

upper display.)

Brightness Adjust display settings by touching the “+”/“-” key.

Contrast

Tint

Color

Black Level

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the Around View

Monitor settings while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SYS-

TEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for Around View

Monitor. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance with

these system limitations could result in

serious injury or death.

. Do not use the Around View

Moni-

tor with the outside mirrors in the

stored position, and make sure that

the trunk lid is securely closed when

operating the vehicle using the

Around View

Monitor.

. The apparent distance between ob-

jects viewed on the Around View

Monitor differs from the actual dis-

tance.

. The cameras are installed on the

front grille, the outside mirrors and

above the rear license plate. Do not

put anything on the vehicle that

covers the cameras.

. When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray

it around the cameras. Otherwise,

water may enter the camera unit

causing water condensation on the

lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric

shock.

. Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could

cause a malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

WAE0220X

There are some areas where the system will

not show objects and the system does not

warn of moving objects. When in the front or

rear view display, an object below the

bumper or on the ground may not be viewed

. When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall object

near the seam

of the camera viewing

areas will not appear in the monitor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

. The screen displayed on the Around

View

Monitor will automatically return

to the previous screen 3 minutes after

the CAMERA button has been pushed

while the shift lever is in a position other

than the “R” (Reverse) position.

. There may be a delay when switching

between views.

. When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not display

objects clearly.

. When strong light is directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

. The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

. The colors of objects on the Around

View

Monitor may differ somewhat

from the actual color of objects.

. Objects on the monitor may not be clear

and the color of the object may differ in a

dark environment.

. There may be differences in sharpness

between each camera view of the bird’s-

eye view.

. When activating the Around View

Monitor, the icons and the messages

may not be displayed for a while.

. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera, the Around View

Monitor may

not display objects clearly. Clean the

camera.

. Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe

off any wax with a clean cloth that has

been dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry

cloth.

JVH1633X

System temporarily unavailable

When the icon is displayed on the

screen, there will be abnormal conditions in

the Around View

Monitor. This will not

hinder normal driving operation but the

system should be inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

JVH1634X

When the icon is displayed on the

screen, the camera image may be receiving

temporary electronic disturbances from sur-

rounding devices. This will not hinder normal

driving operation but the system should be

inspected. It is recommended that you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

WAE0196X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras

, the Around View

Monitor

may not display objects clearly. Clean the

camera by wiping with a cloth dampened

with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then

wiping with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the sonar

function as outlined in this section could

result in serious injury or death.

. The sonar is a convenience feature. It

is not a substitute for proper parking.

. This function is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large station-

ary objects to help avoid damaging

the vehicle.

. The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

. Always look around and check that it

is safe to move before parking.

. Read and understand the limitations

of the sonar as contained in this

section.

The sonar function helps to inform the driver

of large stationary objects around the

vehicle when parking by issuing an audible

and visual alert.

WAE0193X

1. Upper touch-screen display (upper dis-

play)

2. Sonar indicator

3. Lower touch-screen display (lower dis-

play)

4. CAMERA button

5. MENU button

CAMERA AIDING SONAR FUNCTION

(for models with Around View

Monitor)

SONAR SYSTEM OPERATION

When the camera is first activated with the

bird’s-eye view on the upper display, red

markers will flash. This indicates that the

sonar system is activated.

The system gives the tone for front objects

when the shift lever is in the “D” (Drive)

position and both front and rear objects

when the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse)

position.

When the camera image is shown on the

upper display, the system shows the sonar

indicator regardless of the shift lever posi-

tion.

The system is deactivated at speeds above 6

MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower

speeds.

The colors of the sonar indicators and the

distance guide lines in the front, front-wide

and rear views indicate different distances

to the object.

When the objects are detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks and the tone

sounds intermittently. When the vehicle

moves closer to the object, the color of the

indicator turns yellow and the rate of the

blinking and the rate of the tone increase.

When the vehicle is very close to the object,

the indicator stops blinking and turns red,

and the tone sounds continuously.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3

seconds when an object is detected by only

the corner sonar and the distance does not

change.

The tone will stop when the object is no

longer near the vehicle.

WAE0236X

TURNING ON AND OFF THE SO-

NAR FUNCTION

When the Sonar/MOD key is touched, the

indicator light

on the key will turn off and

the sonar will turn off temporarily. The

Moving Object Detection (MOD) system will

also be turned off at the same time. See

“Moving Object Detection (MOD)” (P.4-29).

When the Sonar/MOD key

is touched

again, the indicator light

will turn on and

the sonar will turn back on.

In the cases below, the sonar will be turned

back on automatically:

. When the shift lever is in the “R”

(Reverse) position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. When the CAMERA button is pushed

and a screen other than the camera view

is shown on the display.

. When vehicle speed decreases below

approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h).

. When the ignition switch is placed in the

“OFF” position and turned back to the

“ON” position again.

To prevent the sonar system from activating

altogether, use the sonar system settings

menu.

Sonar system settings

The camera aiding sonar function settings

can be changed using the following proce-

dures.

1. Push the MENU button.

2. Touch [Settings] on the lower display.

3. Touch [Parking Sonar].

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software versions.

Available setting items:

Setting item Action

Parking Sonar Parking Sonar When this item is turned on, the front and rear sonar is activated.

When this item is turned off (indicator turns off), the front and rear sonar is

deactivated. The amber markers are displayed at the corners of the vehicle icon.

When the Around View

Monitor is activated next time after placing the

ignition switch in the ON position, a gray sonar icon will briefly flash on the

upper display, indicating that the sonar system is off.

Auto Show Sonar Image When the sonar detects an object while this item is turned on, the Around View

Monitor will interrupt the current view in the display to show the surround area

of the vehicle.

Front Only When this item is turned on, only the front sonar is activated. The amber

markers are displayed at the rear corners of the vehicle icon.

Distance Adjust the sensitivity level of the sonar.

Volume Adjust the tone volume of the sonar.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the Parking Sonar settings while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the sonar function. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car

wash, a truck’s compressed-air

brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect

the function of the system, including

reduced performance or a false acti-

vation.

. The system is not designed to pre-

vent contact with small or moving

objects.

. The system will not detect small

objects below the bumper, and may

not detect objects close to the bum-

per or on the ground.

. The system may not detect the

following objects:

— Fluffy objects such as snow,

cloth, cotton, grass or wool.

— Thin objects such as rope, wire or

chain.

— Wedge-shaped objects.

. If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned

or bent, the sensing zone may be

altered causing inaccurate measure-

ment of objects or false alarms.

CAUTION

Excessive noise (such as audio system

volume or an open vehicle window) will

interfere with the tone and it may not be

heard.

System temporarily unavailable

When the amber markers are displayed at

the corners of the vehicle icon and the

function cannot be activated from the

Parking sonar settings menu (the setting

items are grayed out), the sonar system may

be malfunctioning.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

Keep the surface of the sonar (located on

the front and rear bumper fascia) free

from accumulations of snow, ice and dirt.

Do not scratch the surface of the sonar

when cleaning. If the sensors are cov-

ered, the accuracy of the sonar function

will be diminished.

WAE0192X

1. Upper touch-screen display (upper dis-

play)

2. Lower touch-screen display (lower dis-

play)

3. CAMERA button

4. MENU button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the Mov-

ing Object Detection system could result

in serious injury or death.

. The MOD system is not a substitute

for proper vehicle operation and is

not designed to prevent contact with

the objects surrounding the vehicle.

When maneuvering, always use the

outside mirror and rearview mirror

and turn and check the surrounding

to ensure it is safe to maneuver.

. The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reacti-

vated at lower speeds.

. The MOD system is not designed to

detect the surrounding stationary

objects.

The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system

can inform the driver of the moving objects

surrounding the vehicle when driving out of

garages, maneuvering into parking lots and

in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by

using image processing technology on the

image shown on the display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION

(MOD) (if so equipped)

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically

under the following conditions:

. When the shift lever is in the “R”

(Reverse) position.

. When the CAMERA button is pushed to

activate the camera view on the display.

. When vehicle speed decreases below

approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h) and the

camera screen is displayed.

The MOD system operates in the following

conditions when the camera view is dis-

played:

. When the shift lever is in the “P” (Park) or

“N” (Neutral) position and the vehicle is

stopped, the MOD system detects mov-

ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The

MOD system will not operate if the

outside mirrors are moving in or out, in

the stowed position, or if either front

door is opened.

. When the shift lever is in the “D” (Drive)

position and the vehicle speed is below

approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the

MOD system detects moving objects in

the front view or front-wide view.

. When the shift lever is in the “R”

(Reverse) position and the vehicle speed

is below approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h),

the MOD system detects moving objects

in the rear view.

The MOD system will not operate if the

trunk lid is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving

objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon

is not displayed on the screen when in this

view.

WAE0240X

Bird’s-eye view

WAE0237X

Front view / rear view

WAE0238X

Rear and front-side views

WAE0239X

Front-wide view

When the MOD system detects moving

objects near the vehicle, a chime will be

heard and a yellow frame will be displayed

on the view where the objects are detected.

While the MOD system continues to detect

moving objects, the yellow frame continues

to be displayed.

NOTE:

While the sonar/Back-up Collision Inter-

vention (BCI) system (if so equipped) is

beeping, the MOD system does not chime.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame

displayed on each camera image (front, rear,

right, left) depending on where moving

objects are detected.

The yellow frame

is displayed on each

view in the front view, front-wide view and

rear view modes.

A green MOD icon

is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A white

MOD icon

is displayed in the view where

the MOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD

icon

is not displayed.

WAE0236X

TURNING THE MOD SYSTEM ON

AND OFF

When the MOD is active and the Sonar/

MOD key

is touched, the MOD system will

turn off temporarily and the indicator

will

turn off. (A camera-aiding sonar will turn off

at the same time.) When the Sonar/MOD

key

is touched again, the indicator will turn

on and the MOD system will turn back on.

To enable or disable the MOD system, use

the camera settings menu.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MOD function setting

The MOD function settings can be changed

using the following procedures.

1. Push the MENU button.

2. Touch [Settings] on the lower display.

3. Touch [Camera].

4. Touch [Camera].

Available setting items:

MOD:

When this item is turned on, the MOD

system is activated. When this item is turned

off (indicator turns off), the MOD system is

deactivated.

WAE0213X

When the MOD system is deactivated, the

MOD icon

will disappear.

When the sonar is turned off on the settings

menu as well, the Sonar/MOD key

will

disappear.

MOD Volume:

Adjust the volume of the chime.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle

in accordance with these system limita-

tions could result in serious injury or

death.

. Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle win-

dow) will interfere with the chime

sound, and it may not be heard.

. The MOD system performance will be

limited according to environmental

conditions and surrounding objects

such as:

— When there is low contrast be-

tween background and the mov-

ing objects.

— When there is blinking source of

light.

— When strong light such as an-

other vehicle’s headlight or sun-

light is present.

— When camera orientation is not in

its usual position, such as when

mirror is folded.

— When there is dirt, water drops or

snow on the camera lens.

— When the position of the moving

objects in the display is not chan-

ged.

. The MOD system might detect flow-

ing water droplets on the camera

lens, white smoke from the muffler,

moving shadows, etc.

. The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed,

direction, distance or shape of the

moving objects.

. If your vehicle sustains damage to the

parts where the camera is installed,

leaving it misaligned or bent, the

sensing zone may be altered and the

MOD system may not detect objects

properly.

. When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not

display objects clearly. This is not a

malfunction.

WAE0196X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras

, the MOD system may not

operate properly. Clean the camera by

wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted

mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a

dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

JVH1940X

Right side

CENTER VENTILATORS

Open/close the ventilator by moving the

control to either direction.

: Moving the control to this direction will

open the ventilator.

: Moving the control to this direction will

close the ventilator.

Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilator

by moving the center knob (up/down, left/

right) until the desired position is achieved.

JVH1941X

Right side

SIDE VENTILATORS

Open/close the ventilator by moving the

control to either direction.

: Moving the control to this direction will

open the ventilator.

: Moving the control to this direction will

close the ventilator.

Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilator

by moving the center knob (up/down, left/

right) until the desired position is achieved.

WARNING

. The heater and air conditioner oper-

ate only when the engine is running.

. Never leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in the vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could unknowingly activate switches

or controls and inadvertently become

involved in a serious accident and

injure themselves. On hot, sunny

days, temperatures in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal injuries

to people or animals.

. Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the

interior air to become stale and the

windows to fog up.

. Do not adjust the heating and air

conditioning controls while driving so

that full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

The heater and air conditioner operate when

the engine is running. The air blower will

operate even if the engine is turned off and

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

VENTILATORS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

NOTE:

. Odors from inside and outside the

vehicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the ventilators.

. When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air

recirculation to allow fresh air into the

passenger compartment. This should

help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

. Vehicles with an automatic climate con-

trol system will automatically adjust the

passenger compartment to be the set

appropriate temperature when the re-

mote engine start feature (if so

equipped) is used.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0214X

1. “ ” Temperature control increase

button (driver’s side)

2. “

” Temperature control decrease

button (driver’s side)

3. AUTO button

4. “

” Fan speed increase button

5. “

” Fan speed decrease button

6. “

” Manual air flow control button

7. Lower touch-screen display (lower dis-

play)

8. MENU button

9. CLIMATE button

10. “

” Temperature control increase

button (front passenger’s side)

11. “

” Temperature control decrease

button (front passenger’s side)

12. “

” Air recirculation button

13. “

” Front defroster button

14. “

” Rear defroster button

(See “Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch” (P.2-37).)

15. ON/OFF button

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER

NOTE:

The heater and air conditioning system

settings can be linked and memorized for

each of the Intelligent Keys. Refer to the

INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Manual.

Automatic operation (AUTO)

The AUTO mode may be used year-round as

the system automatically controls the air

conditioner to a constant temperature, air

flow distribution and fan speed after the

desired temperature is set manually.

Cooling and dehumidified heating (AUTO):

1. Push the AUTO button.

The indicator light on the button will

illuminate. The climate screen will be

displayed on the lower display and

“AUTO” will appear on the climate

screen.

2. Push the temperature control buttons

(driver’s side) to set the preferred tem-

perature.

When the DUAL mode is turned on,

you can individually set temperatures

for the driver’s side and front passen-

ger’s side, using the temperature

control buttons on the corresponding

side. (To turn on the DUAL mode,

touch [DUAL].).

The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained

automatically. Air flow distribution

and fan speed will also be controlled

automatically.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

Heating (A/C off):

The air conditioner does not activate in this

mode. Use this mode when you only need to

heat.

1. Push the CLIMATE button.

The climate screen will be displayed on

the lower display.

2. Touch [A/C]. The [A/C] indicator will

turn off. See “Operations on touch panel

screen” (P.4-38).

3. Push the temperature control buttons

(driver’s side) to set the preferred tem-

perature.

When the DUAL mode is turned on,

you can individually set temperatures

for the driver’s side and front passen-

ger’s side, using the temperature

control buttons on the corresponding

side. (To turn on the DUAL mode,

touch [DUAL].).

The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained

automatically. Air flow distribution

and fan speed will also be controlled

automatically.

NOTE:

. Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Otherwise

the system may not work properly.

. This mode is not recommended if the

windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

1. Push the “

” front defroster button.

The indicator light on the button will

illuminate.

2. Push the temperature control buttons on

the driver’s side to set the preferred

temperature.

NOTE:

. To quickly remove ice from the outside

of the windows, push the “

” fan

speed increase button and set it to the

maximum position.

. As soon as possible after the windshield

is cleaned, push the AUTO button to

return to the AUTO mode.

. When the “

” front defroster button

is pushed, the air conditioner will auto-

matically be turned on at outside tem-

peratures above 23°F (-5°C) to defog

the windshield, and the air recirculate

mode will automatically be turned off.

The outside air circulation mode will be

selected to improve the defrosting per-

formance.

Manual operation

The manual mode can be used to control the

heater and air conditioner to your desired

settings.

Fan speed control:

Push the “

” fan speed increase button

to increase the fan speed.

Push the “

” fan speed decrease button to

decrease the fan speed.

Push the AUTO button to change the fan

speed to the automatic mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Air flow control:

Push the “

” manual air flow control

button to change the air flow mode.

: Air flows from the center and side

ventilators.

: Air flows from the center and side

ventilators, and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.

: Air flows from the defroster and foot

outlets.

Temperature control:

Push the “

” temperature control increase

button or the “

” temperature control

decrease button to set the desired tempera-

ture.

You can individually set temperatures for the

driver’s side and front passenger’s side.

Air intake control:

. Push the “

” air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

The indicator light on the “

” air

recirculation button will illuminate.

. Push the “

” air recirculation button

twice to draw outside air into the

passenger compartment. The indicator

light on the “

” air recirculation button

will turn off.

. To control the air intake automatically,

push and hold the “

” air recirculation

button. The indicator lights will flash

twice, and then the air intake will switch

to automatic control.

The air intake mode can also be con-

trolled automatically by touching [Auto

Recirc] (if so equipped). The indicator

light on [Auto Recirc] will illuminate.

“Operations on touch panel screen”

(P.4-38)

Turning the system off

Push the ON/OFF button.

Operations on touch panel screen

Heater and air conditioner can be operated

on the touch panel screen. Push the CLI-

MATE button and switch the lower display

to the climate screen.

For details of the touch panel operation on

the lower display, see the separate INFINITI

InTouch

Owner’s Manual.

WAE0215X

Example

The following control keys are available.

(Availability of the item depends on the

model and specifications.)

Available items:

. “

”

Touch to change the air flow mode.

. “-

”/“ +”

Touch to change the fan speed.

. [DUAL]

Touch to turn the DUAL mode on/off.

(See “DUAL mode setting” (P.4-39).)

. [Steering Heater] (if so equipped)

Touch to turn the steering wheel heater

on/off. (See “Heated steering wheel”

(P.2-47).)

. [A/C]

Touch to turn the air conditioner on/off.

(See “Automatic operation (AUTO)”

(P.4-36).)

. [Auto Recirc] (if so equipped)

Touch to turn the auto-recirculation

mode on/off. (See “Advanced Climate

Control System” (P.4-39).)

. [

]or[ ] (if so equipped)

Touch to turn the seat heater on/off.

(See “Heated seats” (P.2-45).)

DUAL mode setting

Touch [DUAL] to turn on/off the DUAL

mode. When the DUAL mode is set, the

temperature for the driver seat and the front

passenger seat can be adjusted indepen-

dently. When the DUAL mode is on, the

indicator light is on and “DUAL” appears.

Advanced Climate Control System

(if so equipped)

The Advanced Climate Control System

keeps the air inside of the vehicle clean,

using the automatic air circulation control

with the exhaust gas/outside odor detection

sensor and with ion control.

WAE0219X

[Auto Recirc]:

Touch to turn on the automatic air

recirculation mode.

Plasmacluster

icon:

Indicates the Plasmacluster

ion emis-

sion status.

Automatic air recirculation control with the

exhaust gas/outside odor detection sensor:

The Advanced Climate Control system

comes with an exhaust gas detection/out-

side odor sensor. When the automatic air

circulation control is activated, the sensor

detects odors outside the vehicle such as

pulp or chemicals, and exhaust gas such as

gasoline or diesel. When such odors or gases

are detected, the display and the system

automatically change from the fresh air

mode to the recirculation mode.

When the automatic air circulation control

mode is on, for the first 5 minutes, the air

recirculation mode is selected to prevent

dust, dirt and pollen from entering the

vehicle and to clean the air inside of the

vehicle.

After 5 minutes, the sensor detects exhaust

gas and automatically alternates between

the air recirculation mode and the fresh air

mode.

NOTE:

The automatic air recirculation mode can be

activated under the following conditions.

. The air flow control is not in the wind-

shield defrosting mode (the indicator

light on

is turned off).

. The outside temperature is approxi-

mately 32 °F (0 °C) or above.

Ion control:

The Advanced Climate Control system unit

generates highly concentrated Plasmaclus-

ter

ions into the air blown from the

ventilators to reduce odor absorbed into

the interior trim and to suppress airborne

bacteria. The high-density Plasmacluster

ions also have a proven skin moisture

preserving effect.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The Plasmacluster

icon on the climate

screen indicates the status of the Plas-

macluster

ion emission from the system

and changes with the amount of the air flow.

CLIMATE SETTINGS

Climate settings can be changed on the

climate settings screen on the lower display.

1. Push the MENU button and touch [Set-

tings] on the lower display.

2. Touch [Others].

3. Touch [Climate].

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software versions.

Available settings:

. Left/Right Seat Heater

The driver’s seat and front passenger

seat temperature settings for the auto-

matic seat heating control mode can be

changed separately. (See “Heated seats”

(P.2-45).)

. Steering Wheel Heater

The steering wheel heater can be turned

on/off. (See “Heated steering wheel”

(P.2-47).)

. Auto Steering Wheel Heater

The automatic control mode for the

steering wheel heater can be turned

on/off. When this item is turned on, the

steering wheel heater will turn on auto-

matically if the temperature inside the

vehicle compartment is low at the time

when the ignition switch is turned on.

Regardless of the temperature, the

steering wheel heating will turn off after

30 minutes.

If the steering wheel heater is manually

turned on/off by touching [Steering

Wheel Heater] on the climate settings

screen, the automatic steering wheel

heating control mode will be canceled

and the system will return to the manual

mode.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steer-

ing wheel is above the temperature at

which the system is designed to operate,

the system will not heat the steering

wheel. This is not a malfunction.

5GC0006X

JVH0520X

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow

from the foot outlets may not operate.

However, this is not a malfunction. After

the coolant temperature warms up, the air

flow from the foot outlets will operate

normally.

The sensors

and , located on the

instrument panel, help maintain a constant

temperature. Do not put anything on or

around the sensors.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

WARNING

The air conditioner contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid personal

injury, any air conditioner service should

be done only by an experienced techni-

cian with the proper equipment.

The air conditioner system in your vehicle is

charged with a refrigerant designed with the

environment in mind.

This refrigerant will not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. However, it may contribute in a

small part to global warming.

Special charging equipment and lubricant

are required when servicing your vehicle’s air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or

lubricants will cause severe damage to the

air conditioner system. (See “Air conditioning

system refrigerant and lubricant recommen-

dations” (P.10-7).)

An INFINITI retailer will be able to service

your environmentally friendly air conditioner

system.

In-cabin microfilter

With Advanced Climate Control system:

The air conditioning system is equipped with

a natural grape seed polyphenol filter which

collects and neutralizes dirt, pollen, dust, etc.

To make sure that the air conditioner heats,

defogs and ventilates efficiently, replace the

filter in accordance with the specified main-

tenance intervals listed in the separate

maintenance booklet. To replace the filter,

contact an INFINITI retailer.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow

decreases significantly or if windows fog up

easily when operating the heater or air

conditioner.

Without Advanced Climate Control system:

The air conditioning system is equipped with

an in-cabin microfilter that collects dirt,

pollen, dust, etc.

To make sure that the air conditioner heats,

defogs and ventilates efficiently, replace the

filter in accordance with the specified main-

tenance schedule in the separate mainte-

nance booklet. To replace the filter, contact

an INFINITI retailer.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow

decreases significantly or if windows fog up

easily when operating the heater or air

conditioner.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WINDOW ANTENNA

The antenna pattern is printed inside the

rear window.

CAUTION

. Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any

metal parts to it. This may cause poor

reception or noise.

. When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with

a dampened soft cloth.

JVH0641X

SATELLITE ANTENNA

There is a satellite antenna on the rear part

of the vehicle roof.

A buildup of ice on the satellite radio

antenna can affect satellite radio perfor-

mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite

radio reception.

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in

your vehicle, be sure to observe the follow-

ing cautions, otherwise the new equipment

may adversely affect the electronic control

modules and electronic control system har-

ness.

WARNING

. A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit

the use of cellular phones while

driving.

. If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands-free

cellular phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended.

Exercise extreme caution at all times

so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

. If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

ANTENNA CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

CAUTION

. Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic control

modules.

. Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic

control system harness. Do not route

the antenna wire next to any harness.

. Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the manu-

facturer.

. Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

. For details, it is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...................... 5-4

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .............................. 5-4

Three-way catalyst ..................................................... 5-5

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........... 5-5

Avoiding collision and rollover ................................. 5-9

Off-road recovery ....................................................... 5-9

Rapid air pressure loss ............................................. 5-10

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ..................... 5-10

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving

safety precautions (AWD models) ....................... 5-11

Push-button ignition switch ........................................ 5-11

Operating range for engine start function ........ 5-12

Push-button ignition switch operation ............... 5-12

Push-button ignition switch positions ................ 5-13

Emergency engine shut off .................................... 5-13

Intelligent Key battery discharge .......................... 5-14

Before starting the engine ........................................... 5-14

Starting the engine ......................................................... 5-15

Remote engine start (if so equipped) .................. 5-15

Driving the vehicle .......................................................... 5-16

Automatic Transmission (AT) ................................ 5-16

Parking brake .................................................................. 5-20

INFINITI Drive Mode Selector .................................... 5-21

STANDARD mode .................................................... 5-22

SPORT+ mode (if so equipped) ............................. 5-22

SPORT mode ............................................................ 5-22

SNOW mode ............................................................ 5-22

ECO mode ................................................................. 5-22

PERSONAL mode ................................................... 5-24

Active Lane Control (if so equipped) ........................ 5-25

Active Lane Control operation ............................ 5-27

Turning Active Lane Control ON/OFF ............ 5-28

How to enable/disable Active

Lane Control ............................................................. 5-29

Active Lane Control limitations ......................... 5-30

System temporarily unavailable .......................... 5-31

System malfunction ................................................ 5-31

System maintenance .............................................. 5-32

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system (if

so equipped) .................................................................... 5-33

LDW system operation ......................................... 5-34

How to enable/disable the LDW system ........ 5-35

LDW system limitations ........................................ 5-35

System temporarily unavailable .......................... 5-36

System malfunction ................................................ 5-36

System maintenance .............................................. 5-37

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) ........... 5-37

BSW system operation .......................................... 5-39

How to enable/disable the BSW system ........ 5-40

BSW system limitations ....................................... 5-40

BSW driving situations ............................................ 5-41

System temporarily unavailable ........................... 5-44

System malfunction ................................................. 5-44

System maintenance ............................................... 5-44

Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI) (if so equipped) ...... 5-45

BSI system operation ............................................... 5-47

Turning the BSI system ON/OFF ....................... 5-48

How to enable/disable the BSI system .............. 5-49

BSI system limitations ............................................. 5-49

BSI driving situations ............................................... 5-51

System temporarily unavailable ............................ 5-55

System malfunction .................................................. 5-56

System maintenance ................................................ 5-56

Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI) (if

so equipped) ..................................................................... 5-57

BCI system operation .............................................. 5-59

Turning the BCI system ON/OFF ........................ 5-62

BCI system limitations ............................................. 5-63

System temporarily unavailable ............................ 5-64

System malfunction .................................................. 5-65

System maintenance ................................................ 5-65

Cruise control (if so equipped) .................................... 5-66

Precautions on cruise control ................................ 5-66

Cruise control operations ....................................... 5-67

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) ..... 5-68

How to select the cruise control mode ............... 5-70

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ......... 5-71

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode .............................................................. 5-85

Distance Control Assist (DCA) (if so equipped) ..... 5-89

DCA system operation .......................................... 5-91

Turning the DCA system ON/OFF .................... 5-94

How to enable/disable the DCA system ......... 5-95

DCA system display and indicators ................... 5-95

DCA system limitations ......................................... 5-96

System temporarily unavailable .......................... 5-98

System malfunction ................................................ 5-99

System maintenance .............................................. 5-99

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with

pedestrian detection system (if so equipped) ..... 5-100

FEB with pedestrian detection

system operation .................................................. 5-101

Turning the FEB with pedestrian detection

system ON/OFF .................................................. 5-103

FEB with pedestrian detection

system limitations ................................................ 5-104

System temporarily unavailable ....................... 5-107

System malfunction ............................................. 5-108

System maintenance ........................................... 5-109

Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)

(if so equipped) ............................................................ 5-110

PFCW system operation ..................................... 5-112

Turning the PFCW system ON/OFF .............. 5-113

PFCW system limitations ................................... 5-115

System temporarily unavailable ........................ 5-117

System malfunction .............................................. 5-118

System maintenance ............................................ 5-118

Break-in schedule ......................................................... 5-119

Fuel Efficient Driving Tips .......................................... 5-119

Increasing fuel economy ............................................ 5-120

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if

so equipped) ................................................................... 5-121

Parking/parking on hills .............................................. 5-123

Power steering ............................................................. 5-124

Electric power steering type ............................... 5-124

Direct Adaptive Steering type ............................ 5-124

Brake system .................................................................. 5-126

Braking precautions ................................................ 5-126

Parking brake break-in .......................................... 5-127

Brake assist .................................................................... 5-127

Brake assist ............................................................... 5-127

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......................... 5-127

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ................. 5-129

Brake force distribution ......................................... 5-129

Active trace control ..................................................... 5-130

Hill Start Assist system ............................................... 5-132

Chassis control .............................................................. 5-132

Sonar system (if so equipped) .................................. 5-133

Sonar system settings ........................................ 5-134

Sonar indicator ....................................................... 5-135

Cold weather driving ................................................... 5-135

Freeing a frozen door lock ................................. 5-135

Antifreeze ................................................................ 5-135

Battery ..................................................................... 5-135

Draining of coolant water .................................. 5-135

Tire equipment ....................................................... 5-135

Special winter equipment .................................. 5-136

Driving on snow or ice ........................................ 5-136

Engine block heater (if so equipped) .............. 5-136

Active noise cancellation/Active

sound enhancement .................................................... 5-137

Active noise cancellation .................................... 5-138

Active sound enhancement ............................... 5-138

5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING

. Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could accidentally injure themselves

or others through inadvertent opera-

tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

. Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

rear seatback and trunk lid securely

latched when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

. Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

. Do not park the vehicle with the

engine running for any extended

length of time.

. Keep the trunk lid closed while driv-

ing, otherwise exhaust gases could be

drawn into the passenger compart-

ment. If you must drive with the

trunk lid open, follow these precau-

tions:

1) Open all the windows.

2) Set the air recirculation to off and

the fan control to high to circulate

the air.

. If electrical wiring or other cable

connections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the trunk lid or

the body, follow the manufacturer’s

recommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

. The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

— The vehicle is raised for service.

— You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

— You notice a change in the sound

of the exhaust system.

— You have had an accident invol-

ving damage to the exhaust sys-

tem, underbody, or rear of the

vehicle.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission con-

trol device installed in the exhaust system.

Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are

burned at high temperatures to help reduce

pollutants.

WARNING

. The exhaust gas and the exhaust

system are very hot. Keep people,

animals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system compo-

nents.

. Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

. Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline seriously reduce

the three-way catalyst’s ability to

help reduce exhaust pollutants.

. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if

noticeable loss of performance or

other unusual operating conditions

are detected. Have the vehicle in-

spected promptly. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

. Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damaging

the three-way catalyst.

. Do not race the engine while warming

it up.

. Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a Tire Pressure Mon-

itoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low

tire pressure telltale when one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure

telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and

inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

For models with run-flat tires, if the vehicle

is being driven with one or more flat tires,

the low tire pressure warning light will

illuminate continuously and a chime will

sound for 10 seconds. The flat tire warning

will also appear in the vehicle information

display. The chime will only sound at the first

indication of a flat tire, and the warning light

will illuminate continuously. When the flat

tire warning is activated, it is recommended

you have the system reset and the tire

checked and replaced if necessary by an

INFINITI retailer. Even if the tire is inflated

to the specified COLD tire pressure, the

warning light will continue to illuminate until

the system is reset by an INFINITI retailer.

Your vehicle can be driven for a limited time

on a flat tire. See “Run-flat tires” (P.8-31).

Starting and driving 5-5

5-6 Starting and driving

Please note that the TPMS is not a sub-

stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is

the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct

tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumination of

the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illumi-

nated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists. When the malfunction

indicator is illuminated, the system may not

be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur

for a variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alternate tires

or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after

replacing one or more tires or wheels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

Additional information

. Since the spare tire (if so equipped) is not

equipped with the TPMS, the TPMS

does not monitor the tire pressure of

the spare tire.

. The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16

MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure

(for example a flat tire while driving).

. The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is

inflated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”

warning appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low tire

pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure

Low - Add Air” warning turns off when

the low tire pressure warning light turns

off.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”

warning does not appear if the low tire

pressure warning light illuminates to

indicate a TPMS malfunction.

. The “Flat Tire - Visit dealer” warning (if

so equipped) appears in the vehicle

information display when the low tire

pressure warning light is illuminated and

one or more flat tires are detected.

. Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s opera-

tion and the outside temperature. Do not

reduce the tire pressure after driving

because the tire pressure rises after

driving. Low outside temperature can

lower the temperature of the air inside

the tire which can cause a lower tire

inflation pressure. This may cause the

low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates in

low ambient temperature, check the tire

pressure for all four tires.

. You can also check the pressure of all

tires (except the spare tire) in the vehicle

information display. (See “Vehicle infor-

mation display” (P.2-20).)

. After the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, it may take a period of time

for the tire pressure to be displayed while

the vehicle is driven. Depending on the

radio wave circumstance, tire pressure

may not correctly be displayed.

For additional information, see “Low tire

pressure warning light” (P.2-14) and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-

3).

WARNING

. Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment man-

ufacturer for the possible influences

before use.

. If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and

increase the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and

could result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low tire

pressure warning light OFF. If the

light still illuminates while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a

tire may be flat or the TPMS may be

malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire (if so

equipped) or repair it with the emer-

gency tire puncture repair kit (if so

equipped) as soon as possible. If no

tire is flat and all tires are properly

inflated, it is recommended you con-

sult an INFINITI retailer.

. For models with run-flat tires,

although you can continue driving

with a punctured run-flat tire, re-

member that vehicle handling stabi-

lity is reduced, which could lead to an

accident and personal injury. Also,

driving a long distance at high speeds

may damage the tires.

— Do not drive at speeds above 50

MPH (80 km/h) and do not drive

more than approximately 93 miles

(150 km) with a punctured run-

flat tire. The actual distance the

vehicle can be driven on a flat tire

depends on outside temperature,

vehicle load, road conditions and

other factors.

— If you detect any unusual sounds

or vibrations while driving with a

punctured run-flat tire, pull off

the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble. The tire may be seriously

damaged and need to be replaced.

. Since the spare tire is not equipped

with the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced, the

TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash

for approximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute. Have

your tires replaced and/or TPMS

system reset as soon as possible. It

is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for these services.

. Replacing tires with those not origin-

ally specified by INFINITI could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors (for models not equipped

with the emergency tire puncture

repair kit).

. INFINITI recommends using only

Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer

as soon as possible after using tire

repair sealant (for models equipped

with the emergency tire puncture

repair kit).

Starting and driving 5-7

5-8 Starting and driving

CAUTION

. The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried in

snow.

. Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the

windows. This may cause poor recep-

tion of the signals from the tire

pressure sensors, and the TPMS will

not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of the

TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. Some examples

are:

. Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

. If a transmitter set to similar frequencies

is being used in or near the vehicle.

. If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near

the vehicle.

Low tire pressure warning light may illumi-

nate in the following cases.

. If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel

and tire without TPMS.

. If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID

has not been registered.

. If the wheel is not originally specified by

INFINITI.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, include interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator

When adding air to an under-inflated tire,

the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator

provides visual and audible signals outside

the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the

shift lever in the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position. Do not start the engine.

Operation:

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-

tors will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is

reached, the horn beeps once and the

hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

. If the tire is over-inflated more than

approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators flash 3

times. To correct the pressure, push the

core of the valve stem on the tire briefly

to release pressure. When the pressure

reaches the designated pressure, the

horn beeps once.

. If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds after

starting to inflate the tire, it indicates

that the Tire Inflation Indicator is not

operating.

. The TPMS will not activate the Tire

Inflation Indicator under the following

conditions:

— If there is interference from an ex-

ternal device or transmitter

— The air pressure from the inflation

device such as those using a power

socket is not sufficient to inflate the

tire

— If an electrical equipment is being used

in or near the vehicle

— There is a malfunction in the TPMS

system

— There is a malfunction in the horn or

hazard indicators

. If the Tire Inflation Indicator does not

operate due to TPMS interference, move

the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or

forward and try again.

If the Tire Inflation Indicator is not working,

use a tire pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss of

control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive

speed, high speed cornering, or sudden

steering maneuvers, because these driving

practices could cause you to lose control of

your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of

control could result in a collision with other

vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to

rollover, particularly if the loss of control

causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be

attentive at all times, and avoid driving when

tired. Never drive when under the influence

of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or

over-the-counter drugs which may cause

drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as

outlined in the “Seat belts” (P.1-11) of this

manual, and also instruct your passengers to

do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a seat

belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

If driving the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface.

Maintain control of the vehicle by following

the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the

conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold

a straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while the

vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt

to drive the vehicle back onto the road

surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires return

to the road surface. When all tires are on

the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay

in the appropriate driving lane.

Starting and driving 5-9

5-10 Starting and driving

If you decide that it is not safe to

return the vehicle to the road surface

based on vehicle, road or traffic

conditions, gradually slow the vehicle

to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by driving

on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the

handling and stability of the vehicle, espe-

cially at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspect the tires for wear and

damage. See “Wheels and tires” (P.8-25) of

this manual.

If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-

out” while driving maintain control of the

vehicle by following the procedure below.

Please note that this procedure is only a

general guide. The vehicle must be driven as

appropriate based on the conditions of the

vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

. The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

. Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

. Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

. Do not rapidly turn the steering

wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold

a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-

ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

either contact a roadside emergency

service to change the tire or see “Jacking

up the vehicle and replacing tires” (P.8-

37) of this Owner’s Manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS

AND DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgement. Driving

after drinking alcohol increases the like-

lihood of being involved in an accident

injuring yourself and others. Addition-

ally, if you are injured in an accident,

alcohol can increase the severity of the

injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. How-

ever, you must choose not to drive under the

influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of

people are injured or killed in alcohol-related

accidents. Although the local laws vary on

what is considered to be legally intoxicated,

the fact is that alcohol affects all people

differently and most people underestimate

the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-

counter, prescription, and illegal drugs).

Don’t drive if your ability to operate your

vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some

other physical condition.

INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL

DRIVE (AWD) DRIVING SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS (AWD models)

WARNING

. Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with

Intelligent AWD engaged. Accelerat-

ing quickly, sharp steering maneuvers

or sudden braking may cause loss of

control.

. Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), and tread pattern

on all four wheels. Install tire chains

on the rear wheels when driving on

slippery roads and drive carefully.

. This vehicle is not designed for off-

road (rough road) use. Do not drive

on sandy or muddy roads that tires

may get stuck in.

. For AWD equipped vehicles, do not

attempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position

with the engine running. Doing so

may result in drivetrain damage or

unexpected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

. Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-

namometer (such as the dynam-

ometers used by some states for

emissions testing), or similar equip-

ment even if the other two wheels are

raised off the ground. Make sure you

inform test facility personnel that

your vehicle is equipped with AWD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or

personal injury.

. When a wheel is off the ground due

to an unlevel surface, do not spin the

wheel excessively.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except in

an emergency. (The engine will stop

when the ignition switch is pushed 3

consecutive times or the ignition switch

is pushed and held for more than 2

seconds.) If the engine stops while the

vehicle is being driven, this could lead to

a crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button ignition

switch, be sure to move the shift lever to the

P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-11

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

5-12 Starting and driving

SSD0872

OPERATING RANGE FOR EN-

GINE START FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key can only be used for

starting the engine when the Intelligent Key

is within the specified operating range

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are pre-

sent near the operating location, the Intelli-

gent Key system’s operating range becomes

narrower and may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even some-

one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,

to push the ignition switch to start the

engine.

. The trunk area is not included in the

operating range but the Intelligent Key

may function.

. If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, inside

the glove box or door pocket, the

Intelligent Key may not function.

. If the Intelligent Key is placed near the

door or window outside the vehicle, the

Intelligent Key may function.

JVS0241X

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION

SWITCH OPERATION

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal, the ignition

switch position will change as follows:

. Push center once to change to ACC.

. Push center two times to change to ON.

. Push center three times to change to

OFF. (No position illuminates.)

. Push center four times to return to ACC.

. Open or close any door to return to

LOCK during the OFF position.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot be

turned from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation

are displayed in the vehicle information

display between the speedometer and tach-

ometer. (See “Vehicle information display”

(P.2-20).)

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch position cannot be switched

to LOCK until the shift lever is moved to the

P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed

toward the LOCK position, proceed as

follows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position. The ignition switch position

indicator will not illuminate.

3. Open the door. The ignition switch will

change to the LOCK position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in the

ON position and the brake pedal is de-

pressed.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION

SWITCH POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it

is pushed to the ACC position while carrying

the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio, when the engine is not

running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system

and electrical accessories.

OFF

The engine can be turned off in this position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch cannot be switched to the

LOCK position until the shift lever is moved

to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-

button ignition switch in ACC or ON

positions when the engine is not running

for an extended period. This can dis-

charge the battery.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

. Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times in less than

1.5 seconds, or

. Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

Starting and driving 5-13

5-14 Starting and driving

WAF0237X

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-

CHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is

discharged, or environmental conditions in-

terfere with the Intelligent Key operation,

start the engine according to the following

procedure:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the

Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime

will sound.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal within 10 seconds after

the chime sounds. The engine will start.

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition

switch is pushed without depressing the

brake pedal, the ignition switch position will

change to ACC.

NOTE:

. When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position or the engine is

started by the above procedures, the

Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator appears in the vehicle information

display even if the Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunc-

tion. To turn off the Intelligent Key

battery discharge indicator, touch the

ignition switch with the Intelligent Key

again.

. If the Intelligent Key battery discharge

indicator appears, replace the battery as

soon as possible. (See “Intelligent Key

battery replacement” (P.8-19).)

. Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

. Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake fluid and window washer

fluid as frequently as possible, or at least

whenever you refuel.

. Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

. Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

. Lock all doors.

. Position seat and adjust head restraints.

. Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers

to do likewise.

. Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position. (See “Warning lights, in-

dicator lights and audible reminders”

(P.2-12).)

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed not to operate

unless the shift lever is in either of the

above positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position. Firmly depress the brake pedal

and push the ignition switch to start the

engine.

To start the engine immediately, push

and release the ignition switch while

depressing the brake pedal with the

ignition switch in any position.

If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-

starting, depress the accelerator ped-

al a little (approximately 1/3 to the

floor) and while holding, crank the

engine. Release the accelerator pedal

when the engine starts.

If the engine is very hard to start

because it is flooded, depress the

accelerator pedal all the way to the

floor and hold it. Push the ignition

switch to the ON position to start

cranking the engine. After 5 or 6

seconds, stop cranking by pushing

the ignition switch to OFF. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-

erator pedal. Crank the engine with

your foot off the accelerator pedal by

depressing the brake pedal and push-

ing the push-button ignition switch to

start the engine. If the engine starts,

but fails to run, repeat the above

procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, push the ignition switch to

OFF and wait 10 seconds before crank-

ing again, otherwise the starter could be

damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at

moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather. In cold

weather, keep the engine running for a

minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shut-

ting it off. Starting and stopping the

engine over a short period of time may

make the vehicle more difficult to start.

When racing the engine up to 4,500 rpm

or more under no load condition, the

engine will enter the fuel cut mode.

5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever to

the P (Park) position and push the

ignition switch to the OFF position.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electro-

nic accessories that consume battery

power when the engine is not running

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

Vehicles started with the remote engine

start function require the ignition switch to

be placed in the ON position before the shift

lever can be moved from the P (Park)

position. To place the ignition switch in the

ON position, perform the following steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on

you.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON

position.

Starting and driving 5-15

STARTING THE ENGINE

5-16 Starting and driving

For additional information about the remote

engine start function, see “Remote engine

start” (P.3-19).

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

(AT)

The Automatic Transmission (AT) in your

vehicle is electronically controlled by a

transmission control module to produce

maximum efficiency and smooth operation.

Shown on the following pages are the

recommended operating procedures for this

transmission. Follow these procedures for

maximum vehicle performance and driving

enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal and push the shift lever

button before shifting the shift lever to the R

(Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual

shift mode position. Be sure the vehicle is

fully stopped before attempting to shift the

shift lever.

This Automatic Transmission (AT) model is

designed so that the foot brake pedal must

be depressed before shifting from P (Park)

to any drive position while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P

(Park) position and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition switch is placed

in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

push the shift lever button to shift into a

driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot

brake, then gradually start the vehicle in

motion.

WARNING

. Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or

manual shift mode. Always depress

the brake pedal until shifting is

completed. Failure to do so could

cause you to lose control and have

an accident.

. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

. Never shift to either P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is

moving reversing. This could cause an

accident or damage the transmission.

. Do not downshift abruptly on slip-

pery roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

CAUTION

. To avoid possible damage to your

vehicle; when stopping the vehicle on

an uphill grade, do not hold the

vehicle by depressing the accelerator

pedal. The foot brake should be used

for this purpose.

. Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while

driving. Coasting with the transmis-

sion in the N (Neutral) position may

cause serious damage to the trans-

mission.

JVS0186X

Shift lever

To move the shift lever,

: Push the button while depressing the

brake pedal,

: Push the button,

: Just move the shift lever.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal and shift the shift lever from P

(Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive)

or Manual shift mode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R

(Reverse). All other positions can be selected

without pushing the button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever

is in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause the

vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal

injury or property damage.

CAUTION

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped and the transmission is in the

P (Park) position.

P (Park) position:

Use this position when the vehicle is parked

or when starting the engine. Make sure the

vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the shift lever

button pushed in to move the shift lever

from the N (Neutral) position or any drive

position to the P (Park) position. Apply the

parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply

the parking brake first, then move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-17

5-18 Starting and driving

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be sure

the vehicle is completely stopped before

selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the shift lever

button pushed in to move the shift lever

from the P (Park) position, the N (Neutral)

position or any drive position to the R

(Reverse) position.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position.

You may shift to the N (Neutral) position and

restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is

moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

JVS0903X

Paddle shifters (if so equipped)

Manual shift mode

When the shift lever is in the manual shift

gate, the transmission is ready for the

manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be

selected manually by moving the shift lever

up or down, or pulling the right-side or left-

side paddle shifter (if so equipped).

When shifting up, move the shift lever to the

+ (up) side or pull the right-side paddle

shifter (+)

(if so equipped). The transmis-

sion shifts to the higher range.

When shifting down, move the shift lever to

the − (down) side or pull the left-side paddle

shifter (−)

(if so equipped). The transmis-

sion shifts to the lower range.

When canceling the manual shift mode,

return the shift lever to the D (Drive)

position. The transmission returns to the

normal driving mode.

When you pull the paddle shifter (if so

equipped) while in the D (Drive) position,

the transmission will shift to the upper or

lower range temporarily. The transmission

will automatically return to the D (Drive)

position after a short period of time. If you

want to return to the D (Drive) position

manually, pull and hold the paddle shifter for

about 1.5 seconds.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed in the vehicle information display.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

(7th):

Use this position for all normal forward

driving at highway speeds.

(6th) and 5

(5th):

Use these positions when driving up long

slopes, or for engine braking when driving

down long slopes.

(4th), 3

(3rd) and 2

(2nd):

Use these positions for hill climbing or engine

braking on downhill grades.

(1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,

or for maximum engine braking on steep

downhill grades.

. Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than

7th gear. This reduces fuel economy.

. Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same

side twice will shift the ranges in succes-

sion.

. In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear

or may automatically shift to the other

gear. This helps maintain driving per-

formance and reduces the chance of

vehicle damage or loss of control.

. When the transmission does not shift to

the selected gear, the Automatic Trans-

mission (AT) position indicator (in the

vehicle information display) will blink

and the buzzer will sound.

. In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down to 1st

gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.

When accelerating again, it is necessary

to shift up to the desired range.

Accelerator downshift — In D (Drive)

position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the

transmission down into the lower gear,

depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, note

that the transmission will be locked in any of

the forward gears according to the condi-

tion.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. This will occur

even if all electrical circuits are functioning

properly. In this case, push the ignition

switch to the OFF position and wait for 3

seconds. Then push the ignition switch back

to the ON position. The vehicle should

return to its normal operating condition. If

it does not return to its normal operating

condition, have the transmission checked

and repaired, if necessary. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

JVS0188X

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,

the shift lever may not be moved from the P

(Park) position even with the brake pedal

depressed and the shift lever button pushed.

To move the shift lever, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock cover

using a

suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock

using

mechanical key as illustrated.

Starting and driving 5-19

5-20 Starting and driving

5. Push the shift lever button and move

the shift lever to N (Neutral) position

while holding down the shift lock.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),

have the automatic transmission system

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

Adaptive Shift Control (ASC)

The adaptive shift control system automati-

cally operates when the transmission is in

the D (Drive) position and selects an appro-

priate gear depending on the road conditions

such as uphill, downhill or curving roads.

Control on uphill and curving roads:

A low gear is maintained that suits the

degree of the slope or curve to allow smooth

driving with a small number of shifts.

Control on downhill roads:

The adaptive shift control system shifts to a

low gear that suits the degree of the slope,

and uses the engine braking to reduce the

number of times that the brake must be

used.

Control on winding roads:

A low gear is maintained on continuous

curves that involve repeated acceleration

and deceleration, so that smooth accelera-

tion is available instantly when the accel-

erator pedal is depressed.

NOTE:

. Adaptive shift control may not operate

when the transmission oil temperature

is low immediately after the start of

driving or when it is very hot.

. During some driving situations, hard

braking for example, the adaptive shift

control may automatically operate. The

transmission may automatically shift to

a lower gear for engine braking. This

increases engine speed but not vehicle

speed. Vehicle speed is controlled by the

accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in

the Adaptive shift control mode.

. When the adaptive shift control oper-

ates, the transmission sometimes main-

tains a lower gear for a longer period of

time than when adaptive shift control is

not operating. Engine speed will be

higher for a specific vehicle speed while

ASC system is operating than when ASC

is not operating.

WARNING

. Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to do

so can cause brake failure and lead to

an accident.

. Do not release the parking brake

from outside the vehicle.

. Do not use the gear shift in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully en-

gaged.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly

become high enough to cause a sig-

nificant risk of injury or death to

people and pets.

PARKING BRAKE

SPA2331

To apply: Fully depress the parking brake

pedal

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake

2. Depress the parking brake pedal

and

the parking brake will be released.

3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

JVS0189X

INFINITI Drive Mode Selector

JVS0191M

Multiple driving modes can be selected by

using the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector

(PERSONAL, SPORT+ (if so equipped),

SPORT, STANDARD, ECO and SNOW).

NOTE:

When the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector

selects a mode, the mode may not switch

immediately. This is not a malfunction.

The current mode is displayed in the vehicle

information display.

To change the mode, push the INFINITI

Drive Mode Selector up or down. The mode

list will appear on the upper display and you

can select the mode.

PERSONAL  SPORT+ (if so equipped) 

SPORT  STANDARD  ECO  SNOW

NOTE:

The mode list will be turned off in approxi-

mately 5 seconds after the mode is selected.

If the driving mode cannot be switched using

the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector when the

ignition switch is in the ON position, have

the system checked. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-21

INFINITI DRIVE MODE SELECTOR

5-22 Starting and driving

STANDARD MODE

Allows for optimum driving according to the

driving conditions.

This mode will be selected first each time the

engine is started.

SPORT+ MODE (if so equipped)

In addition to the characteristics of the

SPORT mode, this mode heightens steering

response and changes the setting of VDC

(Vehicle Dynamic Control) for a more sporty

driving experience.

NOTE:

. VDC operation is reduced when the

INFINITI Drive Mode Selector is used

to select the SPORT+ mode. The VDC

system may not operate in the same

circumstances when compared to op-

eration in the standard mode. To help

prevent accidents drive carefully, avoid

careless or dangerous driving techniques

and be especially careful when driving

and cornering on slippery surfaces.

. In the SPORT+ mode, fuel economy may

be reduced.

SPORT MODE

. Adjusts the engine and transmission

points for a higher response.

. The setting of the steering system is

adjusted to provide a quick steering

response and a heavy steering effort.

. The setting of the suspension system is

adjusted to increase the damping force

(if so equipped).

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be

reduced.

SNOW MODE

Changes the engine characteristics to aid

driving on slippery roads.

ECO MODE

Assists the driver’s eco-driving. The engine

and transmission points are adjusted for

improved fuel economy, providing such a

driving features as smooth starting or con-

stant cruising.

NOTE:

Selecting the ECO mode will not necessarily

improve fuel economy as many driving

factors influence its effectiveness.

Operation

Select the ECO mode using the INFINITI

Drive Mode Selector. The ECO drive indica-

tor light on the instrument panel illuminates.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed

within the range of economy drive, the ECO

drive indicator light illuminates in green.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed

above the range of economy drive, the ECO

drive indicator light turns off. For ECO pedal

system equipped models, see “ECO pedal

system” (P.5-22).

The ECO drive indicator light will not

illuminate in the following cases:

. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

. When the vehicle speed is below 2 MPH

(3.2 km/h) or over 90 MPH (144 km/h).

. When the cruise control (if so equipped)

or the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system (if so equipped) is operated.

ECO pedal system (if so equipped)

The ECO pedal system helps assist the driver

to improve fuel economy by increasing the

reaction force of the accelerator pedal.

When the ECO drive indicator light is

blinking or remains off, the ECO pedal

system increases the reaction force of the

accelerator pedal.

JVS0934X

When the ECO drive indicator illuminates in

green, the accelerator reaction force is

normal. When the ECO drive indicator light

is blinking or remains off, the ECO pedal

system increases the reaction force of the

accelerator pedal.

The ECO pedal system may not vary accel-

erator reaction force under the following

conditions:

. When the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)

or R (Reverse) position.

. When Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) is

being operated.

If the ECO pedal system malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically. The ECO pedal system

will not vary the reaction force of the

accelerator pedal.

When the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector is

rotated from the ECO mode to another

mode (STANDARD, SPORT+ (if so

equipped), SPORT, SNOW or PERSONAL)

while the ECO pedal system is operating, the

ECO pedal system continues to operate until

the accelerator pedal is released.

If the accelerator pedal is depressed quickly,

the ECO pedal system will not increase the

reaction force of the acceleration pedal. The

ECO pedal system is not designed to prevent

the vehicle from accelerating.

Adjusting the ECO pedal system reaction

force:

The ECO pedal system reaction force can be

adjusted. The reaction force setting will be

maintained until the setting is changed even

if the engine is turned off.

JVS0246X

Setting ECO pedal reaction force:

1. Push the MENU button

and touch

[Settings] on the lower display.

2. Touch [Drive Mode Enhancement].

3. Touch [ECO Pedal].

4. To set the reaction force of the ECO

pedal system, touch [Standard] or [Soft].

5. To turn off the ECO pedal system, touch

[Off].

When the ECO pedal system is turned off,

the accelerator will operate normally.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software versions.

Starting and driving 5-23

5-24 Starting and driving

PERSONAL MODE

When the PERSONAL mode is selected, the

following functions can be adjusted indivi-

dually.

. Engine/Transmission

. Steering

. Suspension (if so equipped)

. Active Trace Control

JVS0246X

How to set the PERSONAL mode

Perform the following steps to set the

PERSONAL mode.

1. Push the MENU button

and touch

[Drive Mode Selector] on the lower

display.

2. Touch [Engine/Transmission], [Steer-

ing], [Suspension] (if so equipped) or

[Active Trace Control] and select each

item. (See “Engine/Transmission”,

“Steering”, “Suspension” and “Active

Trace Control” about the feature of each

item.)

3. Touch [Back] or [Home] to finish the

PERSONAL mode setting.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software version.

Engine/Transmission:

“Engine/Transmission” can be set to [Sport],

[Eco], [Standard] or [Snow].

Steering (models with Direct Adaptive

Steering):

Multiple combinations of steering mode and

steering response can be set.

Mode Response

Sport+ (if so equipped)

Dynamic+

Dynamic

Default

Sport

Dynamic+

Dynamic

Default

Standard Default

Steering (models without Direct Adaptive

Steering):

“Steering” can be set to [Sport] or [Stan-

dard].

Suspension (if so equipped):

“Suspension” can be set to [Sport] or

[Standard].

Active Trace Control:

“Active Trace Control” can be set to ON

(enabled) or OFF (disabled).

For details about the Active Trace Control,

see “Active trace control” (P.5-130).

Reset Drive Mode Settings to Default:

Touch [Reset Drive Mode Settings to De-

fault] and touch [OK] to restore all the

PERSONAL mode settings to default.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of Active

Lane Control could result in serious

injury or death.

. Active Lane Control will not always

steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane.

It is not designed to prevent loss of

control. It is the driver’s responsibility

to stay alert, drive safely, keep the

vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in

control of vehicle at all times.

Active Lane Control enables the driver to

make fewer steering corrections on free-

ways.

Starting and driving 5-25

ACTIVE LANE CONTROL (if so equipped)

5-26 Starting and driving

WAF0324X

/OK switch

Vehicle information display

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Upper display

Lower display

JVS0823X

JVS0251X

ACTIVE LANE CONTROL OP-

ERATION

Active Lane Control slightly corrects front

tire angles and steering wheel torque to help

reduce the difference between the vehicle’s

direction and the lane direction

which is

detected by using the camera unit

located

above the inside mirror.

Active Lane Control operates under the

following conditions:

. When the vehicle is driven at speeds of

approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and

above.

. When Active Lane Control is enabled in

the settings menu on the display.

Starting and driving 5-27

5-28 Starting and driving

WAF0324X

/OK switch

Vehicle information display

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Upper display

Lower display

TURNING ACTIVE LANE CON-

TROL ON/OFF

To turn on Active Lane Control, push the

dynamic driver assistance switch on the

steering wheel after starting the engine.

Push the dynamic driver assistance switch

again to turn off Active Lane Control.

The dynamic driver assistance switch is used

for Active Lane Control, the Blind Spot

Intervention

(BSI) and Distance Control

Assist (DCA) systems. When the dynamic

driver assistance switch is pushed, the BSI

and DCA systems will also turn on or off

simultaneously. These systems can be in-

dividually set to on or off on the lower

display.

JVS0248X

The status of Active Lane Control can be

checked in the chassis control display in the

vehicle information display

. When Active Lane Control is turned on,

the chassis control

is displayed.

. When Active Lane Control is operational

or is operating, the chassis control

displayed.

For setting of the chassis control display, see

INFINITI InTouch

Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE AC-

TIVE LANE CONTROL

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable Active Lane Control. If Type A

setting is not available, perform Type B

setting.

Type A (if so equipped):

1. Push the

/OK switch on the steering

wheel.

2. Touch [TURN ALC ON] or [TURN ALC

OFF] on the upper display to enable or

disable Active Lane Control.

Type B (if so equipped):

1. Push the MENU button and touch

[Driver Assistance] on the lower display.

2. Touch [Lane Assist].

3. Touch [Active Lane Control] to enable or

disable Active Lane Control.

The displayed keys on the display may vary

depending on models, specifications and

software version.

Active Lane Control settings (Type

B only)

Perform the following steps to set Active

Lane Control.

1. Push the MENU button and touch

[Driver Assistance] on the lower display.

Starting and driving 5-29

5-30 Starting and driving

2. Touch [Lane Assist].

3. Enable [Active Lane Control].

4. Touch [Active Lane Control Setting] and

select [Low] or [High] to change the

setting of Active Lane Control.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software version.

ACTIVE LANE CONTROL LIM-

ITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the limitations for

Active Lane Control. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

limitations could result in serious injury

or death.

. Active Lane Control is primarily in-

tended for use on well-developed

freeways or highways. It may not

detect the lane markers for certain

roads, weather or driving conditions.

. Using Active Lane Control under

some conditions of road, lane marker

or weather, or if you attempt to

change lanes without using the lane

change signal could lead to an un-

expected system operation. In such

conditions, you need to correct the

vehicle’s direction with your steering

operation to avoid accidents.

. Active Lane Control will not operate

at speeds below approximately 45

MPH (70 km/h) or if it cannot detect

lane markers.

. Active Lane Control may not operate

properly and should not be used

under the following conditions:

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.).

— When driving on slippery roads,

such as on ice or snow, etc.

— When driving on winding or un-

even roads.

— When there is a lane closure due

to road repairs.

— When driving in a makeshift lane.

— When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

— When driving with a tire that is

not within normal tire conditions

(for example, tire wear, low tire

pressure, installation of spare tire,

tire chains, non-standard wheels).

— When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original steering parts or sus-

pension parts.

. Active Lane Control may or may not

operate properly under the following

conditions:

— On roads where there are multi-

ple parallel lane markers; lane

markers that are faded or not

painted clearly; yellow painted

lane markers; non-standard lane

markers; or lane markers covered

with water, dirt, snow, etc.

— On roads where discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

— On roads where there are sharp

curves.

— On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as sha-

dows, snow, water, wheel ruts,

seams or lines remaining after

road repairs. (Active Lane Control

could detect these items as lane

markers.)

— On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

— When the vehicle’s traveling di-

rection does not align with the

lane marker.

— When traveling close to the ve-

hicle in front of you, which ob-

structs the lane camera unit de-

tection range.

— When rain, snow, dirt or object

adheres to the windshield in front

of the lane camera unit.

— When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens or

if the aiming is not adjusted

properly.

— When strong light enters the lane

camera unit. (For example, the

light directly shines on the front

of the vehicle at sunrise or sun-

set.)

— When a sudden change in bright-

ness occurs. (For example, when

the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel

or under a bridge.)

— When entering or exiting toll-

gates.

— When driving on roads with a

widening or narrowing lane width.

JVS0824X

Vehicle information display

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNA-

VAILABLE

Automatic deactivation

Active Lane Control is not designed to

operate under the following conditions:

. When the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system (except TCS function) or

ABS operates.

. When you operate the lane change signal

and change the traveling lanes in the

direction of the signal. (Active Lane

Control is deactivated for approximately

2 seconds after the lane change signal is

turned off.)

. When the vehicle speed lowers to less

than approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h).

. When the hazard warning flashers are

operated.

After the above conditions have finished and

the operating conditions are satisfied again,

Active Lane Control will resume operation.

Temporary disabled status at high

temperature

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then Ac-

tive Lane Control is turned on, Active Lane

Control may be deactivated automatically.

The high cabin temperature message will

appear in the vehicle information display

Action to take:

When the interior temperature is reduced,

push the dynamic driver assistance switch

again to turn Active Lane Control back on.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If Active Lane Control malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically. The chassis control

warning will appear in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

Starting and driving 5-31

5-32 Starting and driving

Action to take:

If the chassis control warning appears, pull

off the road to a safe location and stop the

vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the

engine. If the chassis control warning con-

tinues to appear, have Active Lane Control

checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

JVS0823X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit for Active Lane

Control is located above the inside mirror. To

keep the proper operation of Active Lane

Control and prevent a system malfunction,

be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

. Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instru-

ment panel. The reflection of sunlight

may adversely affect the camera unit’s

capability of detecting the lane markers.

. Do not strike or damage the areas around

the camera unit. It is recommended you

contact an INFINITI retailer if the cam-

era unit is damaged due to an accident.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the LDW

system could result in serious personal

injury or death.

. The LDW system will not prevent loss

of control. It is the driver’s responsi-

bility to stay alert, drive safely, keep

the vehicle in the traveling lane, and

be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

The LDW system warns the driver with an

indicator in the vehicle information display

and vibrations of the steering wheel that the

vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane.

JVS0823X

The LDW system uses a camera installed

behind the windshield to monitor the lane

markers of your traveling lane.

Starting and driving 5-33

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING

(LDW) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-34 Starting and driving

WAF0265X

Driver assist system lane indicator

(green) (on the vehicle information dis-

play)

Lower display

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION

The LDW system operates above approxi-

mately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and when the

lane markings are clear.

If the vehicle approaches either the left or

the right side of the traveling lane, the driver

assist system lane indicator (orange) in the

vehicle information display will blink and the

steering wheel will vibrate.

NOTE:

The LDW system is not designed to warn

when you operate the lane change signal

and change traveling lanes in the direction

of the signal. (The LDW system will become

operable again approximately 2 seconds

after the lane change signal is turned off.)

JVS0246X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

LDW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the LDW system.

1. Push the MENU button

and touch

[Driver Assistance] on the lower display.

2. Touch [Lane Assist].

3. Touch [Lane Departure Warning] to

enable or disable the system.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software version.

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the LDW system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. The system will not operate at speeds

below 45 MPH (70 km/h) or if it

cannot detect lane markers.

. The camera may not detect lane

markers in the following situations

and the LDW system may not oper-

ate properly.

— On roads where there are multi-

ple parallel lane markers; lane

markers that are faded or not

painted clearly; yellow painted

lane markers; non-standard lane

markers; or lane markers covered

with water, dirt, snow, etc.

— On roads where discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

— On roads where there are sharp

curves.

— On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as sha-

dows, snow, water, wheel ruts,

seams or lines remaining after

road repairs. (The LDW system

could detect these items as lane

markers.)

— On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

— When the vehicle’s traveling di-

rection does not align with the

lane marker.

— When traveling close to the ve-

hicle in front of you, which ob-

structs the lane camera unit

detection range.

— When rain, snow or dirt adheres

to the windshield in front of the

lane camera unit.

— When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens or

if the aiming is not adjusted

properly.

— When strong light enters the lane

camera unit. (For example, the

light directly shines on the front

of the vehicle at sunrise or sun-

set.)

— When a sudden change in bright-

ness occurs. (For example, when

the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel

Starting and driving 5-35

5-36 Starting and driving

or under a bridge.)

JVS0824X

Warnings and indicators (on the vehicle

information display)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNA-

VAILABLE

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then

started, the LDW system may be deacti-

vated automatically. The “high cabin tem-

perature” warning message will appear in

the vehicle information display.

The LDW system is not available until the

conditions no longer exist.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the LDW system will resume automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the LDW system malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically, and the LDW “mal-

function” message will appear in the vehicle

information display.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the

engine off and restart the engine. If the

“malfunction” message continues to appear,

have the system checked. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

JVS0823X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit for LDW system is

located above the inside mirror. To keep the

proper operation of LDW system and pre-

vent a system malfunction, be sure to

observe the following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

. Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instru-

ment panel. The reflection of sunlight

may adversely affect the camera unit’s

capability of detecting the lane markers.

. Do not strike or damage the areas around

the camera unit. It is recommended you

contact an INFINITI retailer if the cam-

era unit is damaged due to an accident.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the BSW

system could result in serious injury or

death.

. The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedure and is

not designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects. When changing

lanes, always use the side and rear

mirrors and turn and look in the

direction your vehicle will move to

ensure it is safe to change lanes.

Never rely solely on the BSW system.

. There is a limitation to the detection

capability of the radar. Not every

moving object or vehicle will be

detected. Using the BSW system

under some road, ground, lane mar-

ker, traffic or weather conditions

could lead to improper system opera-

tion. Always rely on your own opera-

tion to avoid accidents.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of

other vehicles in adjacent lanes when chan-

ging lanes.

Starting and driving 5-37

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if

so equipped)

5-38 Starting and driving

JVS0863X

The BSW system uses radar sensors

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

SSD1030

Detection zone

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the detec-

tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-

tion zone starts from the outside mirror of

your vehicle and extends approximately 10

ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and

approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

JVS0827X

Side indicator light

Driver assist system blind spot indica-

tor (on the vehicle information display)

Lower display

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approxi-

mately 20 MPH (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the side indicator light

illuminates.

If the turn signal is then activated, the

system chimes (twice) and the side indicator

light flashes. The side indicator light con-

tinues to flash until the detected vehicle

leaves the detection zone.

NOTE:

. The side indicator lights illuminate for a

few seconds when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

. The brightness of the side indicator

lights is adjusted automatically depend-

ing on the brightness of the ambient

light.

. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone

after the driver activates the turn

signal, then only the side indicator light

flashes and no chime sounds. (See “BSW

driving situations” (P.5-41).)

Starting and driving 5-39

5-40 Starting and driving

JVS0246X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSW system.

1. Push the MENU button

and touch

[Driver Assistance] on the lower display.

2. Touch [Blind Spot Assist].

3. Touch [Blind Spot Warning] to enable or

disable the system.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software version.

Setting the side indicator light

brightness

The brightness of the side indicator lights

can be changed using the following steps:

1. Push the MENU button

and touch

[Driver Assistance] on the lower display.

2. Touch [Blind Spot Assist].

3. Touch [Blind Spot Indicator] to select

[Bright], [Standard] or [Dark].

When the brightness setting is changed, the

side indicator lights illuminate for a few

seconds.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software version.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the BSW system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. The BSW system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

. The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when cer-

tain objects are present such as:

— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.

— Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground

clearance vehicles.

— Oncoming vehicles.

— Vehicles remaining in the detec-

tion zone when you accelerate

from a stop.

— A vehicle merging into an adja-

cent lane at a speed approxi-

mately the same as your vehicle.

— A vehicle approaching rapidly

from behind.

— A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

— A vehicle that passes through the

detection zone quickly.

. The radar sensor’s detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane,

the radar sensors may not detect

vehicles in an adjacent lane. When

driving in a narrow lane, the radar

sensors may detect vehicles driving

two lanes away.

. The radar sensors are designed to

ignore most stationary objects, how-

ever objects such as guardrails, walls,

foliage and parked vehicles may oc-

casionally be detected. This is a

normal operation condition.

. The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect

other vehicles:

— Severe weather

— Road spray

— Ice/frost/snow build-up on the

vehicle

— Dirt build-up on the vehicle

. Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install acces-

sories or apply additional paint near

the radar sensors. These conditions

may reduce the ability of the radar to

detect other vehicles.

. Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound,

and it may not be heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

JVS0737X

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

Illustration 1: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone

from behind in an adjacent lane.

Starting and driving 5-41

5-42 Starting and driving

JVS0738X

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn

signal, then the system chimes (twice) and

the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

. The radar sensors may not detect vehi-

cles which are approaching rapidly from

behind.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the other

vehicle is detected.

JVS0739X

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if you overtake a vehicle and that

vehicle stays in the detection zone for

approximately 3 seconds.

The radar sensors may not detect slower

moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

JVS0740X

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn

signal while another vehicle is in the detec-

tion zone, then the system chimes (twice)

and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

. When overtaking several vehicles in a

row, the vehicles after the first vehicle

may not be detected if they are travel-

ing close together.

. The radar sensors may not detect slower

moving vehicles if they are passed

quickly.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the other

vehicle is detected.

JVS0741X

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

Entering from the side

Illustration 5: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone

from either side.

JVS0742X

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn

signal, then the system chimes (twice) and

the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

. The radar sensors may not detect a

vehicle which is traveling at about the

same speed as your vehicle when it

enters the detection zone.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the other

vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-43

5-44 Starting and driving

JVS0824X

Vehicle information display

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNA-

VAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the BSW

system will be turned off automatically, a

chime will sound and the “side radar ob-

struction” warning message will appear in

the vehicle information display

The system is not available until the condi-

tions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked

condition may also be caused by objects

such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar

sensors.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

If the “side radar obstruction” warning

message continues to appear, have the

system checked. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

When the BSW system malfunctions, it will

be turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, and the system “malfunction” warn-

ing message with the driver assist system

blind spot indicator (orange) will appear in

the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location and place

the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn

the engine off and restart the engine. If the

system “malfunction” warning message with

the driver assist system blind spot indicator

(orange) continues to be displayed, have the

BSW system checked. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

JVS0863X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors for the BSW

system are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar sensors

clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing

the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent

material), install accessories or apply addi-

tional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

radar sensors.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer if the area around the radar sensors

is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

CAUTION TO USERS

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: SRR3–B

Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada’s

RSS-310. Operation is subject to the con-

dition that this device must not cause

harmful interference and must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the BSI

system could result in serious injury or

death.

. The BSI system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is

not designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects. When changing

lanes, always use the side and rear

mirrors and turn and look in the

direction your vehicle will move to

ensure it is safe to change lanes.

Never rely solely on the BSI system.

. There is a limitation to the detection

capability of the radar. Not every

moving object or vehicle will be

detected. Using the BSI system under

some road, ground, lane marker,

traffic or weather conditions could

lead to improper system operation.

Always rely on your own operation to

avoid accidents.

The BSI system helps alert the driver of other

vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing

lanes, and helps assist the driver to return

the vehicle to the center of the traveling

lane.

Starting and driving 5-45

BLIND SPOT INTERVENTION

(BSI) (if so equipped)

5-46 Starting and driving

JVS0864X

The BSI system uses radar sensors

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles in an adjacent lane. In addition

to the radar sensors, the BSI system uses a

camera

installed behind the windshield to

monitor the lane markers of your traveling

lane.

SSD1030

Detection zone

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the detec-

tion zone shown as illustrated.

This detection zone starts from the outside

mirror of your vehicle and extends approxi-

mately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper,

and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

JVS0828X

Side indicator light

Driver assist system blind spot indica-

tor (on the vehicle information display)

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Lower display

BSI SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSI system operates above approxi-

mately 37 MPH (60 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the side indicator light

illuminates.

If the turn signal is then activated, the

system chimes (twice) and the side indicator

light flashes. The side indicator light con-

tinues to flash until the detected vehicle

leaves the detection zone.

If the BSI system is ON and your vehicle

approaches a lane marker while another

vehicle is in the detection zone, the system

chimes (three times) and the side indicator

light flashes. The BSI system activates to

help return the vehicle back to the center of

the driving lane. The BSI system operates

regardless of turn signal usage.

NOTE:

BSI warning and system application will

only be activated if the side indicator light is

already illuminated when your vehicle ap-

proaches a lane marker. If another vehicle

comes into the detection zone after your

vehicle has crossed a lane marker, no BSI

warning or system application will be

activated. (For additional information, see

“BSI driving situations” (P.5-51).)

Starting and driving 5-47

5-48 Starting and driving

JVS0829X

Driver assist system blind spot indica-

tor (green) (on the vehicle information

display)

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Lower display

TURNING THE BSI SYSTEM ON/

OFF

To turn on the BSI system, push the dynamic

driver assistance switch

on the steering

wheel after starting the engine. The driver

assist system blind spot indicator (green)

in the vehicle information display will illumi-

nate.

Push the dynamic driver assistance switch

again to turn off the BSI system. The driver

assist system blind spot indicator

will turn

off.

The dynamic driver assistance switch

used for Active Lane Control (if so

equipped), BSI and Distance Control Assist

(DCA) systems. When the dynamic driver

assistance switch

is pushed, Active Lane

Control and DCA systems will also turn on or

off simultaneously. The BSI system can be

individually set to on or off on the lower

display

If the system is set to off, the system will not

turn on even if the dynamic driver assistance

switch

is pushed to on. To set the system

to on or off on the lower display, see “How

to enable/disable the BSI system” (P.5-49).

JVS0246X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSI SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSI system.

1. Push the MENU button

and touch

[Driver Assistance] on the lower display.

2. Touch [Blind Spot Assist].

3. Touch [Blind Spot Intervention] to en-

able or disable the system.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software version.

Setting the side indicator light

brightness

The brightness of the side indicator lights

can be changed using the following steps:

1. Push the MENU button

and touch

[Driver Assistance] on the lower display.

2. Touch [Blind Spot Assist].

3. Touch [Blind Spot Indicator] to select

[Bright], [Standard] or [Dark].

When the brightness setting is changed, the

side indicator lights illuminate for a few

seconds.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software version.

BSI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the BSI system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. The BSI system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

. The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSI when certain

objects are present such as:

— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.

— Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground

clearance vehicles.

— Vehicles remaining in the detec-

tion zone when you accelerate

from a stop.

— Oncoming vehicles.

— A vehicle merging into an adja-

cent lane at a speed approxi-

mately the same as your vehicle.

— A vehicle approaching rapidly

from behind.

— A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

— A vehicle that passes through the

detection zone quickly.

. The radar sensor’s detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane,

the radar sensors may not detect

vehicles in an adjacent lane. When

driving in a narrow lane, the radar

sensors may detect vehicles driving

two lanes away.

Starting and driving 5-49

5-50 Starting and driving

. The radar sensors are designed to

ignore most stationary objects, how-

ever objects such as guardrails, walls,

foliage and parked vehicles may oc-

casionally be detected. This is a

normal operation condition.

. The camera may not detect lane

markers in the following situations

and the BSI system may not operate

properly.

— On roads where there are multi-

ple parallel lane markers; lane

markers that are faded or not

painted clearly; yellow painted

lane markers; nonstandard lane

markers; lane markers covered

with water, dirt, snow, etc.

— On roads where discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

— On roads where there are sharp

curves.

— On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as sha-

dows, snow, water, wheel ruts,

seams or lines remaining after

road repairs.

— On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

— When the vehicle’s traveling di-

rection does not align with the

lane markers.

— When traveling close to the ve-

hicle in front of you, which ob-

structs the lane camera unit

detection range.

— When rain, snow or dirt adheres

to the windshield in front of a lane

camera unit.

— When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens or

if aiming is not adjusted properly.

— When strong light enters a lane

camera unit. (For example: light

directly shines on the front of the

vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

— When a sudden change in bright-

ness occurs. (For example: when

the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel

or under a bridge.)

. Do not use the BSI system under the

following conditions because the sys-

tem may not function properly.

— During bad weather. (For exam-

ple: rain, fog, snow, etc.)

— When driving on slippery roads,

such as on ice or snow, etc.

— When driving on winding or un-

even roads.

— When there is a lane closure due

to road repairs.

— When driving in a makeshift or

temporary lane.

— When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

— When driving with a tire that is

not within normal tire conditions

(for example, tire wear, low tire

pressure, installation of spare tire,

tire chains, non-standard wheels).

— When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original steering parts or sus-

pension parts.

. Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound,

and it may not be heard.

BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

JVS0737X

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

Illustration 1: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone

from behind in an adjacent lane.

JVS0738X

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn

signal then the system chimes a sound

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

Starting and driving 5-51

5-52 Starting and driving

JVS0760X

Illustration 3 - Approaching from behind

Illustration 3: If the BSI system is on and your

vehicle approaches a lane marker while

another vehicle is in the detection zone, the

system chimes (three times) and the side

indicator light flashes. The BSI system

activates to help return the vehicle back to

the center of the driving lane.

NOTE:

. The radar sensors may not detect vehi-

cles which are approaching rapidly from

behind.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the other

vehicle is detected.

JVS0739X

Illustration 4 - Overtaking another vehicle

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 4: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if you overtake a vehicle and that

vehicle stays in the detection zone for

approximately 3 seconds.

JVS0740X

Illustration 5 - Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 5: If the driver activates the turn

signal while another vehicle is in the detec-

tion zone, then the system chimes (twice)

and the side indicator light flashes.

JVS0761X

Illustration 6 - Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 6: If the BSI system is on and your

vehicle approaches a lane marker while

another vehicle is in the detection zone, the

system chimes (three times) and the side

indicator light flashes. The BSI system

activates to help return the vehicle back to

the center of the driving lane.

NOTE:

. When overtaking several vehicles in a

row, the vehicles after the first vehicle

may not be detected if they are travel-

ing close together.

. The radar sensors may not detect slower

moving vehicles if they are passed

quickly.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the other

vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-53

5-54 Starting and driving

JVS0741X

Illustration 7 - Entering from the side

Entering from the side

Illustration 7: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone

from either side.

NOTE:

The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle

which is traveling at about the same speed

as your vehicle when it enters the detection

zone.

JVS0742X

Illustration 8 - Entering from the side

Illustration 8: If the driver activates the turn

signal while another vehicle is in the detec-

tion zone, then the side indicator light

flashes and a chime will sound twice.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal before

a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side

indicator light will flash but no chime will

sound when another vehicle is detected.

JVS0761X

Illustration 9 - Entering from the side

Illustration 9: If the BSI system is on and your

vehicle approaches the lane marker while

another vehicle is in the detection zone, the

system chimes (three times) and the side

indicator light flashes. The BSI system

activates to help return the vehicle back to

the center of the driving lane.

JVS0742X

Illustration 10 - Entering from the side

Illustration 10: The BSI system will not

operate if your vehicle is on a lane marker

when another vehicle enters the detection

zone. In this case only the BSW system

operates.

NOTE:

. The radar sensors may not detect a

vehicle which is traveling at about the

same speed as your vehicle when it

enters the detection zone.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the other

vehicle is detected.

. BSI will not operate or will stop operat-

ing and only a warning chime will sound

under the following conditions.

— When the vehicle is accelerated dur-

ing BSI system operation

— When steering quickly

— When the ICC, DCA, PFCW or FEB

warnings sound.

— When the hazard warning flashers

are operated.

— When driving on a curve at a high

speed.

JVS0826X

Vehicle information display

Dynamic driver assistance switch

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNA-

VAILABLE

Under the following conditions, a chime will

sound, the “currently unavailable” warning

message will appear in the vehicle informa-

tion display

and the BSI system will be

turned off automatically. The BSI system will

not be available until the conditions no

longer exist.

. When the VDC system (except TCS

function) or ABS operates.

. When the VDC system is turned off.

Starting and driving 5-55

5-56 Starting and driving

. When the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector

is turned to the SNOW mode.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

push the dynamic driver assistance switch

again to turn the BSI system back on.

When radar blockage is detected, the BSI

system will be turned off automatically, a

chime will sound and the “side radar ob-

struction” warning message will appear in

the vehicle information display

The BSI system is not available until the

conditions no longer exist. For additional

information, see “System maintenance”

(P.5-56).

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

turn the BSI system on again. If the “side

radar obstruction” warning message ap-

pears even after the BSI system is turned

on again, stop the vehicle in a safe location,

place the shift lever in the P (Park) position

and turn the engine off. Check for and

remove objects obscuring the radar sensors

on the rear bumper, and restart the engine.

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then the

BSI system is turned on, the BSI system may

be deactivated automatically. The “high

cabin temperature” warning message will

appear in the vehicle information display

Action to take:

When the interior temperature is reduced,

push the dynamic driver assistance switch

again to turn the BSI system back on.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

When the BSI system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will sound,

and the system “malfunction” warning mes-

sage with the driver assist system blind spot

indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle

information display.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location and place

the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn

the engine off and restart the engine. If the

system “malfunction” warning message with

the driver assist system blind spot indicator

(orange) continues to be displayed, have the

BSI system checked. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

JVS0864X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors for the BSI system

are located near the rear bumper. Always

keep the area near the radar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing

the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent

material), install accessories or apply addi-

tional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

radar sensors.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer if the area around the radar sensors

is damaged due to a collision.

The lane camera unit

for BSI system is

located above the inside mirror. To keep the

proper operation of BSI and prevent a

system malfunction, be sure to observe the

following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

. Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instru-

ment panel. The reflection of sunlight

may adversely affect the camera unit’s

capability of detecting the lane markers.

. Do not strike or damage the areas around

the camera unit. It is recommended you

contact an INFINITI retailer if the cam-

era unit is damaged due to an accident.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

CAUTION TO USERS

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: SRR3–B

Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada’s

RSS-310. Operation is subject to the con-

dition that this device must not cause

harmful interference and must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the BCI

system could result in serious injury or

death.

. The BCI system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedure, is not

designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects and does not

provide full brake power. When back-

ing out of parking spaces, always use

the inside and rear mirrors and turn

and look in the direction you will

move. Never rely solely on the BCI

system.

. There is a limitation to the detection

capability of the radar or the sonar.

Using the BCI system under some

road, ground, traffic or weather con-

ditions could lead to improper system

operation. Always rely on your own

operation to avoid accidents.

The BCI system can help alert the driver of

an approaching vehicle or objects behind the

vehicle when the driver is backing out of a

parking space.

Starting and driving 5-57

BACK-UP COLLISION

INTERVENTION (BCI) (if so equipped)

5-58 Starting and driving

JVS0866X

The BCI system uses radar sensors

installed on both sides near the rear bumper

to detect an approaching vehicle and sonar

sensors

to detect objects in the rear.

JVS0173X

JVS0830X

The radar sensors detect an approaching

vehicle from up to approximately 49 ft (15

m) away. The sonar sensors

detect

stationary objects behind the vehicle up to

approximately 4.9 ft (1.5 m). Refer to the

illustration for approximate zone coverage

areas

WAF0278X

Side indicator light

BCI system key

BCI system indicator

Upper display

Lower display

JVS0173X

BCI SYSTEM OPERATION

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is less than

approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the BCI

system operates.

If the radar detects a vehicle approaching

from the side or the sonar detects close

stationary objects behind the vehicle, the

system gives visual and audible warnings. If

the driver does not apply the brakes, the

system automatically applies the brake for a

moment when the vehicle is moving back-

wards. After the automatic brake applica-

tion, the driver must depress the brake pedal

to maintain brake pressure. If the driver’s

foot is on the accelerator pedal, the system

Starting and driving 5-59

5-60 Starting and driving

pushes the accelerator upward before ap-

plying the brake. If you continue to accel-

erate, the system will not engage the brake.

WAF0283X

Upper display

When the shift lever is placed in the R

(Reverse) position, the indicator on the BCI

system key

illuminates on the upper

display.

JVS0832X

Side indicator light

WAF0284X

Upper display

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle

from the side, the system chimes (once), the

side indicator light on the side the vehicle is

approaching from flashes and a yellow

rectangular frame

appears on the upper

display.

JVS0172X

Illustration 1

JVS0173X

Illustration 2

NOTE:

. In the case of several vehicles approach-

ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the

opposite direction (Illustration 2), a

chime may not be sounded by the BCI

system after the first vehicle passes the

sensors.

. The sonar system chime indicating there

is an object behind the vehicle has a

higher priority than the BCI chime

(single beep) indicating an approaching

vehicle. If the sonar system detects an

object behind the vehicle and the BCI

system detects an approaching vehicle

at the same time, the following indica-

tions are provided:

— The sonar system chime sounds

— The side indicator light on the side of

the approaching vehicle flashes, and

— A yellow rectangular frame appears

in the display.

Starting and driving 5-61

5-62 Starting and driving

WAF0284X

Upper display

If an approaching vehicle or object behind

the vehicle is detected when your vehicle is

backing up, a red frame

will appear on the

upper display and the system will chime

three times. Then, the brakes will be applied

momentarily. After the automatic brake

application, the driver must depress the

brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.

If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator

pedal, the system moves the accelerator

pedal upward before the braking is applied.

However, if you continue to accelerate, the

system will not engage the brakes.

The BCI system does not operate if the

object is very close to the bumper.

WAF0283X

Upper display

TURNING THE BCI SYSTEM ON/

OFF

The BCI system automatically turns on every

time the engine is started.

The BCI system can be turned off tempora-

rily by touching the BCI system key

on the

upper display. The indicator on the BCI

system key turns off. When the shift lever

is placed in the R (Reverse) position again,

the BCI system is turned on.

JVS0479X

BCI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the BCI system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. Always check your surroundings and

turn to check what is behind you

before backing up.

. The radar sensors detect approach-

ing (moving) vehicles. The radar sen-

sors cannot detect every object such

as:

— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals or

child operated toy vehicles

— A vehicle that is passing at speeds

greater than approximately 15

MPH (24 km/h)

. The radar sensors may not detect

approaching vehicles in certain situa-

tions:

— Illustration a. When a vehicle

parked next to you obstructs the

beam of the radar sensor.

— Illustration b. When the vehicle is

parked in an angled parking space.

— Illustration c. When the vehicle is

parked on inclined ground.

— Illustration d. When an approach-

ing vehicle turns into your vehi-

cle’s parking lot aisle.

— Illustration e. When the angle

formed by your vehicle and ap-

proaching vehicle is small.

. The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar sensors to

detect other vehicles:

Starting and driving 5-63

5-64 Starting and driving

— Severe weather

— Road spray

— Ice/frost/dirt build up on the

vehicle

. Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install acces-

sories or apply additional paint near

the radar sensors. These conditions

may reduce the ability of the radar

sensors to detect other vehicles.

. The sonar sensors detect stationary

objects behind the vehicle. The sonar

sensor may not detect:

— Small or moving objects

— Wedge-shaped objects

— Object close to the bumper (less

than approximately 1 ft (30 cm))

— Thin objects such as rope, wire

and chain, etc.

. The brake engagement by the BCI

system is not as effective on a slope

as it is on flat ground. When on a

steep slope the system may not

function properly.

. Do not use the BCI system under the

following conditions because the sys-

tem may not function properly.

— When driving with a tire that is

not within normal tire conditions

(for example, tire wear, low tire

pressure, installation of spare tire,

tire chains, non-standard wheels).

— When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original brake parts or sus-

pension parts.

. Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound,

and it may not be heard.

JVS0824X

Vehicle information display

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNA-

VAILABLE

If the following message appears in the

vehicle information display

, a chime will

sound and the BCI system will be turned off

automatically.

. “Unavailable High Accelerator Temp.”:

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 104 °F (40 °C)) and then

started, the BCI system may be deacti-

vated automatically.

Action to take:

When the interior temperature is re-

duced, turn off the BCI system and turn

it on again.

. “Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction”:

When side radar blockage is detected.

Action to take:

When the blockage is removed, turn off

the BCI system and turn it on again.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the BCI system malfunctions, it will turn

off automatically, a chime will sound and BCI

system “malfunction” warning message will

appear in the vehicle information display

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location and place

the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn

the engine off and restart the engine. If the

warning message continues to appear, have

the system checked. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

JVS0863X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors for the BCI system

is located near the rear bumper. Always keep

the area near the radar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing

the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent

material), install accessories or apply addi-

tional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

radar sensors.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer if the area around the radar sensors

is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

CAUTION TO USERS

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: SRR3–B

Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada’s

RSS-310. Operation is subject to the con-

dition that this device must not cause

harmful interference and must accept any

Starting and driving 5-65

5-66 Starting and driving

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

. If the cruise control system malfunctions,

it will cancel automatically. The cruise

indicator (green) in the vehicle informa-

tion display will then blink to warn the

driver.

. If the engine coolant temperature be-

comes excessively high, the cruise con-

trol system will be canceled

automatically.

. If the cruise indicator (green) blinks, turn

the cruise control MAIN switch off and

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

. The cruise indicator (green) may some-

times blink when the cruise control MAIN

switch is turned ON while pushing the

SET/COAST (-), RESUME/ACCELER-

ATE (+) or CANCEL switch. To properly

set the cruise control system, perform

the steps below in the order indicated.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when

driving under the following conditions:

. when it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

. in heavy traffic or in traffic that

varies in speed

. on winding or hilly roads

. on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

. in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

JVS0867X

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE (+) switch

2. SET/COAST (-) switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch

JVS0306X

Cruise indicator

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise indicator and the set vehicle

speed are displayed in the vehicle informa-

tion display. The cruise indicator indicates

the status of the cruise control system by the

color.

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

MAIN switch on. The cruise indicator (white)

will come on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET/

COAST (-) switch and release it. (The cruise

indicator (green) will illuminate.) Take your

foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle

will maintain the set speed.

. To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the

previously set speed.

. The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed on winding or hilly roads. If this

happens, drive without the cruise con-

trol.

To cancel the preset speed, follow any of

these methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch.

2. Tap the brake pedal.

3. Turn the MAIN switch off.

After any of the above operations is per-

formed, the color of the cruise indicator will

change from green to white.

. If you depress the brake pedal while

pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE

(+) or SET/COAST (-) switch and reset

at the cruising speed, the cruise control

will disengage. Turn the MAIN switch off

once and then turn it on again.

. The cruise control will automatically

cancel if the vehicle slows more than 8

MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed.

Starting and driving 5-67

5-68 Starting and driving

. If you move the shift lever to N (Neutral)

position, the cruise control will be can-

celed.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

and release the SET/COAST (-) switch.

. Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELER-

ATE (+) switch. When the vehicle attains

the speed you desire, release the switch.

. Push, then quickly release the RESUME/

ACCELERATE (+) switch. Each time you

do this, the set speed will increase by

about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the SET/COAST (-) switch and release it.

. Push and hold the SET/COAST (-)

switch. Release the switch when the

vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

. Push, then quickly release the SET/

COAST (-) switch. Each time you do this,

the set speed will decrease by about 1

MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the RESUME/ACCELERATE (+)

switch. The vehicle will resume the last set

cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over

25 MPH (40 km/h).

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the ICC

system could result in serious injury or

death.

. ICC is not a collision avoidance or

warning device. For highway use only

and it is not intended for congested

areas or city driving. Failure to apply

the brakes could result in an accident.

. Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

. Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using either cruise con-

trol mode. Read and understand the

Owner’s Manual thoroughly before

using the cruise control. To avoid

serious injury or death, do not rely

on the system to prevent accidents or

to control the vehicle’s speed in

emergency situations. Do not use

cruise control except in appropriate

road and traffic conditions.

. In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning chime

will not sound to warn you if you are

too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay

special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL

(ICC) (if so equipped)

ahead of you or a collision could

occur.

The ICC system maintains a selected dis-

tance from the vehicle in front of you within

the speed range of 0 to 90 MPH (0 to 144

km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can

be selected by the driver between 20 to 90

MPH (32 to 144 km/h).

The vehicle travels at a set speed when the

road ahead is clear.

The ICC system can be set to one of two

cruise control modes.

. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode:

For maintaining a selected distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle in

front of you up to the preset speed.

. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode:

For cruising at a preset speed.

JVS0834X

Displays and indicators

ICC switches

MAIN (ON·OFF) switch

Push the MAIN switch

to choose the

cruise control mode between the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode and the con-

ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot

be changed to the other cruise control mode.

To change the mode, push the MAIN switch

once to turn the system off. Then push the

MAIN switch

again to turn the system

back on and select the desired cruise control

mode.

Starting and driving 5-69

5-70 Starting and driving

Always confirm the setting in the ICC system

display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, see “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode” (P.5-71).

For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, see “Conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode” (P.5-85).

JVS0835X

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE

CONTROL MODE

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode

, quickly push and release the

MAIN switch

Selecting the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

To choose the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode

, push and hold the

MAIN switch

for longer than approxi-

mately 1.5 seconds. See “Conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode” (P.5-85).

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DIS-

TANCE CONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, the ICC system automatically main-

tains a selected distance from the vehicle

traveling in front of you according to that

vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at

the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

JVS0869X

The system is intended to enhance the

operation of the vehicle when following a

vehicle traveling in the same lane and

direction.

If the radar sensor

detects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce

the vehicle speed so that your vehicle

follows the vehicle in front at the selected

distance.

The system automatically controls the throt-

tle and applies the brakes (up to approxi-

mately 40% of vehicle braking power) if

necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is approxi-

mately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode operation

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode is designed to maintain a selected

distance and reduce the speed to match the

slower vehicle ahead; the system will de-

celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the

vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC

system can only apply up to approximately

40% of the vehicle’s total braking power.

This system should only be used when traffic

conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain

fairly constant or when vehicle speeds

change gradually. If a vehicle moves into

the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle

traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the

distance between vehicles may become

closer because the ICC system cannot

decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this

occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning

chime and blink the system display to notify

the driver to take necessary action.

The system will cancel and a warning chime

will sound if the speed is below approxi-

mately 15 MPH (24 km/h) and a vehicle is

not detected ahead. The system will also

disengage when the vehicle goes above the

maximum set speed.

See “Approach warning” (P.5-78).

Starting and driving 5-71

5-72 Starting and driving

The following items are controlled in the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

. When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode maintains the speed set

by the driver. The set speed range is

between approximately 20 and 90 MPH

(32 and 144 km/h).

. When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode adjusts the speed to maintain the

distance, selected by driver, from the

vehicle ahead. The adjusting speed range

is up to the set speed. If the vehicle

ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill within the

limitations of the system. The system

will cancel once it judges a standstill with

a warning chime.

. When the vehicle traveling ahead has

moved out from its lane of travel, the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

accelerates and maintains vehicle speed

up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation to

maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic

congestion.

SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set speed

and approaching a slower traveling vehicle

ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed

to maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle

ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,

the ICC system will accelerate and maintain

the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention

to the driving operation to maintain control

of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set

speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you

will have to manually control the vehicle

speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to a

vehicle ahead, this system automatically

accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-

cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Depress the accelerator to properly accel-

erate your vehicle when acceleration is

required for a lane change. Depress the

brake pedal when deceleration is required

to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to its sudden braking or if a

vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using

the ICC system.

JVS0836X

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode switches

The system is operated by a MAIN switch

and four control switches, all mounted on

the steering wheel.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE (+) switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

2. SET/COAST (-) switch:

Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speed

incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing

the set speed.

4. MAIN switch:

Master switch to activate the system

5. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following distance:

Long

Middle

Short

JVS0220X

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode display and indicators

The display is located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. This indicator indicates the ICC system

status depending on a color.

Intelligent Cruise Control system ON

indicator (white):

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

Intelligent Cruise Control system set

indicator (green):

Indicates that cruising speed is set

Starting and driving 5-73

5-74 Starting and driving

Intelligent Cruise Control system

warning (orange):

Indicates that there is a malfunction in

the ICC system.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in

front of you.

3. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

4. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between

vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.

JVS0837X

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push

and release the MAIN switch

on. The

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system ON

indicator (white), set distance indicator and

set vehicle speed indicator come on and in a

standby state for setting.

JVS0838X

To set cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET/

COAST (-) switch and release it. (The ICC

system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead

detection indicator, set distance indicator

and set vehicle speed indicator come on.)

Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

WAF0280X

When the SET/COAST (-) switch is pushed

under the following conditions, the system

cannot be set and the ICC indicators will

blink for approximately 2 seconds:

. When traveling below 20 MPH (32

km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not

detected

. When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

or manual shift mode

. When the parking brake is applied

. When the brakes are operated by the

driver

When the SET/COAST (-) switch is pushed

under the following conditions, the system

cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and the “cur-

rently unavailable” warning message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display.

. When the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector

is turned to the SNOW mode (To use the

ICC system, turn the INFINITI Drive

Mode Selector to a mode other than

the SNOW mode, push the MAIN switch

to turn off the ICC and reset the ICC

switch by pressing the MAIN switch

again.)

For details about the INFINITI Drive

Mode Selector, see “INFINITI Drive

Mode Selector” (P.5-21).

. When the VDC system is off (To use the

ICC system, turn on the VDC system.

Push the MAIN switch to turn off the

ICC system and reset the ICC switch by

pushing the MAIN switch again.)

For details about the VDC system, see

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

(P.5-129).

. When ABS or VDC (including the traction

control system) is operating

. When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC

system, make sure the wheels are no

longer slipping.)

Starting and driving 5-75

5-76 Starting and driving

JVS0210X

System set display with vehicle ahead

System set display without vehicle

ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed

based on the road conditions. The ICC

system maintains the set vehicle speed,

similar to standard cruise control, as long

as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead.

The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead:

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,

the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by

controlling the throttle and applying the

brakes to match the speed of a slower

vehicle ahead. The system then controls the

vehicle speed based on the speed of the

vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected

distance.

NOTE:

. The stop lights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC

system.

. When the brake operates, a noise may be

heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on.

The ICC system will also display the set

speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected:

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead,

the ICC system gradually accelerates your

vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle

speed. The ICC system then maintains the

set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera-

tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the

ICC system is in operation, the system

controls the distance to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under

approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h), the

system will be canceled.

JVS0211X

When passing another vehicle, the set speed

indicator will flash when the vehicle speed

exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect

indicator will turn off when the area ahead

of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is

released, the vehicle will return to the

previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the

ICC system, you can depress the accelerator

pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your

vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehicle

speed

To cancel the preset speed, use any of these

methods:

. Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

. Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the

Intelligent Cruise Control system set

indicator (green) and set vehicle speed

indicator will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

and release the SET/COAST (-) switch.

. Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELER-

ATE (+) switch. The set vehicle speed will

increase by approximately 5 MPH (5

km/h for Canada).

. Push, then quickly release the RESUME/

ACCELERATE (+) switch. Each time you

do this, the set speed will increase by

approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Ca-

nada).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the SET/COAST (-) switch and release it.

. Push and hold the SET/COAST (-)

switch. The set vehicle speed will de-

crease by approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h

for Canada).

. Push, then quickly release the SET/

COAST (-) switch. Each time you do this,

the set speed will decrease by approxi-

mately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Canada).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the RESUME/ACCELERATE (+)

switch. The vehicle will resume the last set

cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over

20 MPH (32 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-77

5-78 Starting and driving

JVS0839X

How to change the set distance to

the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time depending on the traffic

conditions.

Each time the DISTANCE switch

pushed, the set distance will change to long,

middle, short and back to long again in that

sequence.

JVS0250M

. The distance to the vehicle ahead will

change according to the vehicle speed.

The higher the vehicle speed, the longer

the distance.

. If the engine is stopped, the set distance

becomes “long”. (Each time the engine is

started, the initial setting becomes

“long”.)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that

vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the

system warns the driver with the chime and

ICC system display. Decelerate by depres-

sing the brake pedal to maintain a safe

vehicle distance if:

. The chime sounds.

. The vehicle ahead detection indicator and

set distance indicator blink.

The warning chime may not sound in some

cases when there is a short distance be-

tween vehicles. Some examples are:

. When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between

vehicles is not changing

. When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between vehicles

is increasing

. When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle

The warning chime will not sound when:

. Your vehicle approaches other vehicles

that are parked or moving slowly.

. The accelerator pedal is depressed, over-

riding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may blink when the

radar sensor detects objects on the side of

the vehicle or on the side of the road. This

may cause the ICC system to decelerate or

accelerate the vehicle. The radar sensor may

detect these objects when the vehicle is

driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly

roads or when entering or exiting a curve. In

these cases you will have to manually

control the proper distance ahead of your

vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected

by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or

driving position in the lane) or traffic or

vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is

being driven with some damage).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following condi-

tions and the control is automatically can-

celed.

. When the vehicle ahead is not detected

and your vehicle is traveling below the

speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h)

. When the system judges the vehicle is at

standstill

. When the shift lever is not in the D

position or Manual mode

. When the parking brake is applied

. When the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector

is turned to the SNOW mode

. When the VDC system is turned off

. When ABS or VDC (including the traction

control system) operates

. When distance measurement becomes

impaired due to adhesion of dirt or

obstruction to the sensor

. When a wheel slips

. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode limitations

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the ICC system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. The system is primarily intended for

use on straight, dry, open roads with

light traffic. It is not advisable to use

the system in city traffic or con-

gested areas.

. This system will not adapt automati-

cally to road conditions. This system

should be used in evenly flowing

traffic. Do not use the system on

roads with sharp curves, or on icy

roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

. As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This system

does not correct careless, inattentive

or absent-minded driving, or over-

come poor visibility in rain, fog, or

Starting and driving 5-79

5-80 Starting and driving

other bad weather. Decelerate the

vehicle speed by depressing the brake

pedal, depending on the distance to

the vehicle ahead and the surround-

ing circumstances in order to main-

tain a safe distance between vehicles.

. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

the vehicle decelerates to a standstill

within the limitations of the system.

The system will cancel once it judges

that the vehicle has come to a

standstill and sound a warning chime.

To prevent the vehicle from moving,

the driver must depress the brake

pedal.

. Always pay attention to the opera-

tion of the vehicle and be ready to

manually control the proper follow-

ing distance. The vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode of the ICC

system may not be able to maintain

the selected distance between vehi-

cles (following distance) or selected

vehicle speed under some circum-

stances.

. The system may not detect the

vehicle in front of you in certain road

or weather conditions. To avoid ac-

cidents, never use the ICC system

under the following conditions:

— On roads where the traffic is

heavy or there are sharp curves

— On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to

the system sensor

— On steep downhill roads (the

vehicle may go beyond the set

vehicle speed and frequent brak-

ing may result in overheating the

brakes)

— On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

— When traffic conditions make it

difficult to keep a proper distance

between vehicles because of fre-

quent acceleration or deceleration

. In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. You

may need to control the distance

from other vehicles using the accel-

erator pedal. Always stay alert and

avoid using the ICC system when it is

not recommended in this section.

The radar sensor will not detect the follow-

ing objects:

. Stationary and slow moving vehicles

. Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

. Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

The sensor generally detects the signals

returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore,

if the sensor cannot detect the reflection

from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may

not maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which

the sensor cannot detect the signals:

. When the snow or road spray from

traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s

visibility

. When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of

your vehicle

The ICC system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s operation within the

limitation of the system. When the sensor

is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the

system will automatically be canceled. If the

sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or

translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system

may not detect them. In these instances, the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

may not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distance

from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and

clean the sensor regularly.

SSD0252

The detection zone of the radar sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the

detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance detection mode to maintain the

selected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the

detection zone due to its position within the

same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be

detected in the same lane ahead if they are

traveling offset from the centerline of the

lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead

may not be detected until the vehicle has

completely moved into the lane. If this

occurs, the ICC system may warn you by

blinking the system indicator and sounding

the chime. The driver may have to manually

control the proper distance away from

vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-81

5-82 Starting and driving

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the radar

sensor may detect vehicles in a different

lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle

traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC

system to decelerate or accelerate the

vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering man-

euver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or

vehicle condition. If this occurs, the ICC

system may warn you by blinking the

system indicator and sounding the chime

unexpectedly. You will have to manually

control the proper distance away from the

vehicle traveling ahead.

JVS0840X

Vehicle information display

MAIN switch

System temporarily unavailable

Condition A:

Under the following conditions, the ICC

system is automatically canceled. The chime

will sound and the “currently unavailable”

warning message will appear in the vehicle

information display.

. When the VDC is turned off

. When the ABS or VDC (including the

traction control system) operates

. When a tire slips

. When the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector

is turned to the SNOW mode

. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the ICC system back on

to use the system.

JVS0221X

ICC system warning

Condition B:

Under the following conditions, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the ICC

system is automatically canceled.

The chime will sound, the ICC system

warning (orange) and the “front radar ob-

struction” warning message will appear in

the vehicle information display.

. When the radar sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed

Action to take:

If the warning (orange) or warning message

appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place,

place the shift lever in the P (Park) position

and turn the engine off. When the radar

signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the

sensor area of the front bumper and restart

the engine. If the warning (orange) or

warning message continues to be displayed,

have the ICC system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

. When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next

to long walls)

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

turn the ICC system back on to use the

system.

Condition C:

When the ICC system is not operating

properly, the chime sounds and the ICC

system warning (orange) will appear.

Action to take:

If the warning appears, stop the vehicle in a

safe place and place the shift lever in the P

(Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart

the engine, resume driving and set the ICC

system again.

Starting and driving 5-83

5-84 Starting and driving

If it is not possible to set the system or the

warning stays on, it may indicate that the

ICC system is malfunctioning. Although the

vehicle is still driveable under normal con-

ditions, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

JVS0869X

System maintenance

The sensor for the ICC system is located

behind the grille of the front bumper.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the sensor area of the front

grille clean.

. Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

. Do not cover or attach stickers or similar

objects on the front bumper near the

sensor area. This could cause failure or

malfunction.

. Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This

could cause failure or malfunction.

. Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. It is recommended you contact

an INFINITI retailer before customizing

or restoring the front bumper.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)

CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed between

25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

. In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning chime

does not sound to warn you if you are

too close to the vehicle ahead, as

neither the presence of the vehicle

ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance is detected.

. Pay special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead of you or a collision could

occur.

. Always confirm the setting in the ICC

system display.

. Do not use the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode when

driving under the following condi-

tions:

— when it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

— in heavy traffic or in traffic that

varies in speed

— on winding or hilly roads

— on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

— in very windy areas

. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

JVS0841X

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switches

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE (+) switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

2. SET/COAST (-) switch:

Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces

speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing

the set speed.

4. MAIN switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

Starting and driving 5-85

5-86 Starting and driving

JVS0301X

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and indicators

The display is located in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

1. Cruise indicator:

This indicator indicates the condition of

ICC system depending on a color.

Cruise control ON indicator (white):

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

Cruise control set indicator (green):

Displays while the vehicle speed is

controlled by the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode of the ICC

system.

Cruise control system warning (or-

ange):

Indicates that there is a malfunction in

the ICC system.

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

This indicator indicates the set vehicle

speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

JVS0842X

Operating conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the

MAIN switch

for longer than about 1.5

seconds.

When pushing the MAIN switch on, the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode display and indicators are displayed

in the vehicle information display. After you

hold the MAIN switch on for longer than

about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display

turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You

can now set your desired cruising speed.

Pushing the MAIN switch again will turn the

system completely off.

When the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position, the system is also automati-

cally turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push

and release the MAIN switch (vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode) or push and

hold it (conventional cruise control mode)

again to turn it on.

When the Distance Control Assist (DCA)

system is on, the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode cannot be turned on

even though the MAIN switch is pushed and

held.

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, turn off the DCA

system. See “Distance Control Assist

(DCA)” (P.5-89).

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise

control, make sure to turn the MAIN

switch off when not using the ICC

system.

JVS0843X

To set cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET/

COAST (-) switch and release it. (The color

of the cruise indicator changes to green and

set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your

vehicle will maintain the set speed.

. To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the

previously set speed.

. The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep hills.

If this happens, manually maintain vehi-

cle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the

following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle

speed indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed

indicator will turn off.

3. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the

cruise indicator and vehicle speed indi-

cator will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

and release the SET/COAST (-) switch.

2. Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELER-

ATE (+) switch. When the vehicle attains

the desired speed, release the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the RESUME/

ACCELERATE (+) switch. Each time you

do this, the set speed will increase by

about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the SET/COAST (-) switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the SET/COAST (-)

switch. Release the switch when the

vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

Starting and driving 5-87

5-88 Starting and driving

3. Push, then quickly release the SET/

COAST (-) switch. Each time you do this,

the set speed will decrease by about 1

MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the RESUME/ACCELERATE (+)

switch. The vehicle will resume the last set

cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over

25 MPH (40 km/h).

System temporarily unavailable

A chime sounds under the following condi-

tions and the control is automatically can-

celed.

. When the vehicle slows down more than

8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed

. When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

or manual shift mode

. When the parking brake is applied.

. When the VDC operates (including the

traction control system)

. When a wheel slips

JVS0306X

Warning

When the system is not operating properly,

the chime sounds and the color of the cruise

indicator will change to orange.

Action to take:

If the color of the cruise indicator changes to

orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and

place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

Turn the engine off, restart the engine,

resume driving and then perform the setting

again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicator

stays on, it may indicate that the system is

malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still

driveable under normal conditions, have the

vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the DCA

system could result in serious personal

injury or death.

. Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using the DCA system.

Read and understand the Owner’s

Manual thoroughly before using the

DCA system. To avoid serious injury

or death, do not rely on the system to

prevent accidents or to control the

vehicle’s speed in emergency situa-

tions. Do not use the DCA system

except in appropriate road and traffic

conditions.

. This system is only an aid to assist the

driver and is not a collision warning or

avoidance device. It is the driver’s

responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle

at all times.

. As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the DCA system. This sys-

tem does not correct careless, inat-

tentive or absent-minded driving, or

overcome poor visibility in rain, fog,

or other bad weather. Decelerate the

vehicle speed by depressing the brake

pedal, depending on the distance to

the vehicle ahead and the surround-

ing circumstances in order to main-

tain a safe distance between vehicles.

. Always pay attention to the opera-

tion of the vehicle and be ready to

manually decelerate to maintain the

proper following distance. The DCA

system may not be able to decelerate

the vehicle under some circum-

stances.

. This system only brakes and moves

the accelerator pedal upward to help

assist the driver to maintain a follow-

ing distance from the vehicle ahead.

Acceleration should be operated by

the driver.

. The DCA system does not control

vehicle speed or warn you when you

approach stationary and slow moving

vehicles. You must pay attention to

vehicle operation to maintain proper

distance from vehicles ahead.

. The DCA system automatically de-

celerates your vehicle to help assist

the driver to maintain a following

distance from the vehicle ahead.

Manually brake when deceleration is

required to maintain a safe distance

upon sudden braking by the vehicle

ahead or when a vehicle suddenly

appears in front of you. Always stay

alert when using the DCA system.

. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

the vehicle decelerates to a standstill

within the limitations of the system.

The system will cancel with a warning

chime once it judges that the vehicle

has come to a standstill. To prevent

the vehicle from moving, the driver

must depress the brake pedal.

Starting and driving 5-89

DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST

(DCA) (if so equipped)

5-90 Starting and driving

JVS0869X

The DCA system is intended to assist the

driver in keeping a following distance from

the vehicle ahead traveling in the same lane

and direction.

If the radar sensor

detects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce

the vehicle speed to help assist the driver to

maintain a following distance.

The system automatically controls the throt-

tle and applies the brakes (up to approxi-

mately 40% of vehicle braking power) if

necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is approxi-

mately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

JVS0844X

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Driver assist system forward indicator

(green) (on the vehicle information dis-

play)

Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on

the vehicle information display)

Lower display

DCA SYSTEM OPERATION

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the DCA

system could result in serious personal

injury or death.

. When the vehicle ahead detection

indicator is not illuminated, system

will not control the vehicle or warn

the driver.

. Never place your foot under the

brake pedal. Your foot may be caught

when the system controls the brake.

. Depending on the position of the

accelerator pedal, the system may

not be able to assist the driver to

release the accelerator pedal appro-

priately.

The DCA system brakes and moves the

accelerator pedal upward according to the

distance from and the relative speed of the

vehicle ahead to help assist the driver in

maintaining a following distance. The sys-

tem will decelerate as necessary and if the

vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. However, the

DCA system can only apply up to approxi-

mately 40% of the vehicle’s total braking

power. If a vehicle moves into the traveling

lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead

rapidly decelerates, the distance between

vehicles may become closer because the

DCA system cannot decelerate the vehicle

quickly enough. If this occurs, the DCA

system will sound a warning chime and blink

the system display to notify the driver to

take necessary action.

See “Approach warning” (P.5-93).

Starting and driving 5-91

5-92 Starting and driving

JVS0244X

System set display with a vehicle ahead

System set display without a vehicle

ahead

System set display with a vehicle ahead

(brake operation is necessary)

The DCA system helps assist the driver to

keep a following distance to the vehicle

ahead by braking and moving the accelera-

tor pedal upward in the normal driving

condition.

When a vehicle ahead is detected:

The vehicle ahead detection indicator ap-

pears.

When the vehicle approaches a vehicle

ahead:

. If the driver’s foot is not on the accel-

erator pedal, the system activates the

brakes to decelerate smoothly as neces-

sary. If the vehicle ahead comes to a

stop, the vehicle decelerates to a stand-

still within the limitations of the system.

. If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator

pedal, the system moves the accelerator

pedal upward to assist the driver to

release the accelerator pedal.

When brake operation by the driver is

required:

The system alerts the driver by a warning

chime and blinking the vehicle ahead detec-

tion indicator. If the driver’s foot is on the

accelerator pedal after the warning, the

system moves the accelerator pedal upward

to assist the driver to switch to the brake

pedal.

NOTE:

. The stop lights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the DCA

system.

. When the brake operates, a noise may be

heard. This is not a malfunction.

Overriding the system:

The following driver’s operation overrides

the system operation.

. When the driver depresses the accelera-

tor pedal even further while the system is

moving the accelerator pedal upward,

the DCA system control of the accel-

erator pedal is canceled.

. When the driver’s foot is on the accel-

erator pedal, the brake control by the

system is not operated.

. When the driver’s foot is on the brake

pedal, neither the brake control nor the

alert by the system operates.

. When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system is set, the DCA system will be

inactive.

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that

vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the

system warns the driver with the chime and

DCA system display. Decelerate by depres-

sing the brake pedal to maintain a safe

vehicle distance if:

. The chime sounds.

. The vehicle ahead detection indicator

blinks.

. The driver assist system forward indica-

tor (orange) blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in some

cases when there is a short distance be-

tween vehicles. Some examples are:

. When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between

vehicles is not changing

. When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between vehicles

is increasing

. When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle

The driver assist system forward indicator

(orange) blinks and the warning chime will

not sound when your vehicle approaches

vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the driver assist system forward in-

dicator (orange) may blink when the radar

sensor detects objects on the side of the

vehicle or on the side of the road. This may

cause the DCA system to decelerate or

accelerate the vehicle. The radar sensor

may detect these objects when the vehicle

is driven on winding roads, narrow roads,

hilly roads or when entering or exiting a

curve. In these cases you will have to

manually control the proper distance ahead

of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected

by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or

driving position in the lane) or traffic or

vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is

being driven with some damage).

Starting and driving 5-93

5-94 Starting and driving

JVS0845X

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Driver assist system forward indicator

(green) (on the vehicle information dis-

play)

Lower display

TURNING THE DCA SYSTEM ON/

OFF

To turn on the DCA system, push the

dynamic driver assistance switch

on the

steering wheel after starting the engine. The

driver assistance switch indicator

in the

vehicle information display will appear. Push

the dynamic driver assistance switch

again

to turn off the DCA system. The driver

assistance switch indicator

will turn off.

The system will start to operate after the

vehicle speed is above approximately 3 MPH

(5 km/h).

The dynamic driver assistance switch

used for the DCA, Active Lane Control (if so

equipped) and Blind Spot Intervention

systems. When the dynamic driver assis-

tance switch

is pushed, Active Lane

Control and BSI systems will also turn on

or off simultaneously. The DCA system can

be individually set to on or off on the lower

display

. If the system is set to off, the

system will not turn on even if the dynamic

driver assistance switch

is pushed to on.

To set the system to on or off on the display,

see “How to enable/disable the DCA sys-

tem” (P.5-95).

When the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode is operating, the DCA system

will not operate. (To use the DCA system,

turn the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode off, then push the dynamic

driver assistance switch.)

For details about the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode, see “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC)” (P.5-68).

When the engine is turned off, the DCA

system is automatically turned off.

JVS0246X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

DCA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the DCA system.

1. Push the MENU

button and touch

[Driver Assistance] on the lower display.

2. Touch [Forward Assist].

3. Touch [Distance Control] to enable or

disable the system.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software version.

JVS0225X

DCA SYSTEM DISPLAY AND IN-

DICATORS

The display is located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. Driver assist system forward indicator

Driver assist system forward indicator

(green):

Indicates that the DCA system is ON.

Driver assist system forward indicator

(orange):

Indicates whether there is a malfunc-

tion in the DCA system.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in

Starting and driving 5-95

5-96 Starting and driving

front of you.

DCA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

of the DCA system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. This system will not adapt automati-

cally to road conditions. Do not use

the system on roads with sharp

curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain

or in fog.

. The DCA system will not apply brake

control while the driver’s foot is on

the accelerator pedal.

. As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the DCA system. This sys-

tem does not correct careless, inat-

tentive or absent-minded driving, or

overcome poor visibility in rain, fog,

or other bad weather. Decelerate the

vehicle speed by depressing the brake

pedal, depending on the distance to

the vehicle ahead and the surround-

ing circumstances in order to main-

tain a safe distance between vehicles.

. The system may not detect the

vehicle in front of you in certain road

or weather conditions. To avoid ac-

cidents, never use the DCA system

under the following conditions:

— On roads with sharp curves

— On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to

the system sensor

— On steep downhill roads (fre-

quent braking may result in over-

heating the brakes)

— On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

. In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. You

may need to control the distance

from other vehicles using the accel-

erator pedal. Always stay alert and

avoid using the DCA system when it

is not recommended in this section.

The radar sensor will not detect the follow-

ing objects:

. Stationary and slow moving vehicles

. Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

. Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

The following are some conditions in which

the sensor cannot detect the signals:

. When the snow or road spray from

traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s

visibility

. When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of

your vehicle

SSD0252

The detection zone of the sensor is limited. A

vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone

for the system to operate.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the

detection zone due to its position within the

same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be

detected in the same lane ahead if they are

traveling offset from the centerline of the

lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead

may not be detected until the vehicle has

completely moved into the lane. If this

occurs, the system may warn you by blink-

ing the system indicator and sounding the

chime. The driver may have to manually

control the proper distance away from

vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-97

5-98 Starting and driving

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the sensor

may detect vehicles in a different lane, or

may temporarily not detect a vehicle travel-

ing ahead. This may cause the system to

work inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering man-

euver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or

vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system

may warn you by blinking the system

indicator and sounding the chime unexpect-

edly. You will have to manually control the

proper distance away from the vehicle

traveling ahead.

JVS0826X

Vehicle information display

Dynamic driver assistance switch

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNA-

VAILABLE

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the DCA

system is automatically canceled. The chime

will sound and the “currently unavailable”

warning message will appear in the vehicle

information display. The system will not be

able to be set.

. When the VDC system is off (To use the

DCA system, turn on the VDC, then push

the dynamic driver assistance switch

For details about the VDC system, see

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

(P.5-129)

. When the VDC or ABS (including the

traction control system) operates

. When the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector

is turned to the SNOW mode (To use the

DCA system, turn the INFINITI Drive

Mode Selector to a mode other than the

SNOW mode, then turn on the dynamic

driver assistance switch

.) For details

about the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector,

see “INFINITI Drive Mode Selector” (P.5-

21)

. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the DCA system back on

to use the system.

Condition B

Under the following conditions, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

DCA system is automatically canceled.

The chime will sound, the driver assist

system forward indicator (orange) and the

“front radar obstruction” warning message

will appear in the vehicle information display.

. When the radar sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed

Action to take:

If the driver assist system forward indicator

(orange) and the warning message appear,

stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the

shift lever in the P (Park) position and turn

the engine off. When the radar signal is

temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor

area of the front bumper and restart the

engine. If the warning message continues to

be displayed, have the DCA system checked.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

. When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next

to long walls)

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the DCA system will resume automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

When the DCA system is not operating

properly, the chime sounds, the driver assist

system forward indicator (orange) and the

system “malfunction” warning message will

appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

If the driver assist system forward indicator

(orange) and the warning message appear,

stop the vehicle in a safe place and place the

shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the

engine off, restart the engine, and turn on

the DCA system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the

system is malfunctioning. Although the

vehicle is still driveable under normal con-

ditions, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the DCA system is common

with the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system and is located behind the grille of

the front bumper.

For the sensor maintenance, see “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC)” (P.5-68).

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

Starting and driving 5-99

5-100 Starting and driving

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the FEB

with pedestrian detection system could

result in serious personal injury or death.

. The FEB with pedestrian detection

system is a supplemental aid to the

driver. It is not a replacement for the

driver’s attention to traffic condi-

tions or responsibility to drive safely.

It cannot prevent accidents due to

carelessness or dangerous driving

techniques.

. The FEB with pedestrian detection

system does not function in all driv-

ing, traffic, weather and road condi-

tions.

The FEB with pedestrian detection system

can assist the driver when there is a risk of a

forward collision with the vehicle ahead in

the traveling lane or with a pedestrian.

JVS0865X

The FEB with pedestrian detection system

uses a radar sensor

located behind the

grille of the front bumper to measure the

distance to the vehicle ahead in the same

lane.

For pedestrians, the FEB with pedestrian

detection system uses a camera

installed

behind the windshield in addition to the

radar sensor.

FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING

(FEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN

DETECTION SYSTEM (if so equipped)

JVS0846X

FEB system warning light (on the

instrument panel)

Indicators and warnings (on the vehicle

information display)

Driver assist system forward indica-

tor

Vehicle ahead detection indicator

FEB system emergency warning

indicator

Lower display

FEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETEC-

TION SYSTEM OPERATION

The FEB with pedestrian detection system

operates at speeds above approximately 3

MPH (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection

function, the system operates at speeds

between 6 – 37 MPH (10 – 60 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the

FEB with pedestrian detection system will

provide the first warning to the driver by

flashing the driver assist system forward

indicator (orange)

and the vehicle ahead

detection indicator (orange)

, and provid-

ing an audible warning. In addition, the FEB

with pedestrian detection system pushes the

accelerator pedal up, and then the system

applies partial braking. If the driver applies

the brakes quickly and forcefully, but the

FEB with pedestrian detection system de-

tects that there is still the possibility of a

forward collision, the system will automati-

cally increase the braking force.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent

and the driver does not take action, the FEB

with pedestrian detection system issues the

second warning to the driver by flashing the

FEB system emergency warning indicator

(red)

, providing an audible warning, and

then automatically applies harder braking.

If a risk of a forward impact with a

pedestrian is detected, the FEB with pedes-

Starting and driving 5-101

5-102 Starting and driving

trian detection system will provide a warning

to the driver by flashing the FEB system

emergency warning indicator (red)

, pro-

vides an audible alert and the system will

apply partial braking. If the driver applies the

brakes quickly and forcefully but the FEB

with pedestrian detection system detects

that there is still the possibility of a forward

impact with a pedestrian, the system will

automatically increase the braking force. If

the risk of collision becomes imminent and

the driver does not take action, the FEB with

pedestrian detection system automatically

applies harder braking.

NOTE:

The vehicle’s stop lights come on when any

braking is performed by the FEB with

pedestrian detection system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to

the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as

driving and roadway conditions, the system

may help the driver avoid a forward collision

or may help mitigate the consequences of a

collision should one be unavoidable. If the

driver is handling the steering wheel, accel-

erating or braking, the FEB with pedestrian

detection system will function later or will

not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the

following conditions:

. When the steering wheel is turned to

avoid a collision.

. When the accelerator pedal is depressed.

. When there is no longer a vehicle or a

pedestrian detected ahead.

If the FEB with pedestrian detection system

has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will

remain at a standstill for approximately 2

seconds before the brakes are released.

JVS0847X

FEB system warning light (on the

instrument panel)

Lower display

MENU button

TURNING THE FEB WITH PE-

DESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the FEB

with pedestrian detection system on or off.

1. Push the MENU button

and touch

[Driver Assistance] on the lower display

2. Touch [Emergency Assist].

3. Touch [Emergency Braking] to turn the

system ON/OFF.

When the FEB with pedestrian detection

system is turned off, the FEB system warn-

ing light (orange)

illuminates.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software version.

NOTE:

. The FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem will be automatically turned ON

when the engine is restarted.

. The Predictive Forward Collision Warn-

ing (PFCW) system is integrated into

the FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem. There is not a separate selection in

the display for the PFCW system. When

the FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem is turned off, the PFCW system is

also turned off.

Starting and driving 5-103

5-104 Starting and driving

FEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETEC-

TION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the FEB with pedestrian detection

system. Failure to operate the vehicle in

accordance with these system limita-

tions could result in serious injury or

death.

. The FEB with pedestrian detection

system cannot detect all vehicles or

pedestrian under all conditions.

. The radar sensor FEB with pedes-

trian detection system does not de-

tect the following objects:

— Small pedestrians (including small

children), animals and cyclists.

— Pedestrians in wheelchairs or

using mobile transport such as

scooters, child-operated toys, or

skateboards.

— Pedestrians who are seated or

otherwise not in a full upright

standing or walking position.

— Oncoming vehicles

— Crossing vehicles

— Obstacles on the roadside

. The FEB with pedestrian detection

system has some performance limita-

tions.

— If a stationary vehicle is in the

vehicle’s path, the FEB with pe-

destrian detection system will not

function when the vehicle is driven

at speeds over approximately 50

MPH (80 km/h).

— For pedestrian detection, the

FEB with pedestrian detection

system will not function when

the vehicle is driven at speeds

over approximately 37 MPH (60

km/h) or below approximately 6

MPH (10km/h).

. The FEB with pedestrian detection

system will not function for pedes-

trians in darkness or in tunnels, even

if there is street lighting in the area.

. For pedestrians, the FEB with pedes-

trian detection system will not issue

the first warning and will not push

the accelerator pedal up.

. The FEB with pedestrian detection

system may not function if the vehi-

cle ahead is narrow (for example a

motorcycle).

. The FEB with pedestrian detection

system may not function if speed

difference between the two vehicles

is too small.

. The radar sensor FEB with pedes-

trian detection system may not func-

tion properly or detect a vehicle

ahead in the following conditions:

— Poor visibility (conditions such as

rain, snow, fog, dust storms,

sandstorms, and road spray from

other vehicles)

— Driving on a steep downhill slope

or roads with sharp curves.

— Driving on a bumpy road surface,

such as an uneven dirt road.

— If dirt, ice, snow or other material

is covering the radar sensor area.

— Interference by other radar

sources.

— The camera area of windshield is

fogged up, or covered with dirt,

water drops, ice, snow, etc.

— Strong light (for example, sun-

light or high beams from oncom-

ing vehicles) enters the front

camera. Strong light causes the

area around the pedestrian to be

cast in a shadow, making it diffi-

cult to see.

— A sudden change in brightness

occurs. (For example, when the

vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a

shaded area or lightning flashes.)

— The poor contrast of a person to

the background, such as having

clothing color or pattern which is

similar to the background.

— The pedestrian’s profile is par-

tially obscured or unidentifiable

due to the pedestrian transport-

ing luggage, wearing bulky or very

loose-fitting clothing or acces-

sories.

. The system performance may de-

grade in the following conditions:

— The vehicle is driven on a slippery

road.

— The vehicle is driven on a slope.

— Excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the

trunk of your vehicle.

. The system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor (radar and

camera)’s functionality, within cer-

tain limitations. The system may not

detect blockage of sensor areas cov-

ered by ice, snow or stickers, for

example. In these cases, the system

may not be able to warn the driver

properly. Be sure that you check,

clean and clear sensor areas regularly.

. In some road and traffic conditions,

the FEB with pedestrian detection

system may unexpectedly apply par-

tial braking. When acceleration is

necessary, depress the accelerator

pedal to override the system.

. Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-105

5-106 Starting and driving

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the radar

sensor may detect vehicles in a different

lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle

traveling ahead. This may cause the FEB

with pedestrian detection system to work

inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering man-

euver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or

vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system

may warn you by blinking the system

indicator and sounding the chime unexpect-

edly. You will have to manually control the

proper distance away from the vehicle

traveling ahead.

JVS0848X

FEB system warning light (on the

instrument panel)

Driver assist system forward indicator

(on the vehicle information display)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNA-

VAILABLE

Condition A

In the following conditions, the FEB system

warning light (orange)

and the driver

assist system forward indicator (orange)

blinks and the system will be turned off

automatically.

. The radar sensor picks up interference

from another radar source.

. The camera area of windshield is misted

or frozen.

. Strong light is shining from the front.

. The cabin temperature is over approxi-

mately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.

. The camera area of windshield glass is

continuously covered with dirt, etc.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the FEB with pedestrian detection system

will resume automatically.

NOTE:

When the inside of the windshield on

camera area is misted or frozen, it will take

a period of time to remove it after air

conditioner turns on. If dirt appears on this

area, it is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer.

Starting and driving 5-107

5-108 Starting and driving

Condition B

Under the following conditions, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

FEB with pedestrian detection system is

automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange)

and the driver assist system forward indi-

cator (orange)

will illuminate and the

“front radar obstruction” warning message

will appear in the vehicle information display.

. When the sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed

Action to take:

If the FEB system warning light (orange)

comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place,

place the shift lever in the P (Park) position

and turn the engine off. Clean the radar

cover on the front grille with a soft cloth, and

restart the engine. If the FEB system warn-

ing light continues to illuminate, have the

FEB with pedestrian detection system

checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

. When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next

to long walls)

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the FEB with pedestrian detection system

will resume automatically.

Condition C

When the accelerator pedal actuator detects

that the internal motor temperature is high,

the FEB with pedestrian detection system is

automatically turned off. The FEB system

warning light (orange)

and the driver

assist system forward indicator (orange)

will illuminate and the “Unavailable High

Accelerator Temperature” warning message

will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the FEB with pedestrian detection system

will resume automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the FEB with pedestrian detection system

malfunctions, it will be turned off automa-

tically, a chime will sound, the FEB system

warning light (orange)

and the driver

assist system forward indicator (orange)

will illuminate and the system “malfunction”

warning message will appear in the vehicle

information display.

Action to take:

If the FEB system warning light (orange)

comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location

and place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position. Turn the engine off and restart the

engine. If the warning light continues to

illuminate, have the FEB with pedestrian

detection system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

NOTE:

If the FEB with pedestrian detection system

stops working, the PFCW system will also

stop working.

JVS0865X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The radar sensor is located behind the

grille of the front bumper. The camera

located on the upper side of the windshield.

To keep the FEB with pedestrian detection

system operating properly, be sure to ob-

serve the following:

. Always keep the sensor area of the front

grille and windshield clean.

. Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensors (ex. grille, windshield).

. Do not cover or attach stickers, or install

any accessory near the sensors. This

could block sensor signals, and/or cause

failure or malfunction.

. Do not attach metallic objects near the

radar sensor area (brush guard, etc.).

This could cause failure or malfunction.

. Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instru-

ment panel. The reflection of sunlight

may adversely affect the camera unit’s

detection capability.

. Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. It is recommended you contact

an INFINITI retailer before customizing

or restoring the front grille.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Starting and driving 5-109

5-110 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the PFCW

system could result in serious injury or

death.

. The PFCW system helps warn the

driver before a collision but will not

avoid a collision. It is the driver’s

responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle

at all times.

The PFCW system can help alert the driver

when there is a sudden braking of a second

vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead

in the same lane.

JVS0869X

The PFCW system uses a radar sensor

located behind the grille of the front bumper

to measure the distance to a second vehicle

ahead in the same lane.

PREDICTIVE FORWARD COLLISION

WARNING (PFCW) (if so equipped)

JVS0849X

Driver assist system forward indicator

(on the vehicle information display)

Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on

the vehicle information display)

FEB system warning light (on the

instrument panel)

Lower display

Starting and driving 5-111

5-112 Starting and driving

JVS0294X

PFCW SYSTEM OPERATION

The PFCW system operates at speeds above

approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h).

If there is a potential risk of a forward

collision, the PFCW system will warn the

driver by blinking the driver assist system

forward indicator and the vehicle ahead

detection indicator, and sounding an audible

alert.

JVS0847X

FEB system warning light (on the

instrument panel)

Lower display

MENU button

TURNING THE PFCW SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the

PFCW system on or off.

1. Push the MENU button

and touch

[Driver Assistance] on the lower display

2. Touch [Emergency Assist].

3. Touch [Emergency Braking] to turn the

system ON/OFF.

When the PFCW system is turned off, the

FEB system warning light (orange)

illumi-

nates.

The displayed keys on the lower display may

vary depending on models, specifications

and software version.

NOTE:

The PFCW system is integrated into the

FEB with pedestrian detection system.

There is not a separate selection in the

display for the PFCW system. When the

FEB with pedestrian detection system is

turned off, the PFCW system is also turned

off.

Starting and driving 5-113

5-114 Starting and driving

JVS0295X

Illustration A

JVS0296X

Illustration B

JVS0297X

Illustration C

JVS0298X

Illustration D

PFCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the PFCW system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. The PFCW system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

. The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects:

— Pedestrians, animals or obstacles

in the roadway

— Oncoming vehicles

— Crossing vehicles

. (Illustration A) The PFCW system

does not function when a vehicle

ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a

motorcycle.

. The radar sensor may not detect a

vehicle ahead in the following condi-

tions:

— Snow or heavy rain

— Dirt, ice, snow or other material

covering the radar sensor

— Interference by other radar

sources

— Snow or road spray from travel-

ling vehicles.

— Driving in a tunnel

— (Illustration B) When the vehicle

ahead is being towed.

— (Illustration C) When the distance

to the vehicle ahead is too close,

the beam of the radar sensor is

obstructed.

— (Illustration D) When driving on a

steep downhill slope or roads with

sharp curves.

. The system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s functionality,

within certain limitations. The system

may not detect some forms of ob-

struction of the sensor area such as

ice, snow, stickers, for example. In

these cases, the system may not be

able to warn the driver properly. Be

sure that you check, clean and clear

the sensor area regularly.

. Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

Starting and driving 5-115

5-116 Starting and driving

may not be heard.

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the radar

sensor may detect vehicles in a different

lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle

traveling ahead. This may cause the PFCW

system to work inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering man-

euver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or

vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system

may warn you by blinking the system

indicator and sounding the chime unexpect-

edly. You will have to manually control the

proper distance away from the vehicle

traveling ahead.

JVS0848X

FEB system warning light (on the

instrument panel)

Driver assist system forward indicator

(on the vehicle information display)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNA-

VAILABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interference

from another radar source, making it im-

possible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

PFCW system is automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange)

and the driver assist system forward indi-

cator (orange)

will illuminate.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the PFCW system will resume automatically.

Condition B

Under the following conditions, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

PFCW system is automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange)

and the driver assist system forward indi-

cator (orange)

will illuminate and the

“front radar obstruction” warning message

will appear in the vehicle information display.

. When the sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed

Starting and driving 5-117

5-118 Starting and driving

Action to take:

If the FEB system warning light (orange)

comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place,

place the shift lever in the P (Park) position

and turn the engine off. Clean the radar

cover on the front grille with a soft cloth, and

restart the engine. If the FEB system warn-

ing light (orange)

continues to illuminate,

have the PFCW system checked. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

. When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next

to long walls)

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the PFCW system will resume automatically.

NOTE:

If the FEB with pedestrian detection system

stops working, the PFCW system will also

stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the PFCW malfunctions, it will be turned

off automatically, a chime will sound, the

FEB system warning light (orange)

and

the driver assist system forward indicator

(orange)

will illuminate, and the system

“malfunction” message will appear in the

vehicle information display.

Action to take:

If the FEB system warning light (orange)

comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location,

turn the engine off and restart the engine. If

the warning light continues to illuminate,

have the PFCW system checked. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

JVS0869X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor is located behind the grille of

the front bumper.

To keep the system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the sensor area of the front

grille clean.

. Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

. Do not cover or attach stickers or similar

objects on the front bumper near the

sensor area. This could cause failure or

malfunction.

. Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This

could cause failure or malfunction.

. Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. It is recommended you contact

an INFINITI retailer before customizing

or restoring the front bumper.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and en-

sure the future reliability and economy

of your new vehicle.

Failure to follow these recommendations

may result in shortened engine life and

reduced engine performance.

. Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

. Avoid quick starts.

. Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient

Driving Tips to help you achieve the most

fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use smooth accelerator and brake pedal

application.

Avoid rapid starts and stops.

Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain constant speed.

Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.

Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your

number of stops.

Maintaining a steady speed can mini-

mize red light stops and improve fuel

efficiency.

3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher

vehicle speeds.

Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the

vehicle due to reduced engine load.

Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the

vehicle due to increased aerodynamic

drag.

Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling

load.

Starting and driving 5-119

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

5-120 Starting and driving

4. Drive at economical speeds and dis-

tances.

Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where

legally allowed) can improve fuel

efficiency due to reduced aerody-

namic drag.

Maintaining a safe following distance

behind other vehicles reduces unne-

cessary braking.

Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced

braking and smooth acceleration

changes.

Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

5. Use cruise control.

Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady speed.

Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when driving

on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the shortest route.

Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid idling.

Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30-60 seconds

saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads.

Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruising

speed through the toll and avoid

stopping and starting.

9. Winter warm up.

Limit idling time to minimize impact to

fuel economy.

Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to

effectively circulate the engine oil

before driving.

Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-

ating temperature more quickly while

driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your vehicle cool.

Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever possi-

ble.

When entering a hot vehicle, opening

the windows will help to reduce the

inside temperature faster, resulting in

reduced demand on your A/C system.

. Keep your engine tuned up.

. Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire

wear and lowers fuel economy.

. Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

. Use the recommended viscosity engine

oil. (See “Engine oil and oil filter recom-

mendation” (P.10-6).)

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

If any malfunction occurs in the Intelligent

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system while the

engine is running, warning messages appear

in the vehicle information display.

JVS0228M

If the “AWD Error” warning appears, there

may be a malfunction in the Intelligent AWD

system. Reduce vehicle speed and have the

system checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

The “AWD High Temp.” (high temperature)

warning

may appear while trying to free a

stuck vehicle due to increased oil tempera-

ture. The driving mode may change to Two-

Wheel Drive (2WD). If this warning is

displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine

idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if

the warning turns off, you can continue

driving.

The “Tire Size Incorrect” warning

may

appear if there is a large difference between

the diameters of front and rear wheels. Pull

off the road in a safe area, with the engine

idling. Check that all tire sizes are the same,

that the tire pressure is correct and that the

tires are not excessively worn.

If any warning message continues to be

displayed, have your vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

. For AWD equipped vehicles, do not

attempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result

in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

Starting and driving 5-121

INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL

DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)

5-122 Starting and driving

. Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-

namometer (such as the dynam-

ometers used by some states for

emissions testing) or similar equip-

ment even if the other two wheels are

raised off the ground. Make sure that

you inform the test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with

AWD before it is placed on a dynam-

ometer. Using the wrong test equip-

ment may result in drivetrain damage

or unexpected vehicle movement

which could result in serious vehicle

damage or personal injury.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the engine on a free

roller when any of the wheels are

raised.

. If the “AWD Error” warning appears

while driving there may be a mal-

function in the AWD system. Reduce

the vehicle speed and have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible.

It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

. If the “AWD Error” warning remains

on after the above operation, have

your vehicle checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

. The power train may be damaged if

you continue driving with the “AWD

Error” warning on.

SD1006MA

WARNING

. Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

. Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

. Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious accidents.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly

become high enough to cause a sig-

nificant risk of injury or death to

people and pets.

. Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be applied

and the transmission placed into P

(Park). Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or

roll away and result in an accident.

. Make sure the automatic transmis-

sion shift lever has been pushed as far

forward as it can go and cannot be

moved without depressing the foot

brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into the street when parked on a sloping

drive way, it is a good practice to turn the

wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL,

NO CURB:

Turn the wheels toward the side of

the road so the vehicle will move away

from the center of the road if it

Starting and driving 5-123

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-124 Starting and driving

moves.

4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING

TYPE

WARNING

. If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

. When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, the power assist for the steer-

ing will cease operation. You will still

have control of the vehicle but the

steering will be harder to operate.

The electric power steering is designed to

provide power assist while driving to oper-

ate the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated re-

peatedly or continuously while parking or

driving at a very low speed, the power assist

for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is

to prevent overheating of the electric power

steering and protect it from getting da-

maged. While the power assist is reduced,

steering wheel operation will become heavy.

When the temperature of the electric power

steering goes down, the power assist level

will return to normal. Avoid repeating such

steering wheel operations that could cause

the electric power steering to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering

wheel is operated quickly. However, this is

not a malfunction.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the electric power steering is not

functioning properly and may need servicing.

It is recommended you have the electric

power steering checked by an INFINITI

retailer. (See “Power steering warning light”

(P.2-16).)

When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, the

power assist for the steering will cease

operation. You will still have control of the

vehicle. However, greater steering effort is

needed, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

DIRECT ADAPTIVE STEERING

TYPE

WARNING

. When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, the power assist for the steer-

ing will cease operation. You will still

POWER STEERING

have control of the vehicle, but the

steering will be harder to operate.

. If wheels or tires other than the

INFINITI recommended ones are

used, Direct Adaptive Steering may

not operate properly and the power

steering warning light may illumi-

nate.

. Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not INFINITI recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

Direct Adaptive Steering may not

operate properly and the power

steering warning light may illumi-

nate.

. Do not modify the vehicle’s steering.

If steering parts are not INFINITI

recommended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, Direct Adap-

tive Steering may not operate prop-

erly and the power steering warning

light may illuminate.

. If the VDC warning light illuminates,

the power steering warning light may

also illuminate at the same time. Stop

the vehicle in a safe location, turn the

engine off and restart the engine. If

the power steering warning light

continues to illuminate, have the

system checked. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service. For the VDC system, see

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-

tem” (P.5-129).

CAUTION

. Do not place the ignition switch is in

the ON position while the steering

wheel or a tire is removed.

. Do not turn the steering wheel as

much as possible while the ignition

switch is in any position other than

the ON position.

. Installing an accessory on the steer-

ing wheel, or changing the steering

wheel, may reduce the steering per-

formance.

Direct Adaptive Steering is designed to

control the steering force and steering angle

according to the vehicle speed and amount

of turning of the steering wheel.

The steering characteristic can be selected

using the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector. See

“INFINITI Drive Mode Selector” (P.5-21).

If the VDC system is turned off, the setting

of steering becomes standard mode.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate that Direct Adaptive Steering is not

functioning properly and may need servicing.

It is recommended you have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer. (See “Power

steering warning light” (P.2-16).)

When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, the

power assist for the steering will cease

operation. You will still have control of the

vehicle. However, greater steering effort will

be needed, especially in sharp turns and at

low speeds.

If Direct Adaptive Steering is malfunction-

ing, the steering wheel may turn slightly even

when driving on a straight road.

Under the following conditions, the steering

wheel may turn slightly even when driving on

a straight road. This is due to a protection

mechanism for Direct Adaptive Steering. The

steering wheel will return to the normal

position after the protection mechanism is

deactivated.

Condition A

. When the engine is stalled or likely to be

stalled

. When the steering wheel is held in the full

lock position or when the front tire

touches an obstruction.

Starting and driving 5-125

5-126 Starting and driving

. When the battery is discharged

To return the steering wheel to the normal

position, stop the vehicle in a safe location

and stop operating the steering wheel. Then

drive the vehicle for a short period of time.

Condition B

. When the steering wheel is operated

repeatedly or continuously while parking

or driving at a very low speed. In this

case, the power assist for the steering

wheel will be reduced.

To return the steering wheel to the normal

position, stop the vehicle in a safe location

and wait for a period of time, without

operating the steering wheel, until the

temperature of Direct Adaptive Steering

cools down. Avoid repeated steering wheel

operations that could cause Direct Adaptive

Steering to overheat.

When the vehicle is tested on the 2-wheel

dynamometer, the power steering warning

light may illuminate. To turn off the power

steering warning light, stop the vehicle in a

safe location, turn the engine off, restart the

engine, and then drive the vehicle for a

period of time.

The following conditions do not indicate a

malfunction of Direct Adaptive Steering.

. You may notice wider steering play when

the ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC

position compared to when it is in the

ON position.

. After the engine is started, the steering

wheel may turn slightly even when

driving on a straight road. To return to

the normal position, drive the vehicle on

a straight road for a period of time.

. After the engine is started, the steering

wheel may move if the steering wheel

was turned to the fully locked position

while the ignition switch was in the OFF

position.

. After the vehicle is tested on the 4-wheel

dynamometer, the steering wheel may

turn slightly even when driving on a

straight road. To return the steering

wheel to the normal position, drive the

vehicle on a straight road for a period of

time.

You may hear a noise under the following

conditions. However, this is not a malfunc-

tion.

. When the engine is started or stopped.

. When the steering wheel is turned in the

full lock position.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydrau-

lic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you

will still have braking at two wheels.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using

engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can

stop the vehicle by depressing the brake

pedal. However, greater foot pressure on

the brake pedal will be required to stop the

vehicle and the stopping distance will be

longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will cause overheating of

the brakes, wearing out the brake and pads

faster and reduce gas mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going

down a slope or long grade. Overheated

brakes may reduce braking performance and

could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

. While driving on a slippery surface,

be careful when braking, accelerating

BRAKE SYSTEM

or downshifting. Abrupt braking or

accelerating could cause the wheels

to skid and result in an accident.

. If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the brakes will not work.

Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet. As

a result, your braking distance will be longer

and the vehicle may pull to one side during

braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal

to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the

brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the

vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

function correctly.

PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in

order to assure the best braking perfor-

mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking force

than a conventional brake booster even with

light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

is a sophisticated device, but it

cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain ve-

hicle control during braking on slip-

pery surfaces. Remember that

stopping distances on slippery sur-

Starting and driving 5-127

BRAKE ASSIST

5-128 Starting and driving

faces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with ABS. Stopping

distances may also be longer on

rough, gravel or snow covered roads,

or if you are using tire chains. Always

maintain a safe distance from the

vehicle in front of you. Ultimately,

the driver is responsible for safety.

. Tire type and condition may also

affect braking effectiveness.

— When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

— When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and

type as specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label. See

“Tire and loading information la-

bel” (P.10-13) of this manual.

— For detailed information, see

“Wheels and tires” (P.8-25) of

this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls

the brakes so the wheels do not lock during

hard braking or when braking on slippery

surfaces. The system detects the rotation

speed at each wheel and varies the brake

fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from

locking and sliding. By preventing each

wheel from locking, the system helps the

driver maintain steering control and helps to

minimize swerving and spinning on slippery

surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from

locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid

obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping dis-

tances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic

feature that tests the system each time you

start the engine and move the vehicle at a

low speed in forward or reverse. When the

self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk”

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the computer senses a mal-

function, it switches the ABS off and

illuminates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the

vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6

MPH (5 to 10 km/h).

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-

sure. This action is similar to pumping the

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation

in the brake pedal and hear a noise from

under the hood or feel a vibration from the

actuator when it is operating. This is normal

and indicates that the ABS is operating

properly. However, the pulsation may indi-

cate that road conditions are hazardous and

extra care is required while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs

and vehicle motion. Under certain driving

conditions, the VDC system helps to perform

the following functions.

. Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power

is transferred to a non slipping drive

wheel on the same axle.

. Controls brake pressure and engine out-

put to reduce drive wheel slip based on

vehicle speed (traction control function).

. Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle in

the following conditions:

— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increased

steering input)

— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions).

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot

prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving

situations.

When the VDC system operates, the VDC

warning light

in the instrument panel

flashes so note the following:

. The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required to

help keep the vehicle on the steered path.

. You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration from

under the hood. This is normal and

indicates that the VDC system is working

properly.

. Adjust your speed and driving to the road

conditions.

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn-

ing light” (P.2-17).

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

VDC warning light

illuminates in the

instrument panel. The VDC system automa-

tically turns off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The VDC off indicator light

illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to

prevent one drive wheel from slipping by

transferring power to a non slipping drive

wheel. The VDC warning light

flashes if

this occurs. All other VDC functions are off,

except for brake force distribution, and the

VDC warning light

will not flash. The

VDC system is automatically reset to on

when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position then back in the ON position.

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn-

ing light” (P.2-17) and “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off indicator light” (P.2-19).

The computer has a built-in diagnostic

feature that tests the system each time you

start the engine and move the vehicle

forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When

the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk”

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indication

of a malfunction.

VDC operation is reduced when the INFINITI

Drive Mode Selector is used to select the

SPORT+ mode (if so equipped). The VDC

system may not operate in the same circum-

stances when compared to operation in the

standard mode. To help prevent accidents

drive carefully, avoid careless or dangerous

driving techniques and be especially careful

when driving and cornering on slippery

surfaces.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns,

the system optimizes the distribution of

force to each of the four wheels depending

on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

. The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

Starting and driving 5-129

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL

(VDC) SYSTEM

5-130 Starting and driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and

always drive carefully.

. The brake force distribution system

may not be effective depending on

the driving condition. Always drive

carefully and attentively.

. Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not INFINITI recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the VDC warning light

may

illuminate.

. If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

INFINITI recommended or are extre-

mely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and the

VDC warning light

may illumi-

nate.

. If engine control related parts are not

INFINITI recommended or are extre-

mely deteriorated, the VDC warning

light

may illuminate.

. When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the VDC warning

light

may illuminate. Do not drive

on these types of roads.

. When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the VDC warning light

may

illuminate. This is not a malfunction.

Restart the engine after driving onto

a stable surface.

. If wheels or tires other than the

INFINITI recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the VDC warning

light

may illuminate.

. The VDC system is not a substitute

for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow covered road.

This system senses driving based on the

driver’s steering and acceleration/braking

patterns, and controls brake pressure at

individual wheels to help smooth vehicle

response.

When the SPORT mode is selected by the

INFINITI Drive Mode Selector, the amount

of brake control provided by the active trace

control is reduced.

When the PERSONAL mode is selected, the

active trace control can be set to ON

(enabled) or OFF (disabled). See “INFINITI

Drive Mode Selector” (P.5-21).

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn

off the VDC system, the active trace control

is also turned off.

ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL

JVS0249X

When the active trace control is operated

and the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in

the trip computer, the active trace control

graphics are shown in the vehicle informa-

tion display. (See “Trip computer” (P.2-29).)

If the chassis control warning message

appears in the vehicle information display,

it may indicate that the active trace control

is not functioning properly. It is recom-

mended you have the system checked by

an INFINITI retailer. (See “26. Chassis con-

trol warning” (P.2-25).)

WARNING

The active trace control may not be

effective depending on the driving con-

dition. Always drive carefully and atten-

tively.

When the active trace control is operating,

you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise. This is normal and indicates

that the active trace control is operating

properly. You may also feel deceleration

when the active trace control is operating.

However, this is not a malfunction.

Even if the active trace control is set to OFF,

some functions will remain on to assist the

driver (for example, avoidance scenes).

Starting and driving 5-131

5-132 Starting and driving

WARNING

. Never rely solely on the hill start

assist system to prevent the vehicle

from moving backward on a hill.

Always drive carefully and atten-

tively. Depress the brake pedal when

the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.

Be especially careful when stopped

on a hill on frozen or muddy roads.

Failure to prevent the vehicle from

rolling backwards may result in a loss

of control of the vehicle and possible

serious injury or death.

. The hill start assist system is not

designed to hold the vehicle at a

standstill on a hill. Depress the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped on

a steep hill. Failure to do so may

cause the vehicle to roll backwards

and may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

. The hill start assist system may not

prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

wards on a hill under all load or road

conditions. Always be prepared to

depress the brake pedal to prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards.

Failure to do so may result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically

keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards in the time it

takes the driver to release the brake pedal

and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is

stopped on a hill.

The hill start assist system will operate

automatically under the following condi-

tions:

. The transmission is shifted to a forward

or reverse gear.

. The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill

by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.

After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll

back and the hill start assist system will stop

operating completely.

The hill start assist system will not operate

when the transmission is shifted to the N

(Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and

level road.

The chassis control is an electric control

module that includes the following func-

tions:

. Log-in function (See “Log-in function”

(P.3-15).)

. INFINITI Drive Mode Selector (See

“INFINITI Drive Mode Selector” (P.5-

21).)

. Active Lane Control (if so equipped) (See

“Active Lane Control” (P.5-25).)

. Active Trace Control (See “Active trace

control” (P.5-130).)

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM CHASSIS CONTROL

SSD0602

WARNING

. The sonar system is a convenience

but it is not a substitute for proper

parking. Always look around and

check that it is safe to do so before

parking. Always move slowly.

. Read and understand the limitations

of the sonar system as contained in

this section. Inclement weather may

affect the function of the sonar

system; this may include reduced

performance or a false activation.

. This system is not designed to pre-

vent contact with small or moving

objects.

. The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large station-

ary objects to help avoid damaging

the vehicle. The system will not

detect small objects below the bum-

per, and may not detect objects that

are too close to the bumper or on the

ground.

. If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned

or bent, the sensing zone may be

altered causing inaccurate measure-

ment of obstacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible to hear the tone clearly.

The sonar system sounds a tone to warn the

driver of obstacles near the bumper. When

the [Auto Show Sonar Image] key is turned

on in the [Parking Sonar] settings, the sonar

indicator will also appear on the upper

display. (See “Sonar indicator” (P.5-135).)

The system detects front obstacles when the

shift lever is in the D (Drive) position or N

(Neutral) position. The system detects both

front and rear obstacles when the shift lever

is in the R (Reverse) position.

The system may not detect objects at speeds

above 6 MPH (10 km/h) and may not detect

certain angular or moving objects.

The sonar system detects obstacles up to

3.9 ft (1.2 m) from the bumper with a

decreased coverage area at the outer cor-

ners of the bumper. Refer to the illustration

for approximate zone coverage areas. As

you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of

the tone increases. When the obstacle is less

than 11.8 in (30 cm) away, the tone will

Starting and driving 5-133

SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-134 Starting and driving

sound continuously.

Keep the corner/center sonar (located on

the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and

large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the

sonar with sharp objects). If the sonar is

covered, it will affect the accuracy of the

sonar system.

The sensitivity level of the corner/center

sonar can be adjusted (higher or lower) on

the lower display.

The intermittent tone will stop in 3 seconds

when an obstacle is detected by only the

corner sensor and the distance does not

change.

JVS0246X

SONAR SYSTEM SETTINGS

Perform the following steps to set up the

sonar function.

1. Push the MENU

button and touch

[Settings] on the lower display.

2. Touch [Parking Sonar].

For the details of the available settings, see

“Turning on and off the sonar function” (P.4-

25).

WAF0289X

Example (bird’s-eye view)

WAF0288X

Example (rear view)

SONAR INDICATOR

When the corner of the vehicle moves closer

to an object, the corner sensor indicator

appears on the upper display.

When the center of the vehicle moves close

to an object, the center sensor indicator

appears on the upper display.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer through the key hole. If the lock

becomes frozen, heat the key before insert-

ing it into the key hole or use the Intelligent

Key system.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

outside temperature will drop below 32°F

(0°C), check antifreeze to assure proper

winter protection. For additional informa-

tion, see “Engine cooling system” (P.8-3) or

“Intercooler cooling system” (P.8-5).

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the bat-

tery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly. For

additional information, see “Battery” (P.8-

11).

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ-

ing the engine block. Refill before operating

the vehicle. For details, see “Engine cooling

system” (P.8-3).

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your

vehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITI

recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or

ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. It is

recommended you consult an INFINITI re-

tailer for the tire type, size, speed rating and

availability information.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their

use. Check local, state and provincial laws

before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Tire chains may be used. For details, see

“Tire chains” (P.8-33) of this manual.

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

models

If you install snow tires, they must also be

the same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

Starting and driving 5-135

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-136 Starting and driving

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to

remove ice and snow from the windows

and wiper blades.

. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of

snowdrifts.

. Extra window washer fluid to refill the

reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

. Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip”

under these conditions. Try to avoid

driving on wet ice until the road is

salted or sanded.

. Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

. Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pave-

ment.

. Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice, and avoid any sudden steer-

ing maneuvers.

. Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads.

. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist in

cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20°F

(−7°C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension

cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged

in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on

outside temperatures, to properly warm

the engine coolant. Use an appropriate

timer to turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away

from moving parts.

WARNING

. Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be

seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded

connection.

. Disconnect and properly store the

engine block heater cord before

starting the engine. Damage to the

cord could result in an electrical shock

and can cause serious injury.

. Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least 10A.

Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure

to use the proper extension cord or

a grounded outlet can result in a fire

or electrical shock and cause serious

personal injury.

JVS0905X

NOTE:

To operate the active noise cancellation and

active sound enhancement system properly:

. Do not cover the speakers or woofer.

. Do not cover the microphones.

. Do not change or modify speakers in-

cluding the woofer and any audio related

parts such as the amplifier.

. Do not make any modification including

sound deadening or modifications

around the microphones, speakers or

woofer.

Starting and driving 5-137

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION/

ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT

5-138 Starting and driving

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION

The active noise cancellation uses micro-

phones

located inside the vehicle to detect

engine booming noises. The system then

automatically produces a muted engine

booming noise through the speakers

(if so equipped), (if so equipped) and

woofer

to reduce engine booming noise.

If the microphone

or the area around it is

tapped, abnormal noise may be output from

the speaker.

ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT

The active sound enhancement generates

sounds according to engine speed and

driving modes through the speakers

and

(if so equipped) to enhance the quality of

the engine sound.

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ..................................... 6-2

Roadside assistance program ....................................... 6-2

Emergency engine shut off ............................................ 6-3

Flat tire ................................................................................ 6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........... 6-3

Run-flat tires ................................................................ 6-4

Repairing a flat tire (for models with emergency

tire puncture repair kit) .............................................. 6-5

Jump starting .................................................................. 6-10

Push starting ................................................................... 6-12

If your vehicle overheats .............................................. 6-13

Towing your vehicle ...................................................... 6-14

Towing recommended by INFINITI ................... 6-15

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ........ 6-16

6-2 In case of emergency

SIC2574

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-

gency conditions. All turn signal lights will

flash.

WARNING

. If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

. Do not use the hazard warning

flashers while moving on the highway

unless unusual circumstances force

you to drive so slowly that your

vehicle might become a hazard to

other traffic.

. Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition

switch in any position.

When an impact that could activate the

supplemental air bags is detected, the

hazard warning flasher lights blink automa-

tically. If the hazard warning flasher switch is

pushed, the hazard warning flashers will turn

off.

WARNING

Do not turn the hazard warning flasher

switch to off until you can make sure

that it is safe to do so. Also, the hazard

flasher warning may not blink automa-

tically depending on the force of impact.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of the

hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

In the event of a roadside emergency,

Roadside Assistance Service is available to

you. Please refer to your Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside

Assistance Information Booklet (Canada) for

details.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

. Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times in less than

1.5 seconds, or

. Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

in this section.

For models with run-flat tires, you can

continue driving to a safe location even if

they are punctured. (See “Run-flat tires”

(P.6-4) and “Run-flat tires” (P.8-31).)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except the

spare. When the low tire pressure warning

light is lit and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add

Air” warning appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display, one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is

being driven with low tire pressure, the

TPMS will activate and warn you of it by

the low tire pressure warning light. This

system will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).

For more details, see “Warning lights, in-

dicator lights and audible reminders” (P.2-

12) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” (P.5-5).

WARNING

. Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment man-

ufacturer for the possible influences

before use.

. If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and

increase the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and

could result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low tire

pressure warning light OFF. If the

light still illuminates while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a

tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire (if so

equipped) or repair it with the emer-

gency tire puncture repair kit (if so

equipped) as soon as possible. If no

tire is flat and all tires are properly

inflated, it is recommended you con-

sult an INFINITI retailer.

In case of emergency 6-3

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

6-4 In case of emergency

. Since the spare tire is not equipped

with the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced, the

TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash

for approximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute. Have

your tires replaced and/or TPMS

system reset as soon as possible. It

is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for these services.

. Replacing tires with those not origin-

ally specified by INFINITI could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

. INFINITI recommends using only

Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer

as soon as possible after using tire

repair sealant (for models equipped

with the emergency tire puncture

repair kit).

RUN-FLAT TIRES

Run-flat tires are those tires that can be

used temporarily if they are punctured. See

“Run-flat tires” (P.8-31).

Also, refer to “Important Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

WARNING

. Although you can continue driving

with a punctured run-flat tire, re-

member that vehicle handling stabi-

lity is reduced, which could lead to an

accident and personal injury. Also,

driving a long distance at high speeds

may damage the tires.

. Do not drive at speeds above 50

MPH (80 km/h) and do not drive

more than approximately 93 miles

(150 km) with a punctured run-flat

tire. The actual distance the vehicle

can be driven on a flat tire depends on

outside temperature, vehicle load,

road conditions and other factors.

. Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid

hard cornering or braking, which may

cause you to lose control of the

vehicle.

. If you detect any unusual sounds or

vibrations while driving with a punc-

tured run-flat tire, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. The tire may be

seriously damaged and need to be

replaced.

CAUTION

. Never install tire chains on a punctu-

red run-flat tire, as this could damage

your vehicle.

. Avoid driving over any projection or

pothole, as the clearance between

the vehicle and the ground is smaller

than normal.

. Do not enter an automated car wash

with a punctured run-flat tire.

. It is recommended you have the

punctured tire inspected by an

INFINITI retailer or other authorized

repair shop. Replace the tire as soon

as possible if the tire is seriously

damaged.

If you have a flat tire and have to stop the

vehicle, follow the instructions below.

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Move the shift lever to the

P (Park) position.

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and

to signal professional road assistance

personnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

For the tire removing procedure, see “Jack-

ing up the vehicle and replacing tires” (P.8-

37).

REPAIRING A FLAT TIRE (for

models with emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit)

WARNING

. After using Emergency Tire Sealant

to repair a minor tire puncture, do not

drive the vehicle at speeds faster

than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

. Immediately after using the Emer-

gency Tire Sealant to repair a minor

tire puncture, take your vehicle to

inspect, and repair or replace the tire.

It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service. The

Emergency Tire Sealant cannot per-

manently seal a punctured tire. Con-

tinuing operation of the vehicle

without a permanent tire repair can

lead to a crash.

. INFINITI recommends using only

Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer

as soon as possible after using tire

repair sealant.

This vehicle does not have a spare tire. The

emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emer-

gency Tire Sealant) is supplied with the

vehicle instead of a spare tire. It can be used

to temporarily repair minor tire punctures.

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

CAUTION

. To avoid the emergency tire puncture

repair kit being damaged during sto-

rage or use:

— Only use the emergency tire

puncture repair kit on your vehi-

cle. Do not use it on other vehicles.

— Only use the kit to inflate the

tires of your vehicle and to check

the vehicle’s tire pressure.

— Only plug the compressor into a

12V DC car power point.

— Keep the kit free of water and

dirt.

— Do not disassemble or modify the

kit.

— Do not drop the kit or allow hard

impacts to the kit.

. Do not use the emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit under the following

conditions. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer or profes-

sional road assistance.

— when the sealant has passed its

expiration date (shown on the

label attached to the bottle)

In case of emergency 6-5

6-6 In case of emergency

— when the cut or the puncture is

approximately 0.25 in (6 mm) or

longer

— when the tire sidewall is damaged

— when the vehicle has been driven

with extremely low tire pressure

— when the tire has come off the

inside or the outside of the wheel.

— when the tire wheel is damaged

— when two or more tires are flat

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake.

4. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

5. Turn off the engine.

6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and

to signal professional road assistance

personnel that you need assistance.

7. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

. Make sure the parking brake is

securely applied and the transmission

is shifted into P (Park).

. Never repair tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This

is hazardous.

. Never repair tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for

professional road assistance.

JVE0418X

Getting emergency tire puncture

repair kit

Raise the trunk floor cover. (While pulling up

the center strap, fold down the right end of

the trunk floor cover to pull up the trunk

floor cover.) Take out the emergency tire

puncture repair kit located in the trunk.

The emergency tire puncture repair kit

consists of the following items:

. Tire sealant bottle

. Air compressor

. Speed restriction sticker

Before using emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit

. If any foreign object (for example, a

screw or nail) is embedded in the tire,

do not remove it.

. Check the expiration date of the sealant

(shown on the label attached to the

bottle). Never use a sealant whose

expiration date has passed.

Repairing tire

WARNING

Observe the following precautions when

using the tire repair compound.

. Swallowing the compound is danger-

ous. Immediately drink as much water

as possible and seek prompt medical

assistance.

. Rinse well with lots of water if the

compound comes into contact with

skin or eyes. If irritation persists, seek

prompt medical attention.

. Keep the repair compound out of the

reach of children.

NOTE:

Do not remove any nails or screws that have

penetrated the tire when performing re-

pairs.

JVE0014X

1. Take out the speed restriction sticker

from the air compressor*, then put it in a

location where the driver can see it while

driving.

*: The compressor shape may differ

depending on the models.

CAUTION

Do not put the speed restriction label on

the steering wheel pad, the speedometer

or the warning light locations.

In case of emergency 6-7

6-8 In case of emergency

SCE0868

2. Take the hose and the power plug

out of the air compressor. Remove the

cap of the bottle holder from the air

compressor.

SCE0869

3. Remove the cap from the tire sealant

bottle, and screw the bottle clockwise

onto the bottle holder. (Leave the bottle

seal intact. Screwing the bottle onto the

bottle holder will pierce the seal of the

bottle.)

4. Remove the cap from the tire valve on

the flat tire.

SCE0870

5. Remove the protective cap of the hose

and screw the hose securely onto the tire

valve. Make sure that the pressure

release valve

is securely tightened.

Make sure that the air compressor

switch is in the OFF (*) position, and

then insert its power plug into the power

outlet in the vehicle.

SCE0871

6. Push the ignition switch to the “ACC”

position. Then turn the compressor

switch to the ON (−) position and inflate

the tire up to the pressure that is

specified on the tire and loading infor-

mation label affixed to the driver’s side

pillar if possible, or to the minimum of 26

psi (180 kPa). Turn the air compressor

off briefly in order to check the tire

pressure with the pressure gauge.

If the tire is inflated to higher than the

specified pressure, lower the tire pres-

sure by releasing air with the pressure

release valve.

NOTE:

The compressor tire pressure gauge may

show a pressure reading of 87 psi (600

kPa) for about 30 seconds while inflat-

ing the tire. The pressure gauge is

indicating the pressure inside the sea-

lant can. When the sealant has been

injected into the tire the pressure gauge

will drop and indicate actual tire pres-

sure.

WARNING

. To avoid serious personal injury while

using the emergency tire puncture

repair kit:

— Securely tighten the compressor

hose to the tire valve. Failure to

do so can cause the sealant to

spray into the air and get into

your eyes or on the skin.

. Do not stand directly beside the

damaged tire while it is being inflated

because of the risk of the rupture. If

there are any cracks or bumps, turn

the compressor off immediately.

If the tire pressure does not increase to

26 psi (180 kPa) within 10 minutes, the

tire may be seriously damaged and the

tire cannot be repaired with this tire

puncture repair kit. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for servi-

cing.

7. When the tire pressure is at the specified

amount, turn the air compressor off. If

the pressure cannot be inflated to the

specified amount, the air compressor can

be turned off at the minimum of 26 psi

(180 kPa). Remove the power plug from

the power outlet and quickly remove the

hose from the tire valve. Attach the

protective cap and valve cap. Properly

stow the emergency tire puncture repair

kit in the trunk.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury when

stowing the emergency tire puncture

repair kit:

. Keep the sealant bottle screwed into

the compressor. Failure to do so can

cause the sealant to spray into the air

and get into your eyes or on the skin.

8. Immediately drive the vehicle for 10

minutes or 2 miles (3 km) at a speed of

50 MPH (80 km/h) or less.

9. After driving, make sure that the air

compressor switch is in the OFF (*)

In case of emergency 6-9

6-10 In case of emergency

position, then screw the hose securely

onto the tire valve. Check the tire

pressure with the pressure gauge. The

temporary repair is completed if the tire

pressure does not drop.

Make sure the pressure is adjusted to the

pressure that is specified on the tire and

loading information label before driving.

10. If the tire pressure drops, repeat the

steps from 5 to 9. If the pressure drops

again or under 19 psi (130 kPa), the tire

cannot be repaired with this tire punc-

ture repair kit. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this servi-

cing.

The sealant bottle and hose cannot be

reused to repair another punctured tire.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer to purchase replacements.

After repairing tire

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for tire repair/replacement as soon

as possible.

WARNING

. After using Emergency Tire Sealant

to repair a minor tire puncture, do not

drive the vehicle at speeds faster

than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

. Immediately after using Emergency

Tire Sealant to repair a minor tire

puncture, take your vehicle to in-

spect, and repair or replace the tire.

It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service. The

Emergency Tire Sealant cannot per-

manently seal a punctured tire. Con-

tinuing operation of the vehicle

without a permanent tire repair can

lead to a crash.

. INFINITI recommends using only

Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer

as soon as possible after using tire

repair sealant.

To start your engine with a booster battery,

the instructions and precautions below must

be followed.

WARNING

. If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

. Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

. Do not allow battery fluid to come

into contact with eyes, skin, clothing

or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulphuric acid solution

which can cause severe burns. If the

fluid should come into contact with

anything, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

. Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

. The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

. Whenever working on or near a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors (for example, goggles or

JUMP STARTING

industrial safety spectacles) and re-

move rings, metal bands, or any other

jewelry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

. Do not attempt to jump start a

frozen battery. It could explode and

cause serious injury.

. Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

JVE0282X

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage to

the charging system and cause personal

injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle

, position the two vehicles

and to bring the batteries into close

proximity to each other.

In case of emergency 6-11

6-12 In case of emergency

CAUTION

. Do not allow the two vehicles to

touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever

to the P (Park) position. Switch off all

unnecessary electrical systems (light,

heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with a

firmly wrung out moist cloth

to reduce

explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence

as illustrated (

? ? ? ).

CAUTION

. Always connect positive (+) to posi-

tive (+) and negative (−) to body

ground (as illustrated) − not to the

battery.

. Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that clamps do

not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle

at about 2,000 rpm, and start

the engine of the vehicle being jump

started

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, push the

ignition switch to the OFF position and

wait 10 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting your engine, carefully

disconnect the negative cable and then

the positive cable (

? ? ? ).

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).

Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to

cover the vent holes as it may be

contaminated with corrosive acid.

9. Put the battery cover and the engine

cover back to the original location.

Do not attempt to start the engine by

pushing.

CAUTION

. Automatic Transmission (AT) models

cannot be push-started or tow-

started. Attempting to do so may

cause transmission damage.

. Three-way catalyst equipped models

should not be started by pushing

since the three-way catalyst may be

damaged.

. Never try to start the vehicle by

towing it; when the engine starts,

the forward surge could cause the

vehicle to collide with the tow vehi-

cle.

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION

. Do not continue to drive if your

vehicle overheats. Doing so could

cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.

. To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while

the engine is still hot. When the

radiator cap is removed, pressurized

hot water will spurt out, possibly

causing serious injury.

. Do not open the hood if steam is

coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading),

or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect

abnormal noise, etc., take the following

steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,

apply the parking brake and move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the climate control. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maximum

hot and fan control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by climb-

ing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine

at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm)

until the temperature gauge indication

returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the

radiator before opening the hood. (If

steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the

engine.) Do not open the hood further

until no steam or coolant can be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is

leaking or the cooling fan does not run,

stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling

fan can start at any time.

7. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the reservoir tank with

the engine running. Add coolant to the

reservoir tank if necessary. Have your

vehicle repaired. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

In case of emergency 6-13

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-14 In case of emergency

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro-

vincial in Canada) and local regulations for

towing must be followed. Incorrect towing

equipment could damage your vehicle. Tow-

ing instructions are available from an

INFINITI retailer. Local service operators

are familiar with the applicable laws and

procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage to

your vehicle, INFINITI recommends that you

have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is

advisable to have the service operator care-

fully read the following precautions.

WARNING

. Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

. Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

. When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working con-

dition. If any unit is damaged, dollies

must be used.

. Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For information about towing your vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see “Flat

towing” (P.10-18) of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

SCE0967

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

INFINITI

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed

truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

. Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward), as this may

cause serious and expensive damage

to the transmission. If it is necessary

to tow the vehicle with the front

wheels raised, always use towing

dollies under the rear wheels.

. When towing rear wheel drive models

with the front wheels on the ground

or on towing dollies: Place the igni-

tion switch in the ACC or ON posi-

tion, and secure the steering wheel in

a straight-ahead position with a rope

or similar device.

In case of emergency 6-15

6-16 In case of emergency

JVE0348X

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

models

INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle

be placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow Intelligent AWD models with

any of the wheels on the ground as this

may cause serious and expensive da-

mage to the powertrain.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a

stuck vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious perso-

nal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

. Contact a professional towing ser-

vice to recover the vehicle if you have

any questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

. Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to main structural mem-

bers of the vehicle.

. Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

. Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

. Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the

vehicle. Never pull at an angle.

. Route recovery devices so they do

not touch any part of the vehicle

except the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device

designed specifically for vehicle recovery.

Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive).

Apply the accelerator as little as

possible to maintain the rocking mo-

tion.

Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R and D.

Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing

service to remove the vehicle.

WARNING

. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

. Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

In case of emergency 6-17

6-18 In case of emergency

MEMO

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................................................ 7-2

Washing .......................................................................... 7-2

Waxing ............................................................................ 7-2

Removing spots ............................................................ 7-3

Underbody ...................................................................... 7-3

Glass ................................................................................ 7-3

Wheels ............................................................................. 7-3

Chrome parts ................................................................ 7-4

Tire dressing ................................................................. 7-4

Cleaning interior ................................................................ 7-5

Leather cleaning kit (if so equipped) .................... 7-5

Air fresheners .............................................................. 7-5

Floor mats .................................................................... 7-6

Seat belts ...................................................................... 7-7

Corrosion protection ....................................................... 7-8

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion ........................................................ 7-8

Environmental factors influence the rate

of corrosion ................................................................. 7-8

To protect your vehicle from corrosion .............. 7-8

7-2 Appearance and care

In order to maintain the appearance of your

vehicle, it is important to take proper care of

it.

To protect the paint surface, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

. after a rainfall to prevent possible da-

mage from acid rain

. after driving on coastal roads

. when contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface

. when dust or mud builds up on the

surface

Whenever possible, store or park your

vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a

body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge

and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle

thoroughly using a mild soap, a special

vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing

liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot)

water.

CAUTION

. Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes,

especially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your car

wash to confirm that acid is not used.

. Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical de-

tergents, gasoline or solvents.

. Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body is

hot, as the surface may become

water-spotted.

. Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing caked-

on dirt or other foreign substances so

the paint surface is not scratched or

damaged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable

to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these

areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure

that the drain holes in the lower edge of the

door are open. Spray water under the body

and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and

wash away road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint

surface by using a damp chamois to dry the

vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove built-

up wax residue and to avoid a weathered

appearance before reapplying wax.

An INFINITI retailer can assist you in choos-

ing the proper product.

. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

. Do not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners

that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may

dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the paint surface to avoid lasting

damage or staining. Special cleaning pro-

ducts are available at an INFINITI retailer or

any automotive accessory stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the

underbody must be cleaned regularly. This

will prevent dirt and salt from building up

and causing the acceleration of corrosion on

the underbody and suspension. Before the

winter period and again in the spring, the

underseal must be checked and, if necessary,

re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust

film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for

glass to become coated with a film after the

vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner

and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based dis-

infectant cleaners. They could damage

the electrical conductors, radio antenna

elements or rear window defroster ele-

ments.

WHEELS

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

. Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside of

the vehicle is washed.

. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss

of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

. INFINITI recommends that the road

wheels be waxed to protect against road

salt in areas where it is used during

winter.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

Aluminum alloy wheels

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a

mild soap solution, especially during winter

months in areas where road salt is used. Salt

could discolor the wheels if not removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

. Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

. Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

. Rinse the wheel to completely re-

move the cleaner within 15 minutes

after the cleaner is applied.

Appearance and care 7-3

7-4 Appearance and care

Bright wheels (if so equipped)

The bright wheels use a different coating

process than typical aluminum alloy wheel

and they are not plated wheels. These

wheels are clear-coated and require the

following special cleaning. They should be

regularly washed with a soft sponge soaked

in a lot of water. After washing with water,

wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth and dry

completely. When there is chemical or tire

wax, or dirt such as an antifreeze agent on

the surface, wash them with water as soon

as possible.

CAUTION

. The surfaces of the wheels use a

different coating process than typical

aluminum alloy wheels. Do not use

aluminum alloy wheel cleaners or

abrasive cleaners to clean the wheels.

Using such cleaners could damage the

wheel surfaces.

. Do not use an automatic car wash if

the vehicle is equipped with bright

wheels. The wheel coating may be

damaged.

. Do not use a brush to wash the

wheels if the vehicle is equipped with

bright wheels. The wheel coating may

be damaged.

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the

finish.

TIRE DRESSING

INFINITI does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coat-

ing to the tires to help reduce discoloration

of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to

the tires, it may react with the coating and

form a compound. This compound may come

off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle

paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

. Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easily

with an oil-based tire dressing.

. Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire tread/

grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

. Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire tread/

grooves.

. Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe

the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean,

soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution,

then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order

to maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifica-

tion sensors. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and

result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

. Never use benzine, thinner, or any

similar material.

. For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dam-

pened with water. Never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or cause discoloration to the

lens.

. Do not spray any liquid such as water

on the meter lens. Spraying liquid

may cause the system to malfunction.

. Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to the leather surfaces

and should be removed promptly. Do

not use saddle soap, car waxes,

polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, sol-

vents, detergents or ammonia-based

cleaners as they may damage the

leather’s natural finish.

. Only use fabric protectors approved

by INFINITI.

. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

LEATHER CLEANING KIT (if so

equipped)

Spray onto the leather cleaning cloth, then

gently wipe the surface of leather. Use a dry

towel to absorb any excess moisture.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently

because soiling on such surfaces is much

more visible.

Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions supplied with the leather cleaning kit.

You can obtain the leather cleaning kit from

an INFINITI retailer or other authorized

repair shop.

CAUTION

Do not leave the leather cleaning kit

inside the vehicle. The leather cleaning

kit left in a closed vehicle can become

very hot.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could

affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air

freshener, take the following precautions:

. Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they con-

tact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the

Appearance and care 7-5

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-6 Appearance and care

air freshener in a location that allows it

to hang free and not contact an interior

surface.

. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration

when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions before using air fresh-

eners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury or

death:

. NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver front

position or install them upside down

or backwards.

. Use only genuine INFINITI floor mats

or equivalent floor mats that are

specifically designed for use in your

vehicle model and model year.

. Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat posi-

tioning hook. See “Floor mat installa-

tion” (P.7-6).

. Make sure the floor mat does not

interfere with pedal operation.

. Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

. After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure

they are properly installed.

The use of genuine INFINITI floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular cleaning

and replaced if they become excessively

worn.

JVA0023X

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat

positioning hook(s). The number and shape

of the floor mat positioning hook(s) for each

seating position varies depending on the

vehicle.

When installing genuine INFINITI floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided

with the floor mat and the following:

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so

that the mat grommet holes are aligned

with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook

(s) and ensure that the floor mat is

properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not

interfere with pedal operation. With the

ignition in the OFF position and the shift

lever in the P (Park) position, fully apply

and release all pedals. The floor mat

must not interfere with pedal operation

or prevent the pedal from returning to its

normal position. It is recommended you

see an INFINITI retailer for details about

installing the floor mats in your vehicle.

SAI0051

Positioning hooks

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap

solution. Allow the belts to dry completely

before using them.

See “Seat belts” (P.1-11).

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

Appearance and care 7-7

7-8 Appearance and care

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

. The accumulation of moisture-retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS IN-

FLUENCE THE RATE OF COR-

ROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the

vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-

sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle, and should be

removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas

where the temperatures stay above freezing

where atmospheric pollution exists, or where

road salt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the

rate of corrosion to those parts which are

not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use will accelerate the corrosion process.

Road salt will also accelerate the disintegra-

tion of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION

. Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep

the vehicle clean.

. Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumulation.

. Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with

water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other

debris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

. Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corro-

sion and deterioration of underbody compo-

nents such as the exhaust system, fuel and

brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and

fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended you consult an

INFINITI retailer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ............................................... 8-2

Engine compartment check locations ......................... 8-3

VR30DDTT engine ..................................................... 8-3

Engine cooling system ..................................................... 8-3

Checking engine coolant level ................................ 8-4

Changing engine coolant .......................................... 8-5

Intercooler cooling system ............................................. 8-5

Checking intercooler coolant level ......................... 8-6

Engine oil ............................................................................. 8-6

Checking engine oil level ........................................... 8-6

Changing engine oil and filter .................................. 8-7

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) .......................... 8-9

Brake fluid ........................................................................... 8-9

Window washer fluid ................................................... 8-10

Battery ............................................................................... 8-11

Checking battery fluid level .................................... 8-12

Jump starting ............................................................. 8-13

Variable voltage control system ................................. 8-13

Drive belts ......................................................................... 8-13

Spark plugs ....................................................................... 8-14

Replacing spark plugs .............................................. 8-14

Air cleaner ........................................................................ 8-15

Windshield wiper blades .............................................. 8-15

Cleaning ..................................................................... 8-15

Replacing ................................................................... 8-16

Brakes ................................................................................ 8-16

Self-adjusting brakes ............................................. 8-16

Brake pad wear warning ....................................... 8-16

Fuses .................................................................................. 8-17

Engine compartment .............................................. 8-17

Passenger compartment ....................................... 8-18

Intelligent Key battery replacement ......................... 8-19

Lights ................................................................................. 8-22

Headlights ................................................................. 8-22

Exterior and interior lights .................................... 8-23

Wheels and tires ............................................................. 8-25

Tire pressure ............................................................. 8-25

Tire labeling .............................................................. 8-29

Types of tires ........................................................... 8-31

Tire chains ................................................................. 8-33

Changing wheels and tires ................................... 8-33

Jacking up the vehicle and replacing tires ....... 8-37

8-2 Do-it-yourself

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury to

yourself or damage to the vehicle. The

following are general precautions which

should be closely observed.

WARNING

. Park the vehicle on a level surface,

apply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the

vehicle from moving. Move the shift

lever to P (Park).

. Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position when per-

forming any parts replacement or

repairs.

. Never connect or disconnect the

battery or any transistorized compo-

nent while the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

. Never leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component har-

nesses disconnected while the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

. If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from moving

fans, belts and any other moving

parts.

. It is advisable to secure or remove

any loose clothing and remove any

jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.

before working on your vehicle.

. Always wear eye protection when-

ever you work on your vehicle.

. If you must run the engine in an

enclosed space such as a garage, be

sure there is proper ventilation for

exhaust gases to escape.

. Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

. Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from fuel tank and the

battery.

. Your vehicle is equipped with an

automatic engine cooling fan. It may

come on at any time without warn-

ing, even if the ignition key is in the

OFF position and the engine is not

running. To avoid injury, always dis-

connect the negative battery cable

before working near the fan.

. Because the fuel lines are under high

pressure even when the engine is off,

it is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for service of the

fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION

. Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

. Avoid direct contact with used en-

gine oil and coolant. Improperly dis-

posed engine oil, coolant, and/or

other vehicle fluids can damage the

environment. Always conform to lo-

cal regulations for disposal of vehicle

fluid.

This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives in-

structions regarding only those items which

are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also

available. (See “Owner’s Manual/Service

Manual order information” (P.10-22).)

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and could

affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended you

have it done by an INFINITI retailer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

JVC0968X

VR30DDTT ENGINE

1. Battery

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse/fusible link holder

6. Air cleaner

7. Engine drive belt location

8. Radiator filler cap

9 Intercooler cooling reservoir

10. Engine coolant reservoir

11. Window washer fluid reservoir

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide

year-round anti-freeze and coolant protec-

tion. The anti-freeze solution contains rust

and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine

cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

. Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Wait until the

engine and radiator cool down. Ser-

ious burns could be caused by high

pressure fluid escaping from the

radiator. See precautions in “If your

vehicle overheats” (P.6-13) of this

manual.

. The radiator is equipped with a

pressure type radiator cap. To pre-

vent engine damage, use only a

genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

. Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Addi-

tives may clog the cooling system and

cause damage to the engine, trans-

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-4 Do-it-yourself

mission and/or cooling system.

. When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-

diluted to provide antifreeze protec-

tion to −34°F (−37°C). If additional

freeze protection is needed due to

weather where you operate your

vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) con-

centrate following the directions on

the container. If an equivalent cool-

ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is

used, follow the coolant manufac-

ture’s instructions to maintain mini-

mum antifreeze protection to −34°F

(−37°C). The use of other types of

coolant solutions other than Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (blue) or equivalent may damage

the engine cooling system.

. The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000

km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type

of coolant other than Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant

(green), or the use of non-distilled

water will reduce the life expectancy

of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to

the “9. Maintenance and schedules”

section of this manual for more de-

tails.

JVM0652X

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank

when the engine is running and after it

reaches normal operating temperature. If

the coolant level is below MIN level

, add

coolant up to the MAX level

. If the

reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant

level in the radiator when the engine is cold.

If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator,

fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler

cap above the radiator upper hose opening

and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the

MAX level

. Put on the filler cap above the

radiator upper hose and with the reservoir

cap open, start the engine. Run the engine

until it reaches normal operating tempera-

ture. Add coolant up to the MAX level

Tighten the cap securely after adding engine

coolant.

If the cooling system requires coolant fre-

quently, have it checked. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

It is recommended that major cooling system

repairs be performed by an INFINITI retailer.

The service procedures can be found in the

appropriate INFINITI Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

. To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the

engine is hot.

. Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns could

be caused by high pressure fluid

escaping from the radiator.

. Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

. Keep coolant out of reach of children

and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-

erly. Check your local regulations.

The intercooler cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide

year-round anti-freeze and coolant protec-

tion. The antifreeze solution contains rust

and corrosion inhibitors. Additional inter-

cooler cooling system additives are not

necessary.

WARNING

. Never remove the coolant reservoir

cap when the engine is hot. Wait until

the engine cools down. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure fluid

escaping from the coolant reservoir.

. The intercooler reservoir is equipped

with a pressure type cap. To prevent

engine and intercooler damage, use

only a genuine NISSAN intercooler

reservoir cap.

CAUTION

. Never use any additives in the cool-

ant such as radiator sealer in the

cooling system. This may cause da-

mage to the intercooler.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

INTERCOOLER COOLING SYSTEM

8-6 Do-it-yourself

. When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-

diluted to provide antifreeze protec-

tion to −34°F(−37°C). If additional

freeze protection is needed due to

weather where you operate your

vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) con-

centrate following the directions on

the container. If an equivalent cool-

ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is

used, follow the coolant manufac-

turer’s instructions to maintain mini-

mum antifreeze protection to −34°F

(−37°C). The use of other types of

coolant solutions other than Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (blue) or equivalent may damage

the Intercooler cooling system.

JVM0653X

CHECKING INTERCOOLER

COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is

below the MIN level

, add coolant to the

MAX level

If the intercooler cooling system frequently

requires coolant, have it checked. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service.

JVM0654X

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15

minutes for the oil to drain back into the

oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the

oil level. It should be within the range

If the oil level is below

, remove the oil

filler cap and pour recommended oil

through the opening. Do not overfill

ENGINE OIL

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the break-

in period, depending on the severity of

operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the

engine, and such damage is not covered

by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND

FILTER

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than

15 minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a

suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.

Place the safety jack stands under the

vehicle jack-up points.

A suitable adapter should be attached

to the jack stand saddle.

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

Remove the small plastic clip at the

center point of the undercover.

Then remove the other bolts that hold

the undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and sup-

port points are used to avoid vehicle

damage.

JVM0668X

2WD models

JVM0669X

AWD models

Do-it-yourself 8-7

8-8 Do-it-yourself

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug

with a wrench

and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the

engine oil is hot.

Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

Check your local regulations.

4. (Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the

engine oil filter change is needed.)

Loosen the oil filter

with an oil filter

wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it

by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur-

face with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket

remaining on the mounting surface of

the engine. Failure to do so could lead to

engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a

slight resistance is felt, then tighten

additionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb

(14.7 to 20.6 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a

new washer. Securely tighten the drain

plug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29.4 to 39.2 N·m)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill engine with recommended oil and

install the oil filler cap securely.

See “Capacities and recommended

fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2) for drain and

refill capacity. The drain and refill capa-

city depends on the oil temperature and

drain time. Use these specifications for

reference only. Always use the dipstick

to determine the proper amount of oil in

the engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter.

Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than

15 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into posi-

tion as the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip

out.

b. Hold the engine undercover into posi-

tion.

c. Insert the clip through the undercover

into the hole in the frame, then push

the center of the clip in to lock the clip

in place.

d. Install the other bolts that hold the

undercover in place. Be careful not to

strip the bolts or over-tighten them.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the

ground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

WARNING

. Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

. Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

. Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

When checking or replacement is required,

we recommend an INFINITI retailer for

servicing.

CAUTION

. It is recommended that you use only

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do

not mix with other fluids.

. Using automatic transmission fluid

other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S

ATF or equivalent may cause dete-

rioration in driveability and auto-

matic transmission durability, and

may damage the automatic transmis-

sion. Damage caused by the use of

fluid other than as recommended is

not covered by the INFINITI new

vehicle limited warranty.

For further brake fluid information, see

“Capacities and recommended fluids/lubri-

cants” (P.10-2) of this manual.

WARNING

. Use only new fluid from a sealed

container. Old, inferior or contami-

nated fluid may damage the brake

system. The use of improper fluids

can damage the brake system and

affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

. Clean the filler cap before removing.

. Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked con-

tainers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces.

This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, wash the surface with water.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

FLUID (ATF)

BRAKE FLUID

8-10 Do-it-yourself

JVM0731X

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the

fluid is below the MIN line

or the brake

warning light comes on, add Genuine

NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or

equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line

If fluid must be added frequently, the system

should be checked. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

JVM0253X

WARNING

Antifreeze is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of the reach of children.

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir per-

iodically. Add window washer fluid when the

low window washer fluid warning appears in

the vehicle information display.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift

the cap off the reservoir and pour the

window washer fluid into the reservoir

opening.

To check the window washer fluid level, use

your finger to plug the hole

of the cap/

tube assembly, then remove it from the

reservoir. If there is no fluid in the tube,

add fluid.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture

ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of window washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

. Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the

paint.

. Do not fill the window washer re-

servoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the win-

dow washer reservoir.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir. Do not use the window

washer reservoir to mix the washer

fluid concentrate and water.

. Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of

baking soda and water.

. Make certain the terminal connections

are clean and securely tightened.

. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days

or longer, disconnect the negative (−)

battery terminal cable to prevent dis-

charging it.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electro-

nic accessories that consume battery

power when the engine is not running

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from

the battery terminal, do not close either

of front doors. The automatic window

adjusting function will not work, and the

side roof panel may be damaged.

To disconnect the negative (−) battery

terminal, perform the procedure in the

following order. Otherwise, the window

and the side roof panel may contact and be

damaged.

1. Close the windows.

2. Open the hood.

3. Close and lock all the doors.

4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery

terminal.

5. Securely close the hood.

To connect the negative (−) battery terminal,

perform the procedure in the following

order. Otherwise, the window and the side

roof panel may contact and be damaged.

1. Unlock and open the driver side door. Do

not close the door.

2. Open the hood.

3. Connect the negative (−) battery term-

inal. Then close the hood.

4. Fully open the driver side door window.

5. Close the driver side door and the

window.

WARNING

. Do not expose the battery to flames

or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas

Do-it-yourself 8-11

BATTERY

8-12 Do-it-yourself

generated by the battery is explosive.

Do not allow battery fluid to contact

your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted

surfaces. After touching a battery or

battery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If

the acid contacts your eyes, skin or

clothing, immediately flush with

water for at least 15 minutes and

seek medical attention.

. Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the battery is low. Low battery

fluid can cause a higher load on the

battery which can generate heat,

reduce battery life, and in some cases

lead to an explosion.

. When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

. Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after hand-

ling.

. Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

DI0137MA

CHECKING BATTERY FLUID LE-

VEL

Check the fluid level in each cell (remove the

battery cover if it is necessary). It should be

between the UPPER LEVEL

and LOWER

LEVEL

lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only

distilled water to bring the level to the

indicator in each filler opening. Do not

overfill.

SDI1480C

1. Remove the cell plugs .

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER

LEVEL

line.

If the side of the battery is not clear,

check the distilled water level by looking

directly above the cell; the condition

indicates OK and the conditions needs

more to be added.

3. Tighten cell plugs

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe conditions require frequent

checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump

starting” (P.6-10). If the engine does not

start by jump starting, the battery may have

to be replaced. It is recommended you visit

an INFINITI retailer for this service.

CAUTION

. Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will

bypass the variable voltage control

system and the vehicle battery may

not charge completely.

. Use electrical accessories with the

engine running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system mea-

sures the amount of electrical discharge

from the battery and controls voltage gen-

erated by the generator.

JVM0655X

1. Water pump

2. Alternator

3. Drive belt auto-tensioner

4. Crankshaft pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position before servicing drive

belts. The engine could rotate unexpect-

edly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of

unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

DRIVE BELTS

8-14 Do-it-yourself

If the belt is in poor condition or loose,

have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for

this service.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for

condition and tension in accordance with

the maintenance schedule shown in the

“9. Maintenance and schedules” section.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and the ignition

switch are off and that the parking

brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to

remove the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI2020

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, it is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the iridium-

tipped spark plugs as frequently as the

conventional type spark plugs since they will

last much longer. Follow the maintenance

schedule shown in the “9. Maintenance and

schedules” section, but do not reuse them by

cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with recom-

mended or equivalent ones.

SPARK PLUGS

WARNING

. Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops flame

if the engine backfires. If it is not

there, and the engine backfires, you

could be burned. Do not drive with

the air cleaner removed, and be care-

ful when working on the engine with

the air cleaner removed.

. Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury.

The filter element should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the main-

tenance schedule shown in the “9. Main-

tenance and schedules” section. When

replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the

air cleaner housing and the cover with a

damp cloth.

When maintenance is required, it is recom-

mended you contact an INFINITI retailer for

servicing.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other materi-

al may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form

when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild

detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear

water. If your windshield is still not clear

after cleaning the blades and using the

wiper, replace the blades.

Worn windshield wiper blades can damage

the windshield and impair driver vision.

When a washer nozzle is clogged

If a washer nozzle is clogged or any

malfunction occurs, have it checked. It is

recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer

for this service. Do not attempt to clean the

nozzle using a needle or a pin. Doing so may

damage the nozzle.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

AIR CLEANER WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-16 Do-it-yourself

SDI2048

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

Before replacing the wiper blades, the wiper

should be in the fully up position to avoid

scratching the engine hood or damaging the

wiper arm. To pull up the wiper arm, see

“Wiper and washer switch” (P.2-34).

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the release tab , and then move

the wiper blade down the wiper arm

while pushing the release tab to remove.

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until a click sounds.

4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in

the groove.

CAUTION

. After wiper blade replacement, re-

turn the wiper arm to its original

position;

otherwise it may be damaged when

the hood is opened.

. Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arm may be

damaged from wind pressure.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have

the brakes checked. It is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time

the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brake pedal height does not return to

normal. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this service.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a brake pad requires repla-

cement, it will make a high pitched scraping

sound when the vehicle is in motion. This

scraping sound will first occur only when the

brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of

the brake pad, the sound will always be

heard even if the brake pedal is not

depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon

as possible if the wear warning sound is

heard.

BRAKES

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise

during light to moderate stops is normal and

does not affect the function or performance

of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should be

followed. For additional information, see the

maintenance schedule shown in the “9.

Maintenance and schedules” section.

JVM0255X

JVM0734X

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF or LOCK position and the

headlight switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder

cover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

FUSES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

SDI1754

5. If the fuse is open , replace it with a

new fuse

. Spare fuses are stored in the

passenger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the

electrical system checked and repaired.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate

and fuses are in good condition, check the

fusible links. If any of these fusible links are

melted, replace only with genuine INFINITI

parts.

JVM0256X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF or LOCK position and the

headlight switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new

fuse.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the

electrical system checked and repaired.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service. Spare fuses are

stored in the fuse box.

JVM0257X

Extended storage fuse switch (if so

equipped)

To reduce battery drain, the extended

storage fuse switch comes from the factory

switched off. Prior to delivery of your

vehicle, the switch is pushed in (switched

on) and should always remain on.

If the extended storage fuse switch is not

pushed in (switched on), the “Shipping Mode

On, Push Storage Fuse” warning may appear

in the vehicle information display. See “19.

Extended storage fuse warning” (P.2-24).

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

remove the extended storage fuse switch

and check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

If the extended storage fuse switch mal-

functions or if the fuse is open, it is not

necessary to replace the switch. In this case,

remove the extended storage fuse switch

and replace it with a new fuse of the same

rating.

How to remove the extended storage fuse

switch:

1. To remove the extended storage fuse

switch, be sure the ignition switch is in

the OFF or LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the

OFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs

found on each

side of the storage fuse switch.

5. Pull the storage fuse switch straight out

from the fuse box

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to

swallow the battery and removed parts.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

REPLACEMENT

8-20 Do-it-yourself

WAI0070X

To replace the battery:

1. Release the lock knob at the back of the

Intelligent Key and remove the mechan-

ical key.

2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver wrapped

with a cloth into the slit of the corner and

twist it to separate the upper part from

the lower part.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery:

CR2032 or equivalent

Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as it could cause a

malfunction.

Hold the battery by the edges. Hold-

ing the battery across the contact

points will seriously deplete the sto-

rage capacity.

Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the case.

WAI0071X

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower

parts

, and then push them together

until it is securely closed.

5. Operate the buttons to check its opera-

tion.

If you need any assistance for replacement,

it is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA

FCC ID: KR5TXN7

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exposure limits set forth for portable use

conditions.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

8-22 Do-it-yourself

WAI0001X

1. Headlight (high-beam)

2. Headlight (low-beam)

3. Map light

4. Front side marker light

5. Side turn signal light

6. Fog light

7. Parking light, daytime running light and

front turn signal light

8. Step light

9. Courtesy light

10. Tail light

11. High-mounted stop light

12. Trunk light

13. Rear side marker light

14. Tail/Stop light

15. Stop light

16. Rear turn signal light

17. Back-up light

18. License plate light

HEADLIGHTS

If replacement is required, it is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of

the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash.

A temperature difference between the inside

and the outside of the lens causes the fog.

This is not a malfunction. If large drops of

LIGHTS

water collect inside the lens, it is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight*

High beams LED —

Low beams LED —

Front fog light* LED —

Parking light/Daytime running light/Front turn

signal light*

LED —

Front side marker light* LED —

Side turn signal light* LED —

Rear combination light*

back-up LED —

rear turn signal LED —

tail LED —

stop LED —

tail/stop LED —

rear side marker LED —

License plate light* LED —

Courtesy light* LED —

Map light* LED —

Vanity mirror light* 1.8 —

Step light 5 —

Console box light* 2 —

Glove box light* 1.4 —

Inside door handle light (if so equipped)* LED —

Door trim light (if so equipped)* LED —

Front cup holder light* LED —

Footwell light* LED —

Do-it-yourself 8-23

8-24 Do-it-yourself

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Trunk light 3.4 —

High-mounted stop light* LED —

*: It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for replacement.

NOTE: It is recommended that you check

with the Parts Department at an INFINITI

retailer for the latest information about

parts.

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or

F. When replacing a bulb, first remove the

lens and/or cover.

SDI1679

SDI2330

Step light

SDI1258A

Trunk light

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” (P.6-3).

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufacturer

for the possible influences before use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except the

spare. When the low tire pressure warning

light is lit and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add

Air” warning appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display, one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect

a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a

flat tire while driving).

For more details, see “Low tire pressure

warning light” (P.2-14),“Tire Pressure Mon-

itoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5) and “Tire

Do-it-yourself 8-25

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-26 Do-it-yourself

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-

3).

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure of the tires (in-

cluding the spare) often and always

prior to long distance trips. The

recommended tire pressure specifica-

tions are shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label under the

“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire

and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked

regularly because:

. Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

. Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-

jects or if the vehicle strikes a curb

while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle

has been parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at

moderate speeds.

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator

provides visual and audible signals

outside the vehicle for inflating the

tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure. (See “TPMS with Tire Infla-

tion Indicator” (P.5-8) about the

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator.)

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

. Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

. The Gross Vehicle Weight rat-

ing (GVWR) is located on the F.

M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. The

vehicle weight capacity is indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading

Information label. Do not load

your vehicle beyond this capa-

city. Overloading your vehicle

may result in reduced tire life,

unsafe operating conditions

due to premature tire failure,

or unfavorable handling char-

acteristics and could also lead

to a serious accident. Loading

beyond the specified capacity

may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

. Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

. For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

SDI2567

Tire and Loading Information label

Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can be

seated in the vehicle.

Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle

loading information” (P.10-15).

Original size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle

at the factory.

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the

tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are consid-

ered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

at moderate speeds. The recom-

mended cold tire inflation is set

by the manufacturer to provide

the best balance of tire wear,

vehicle handling, driveability, tire

noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s

GVWR.

Tire size — see “Tire labeling”

(P.8-29).

Spare tire size or compact spare

tire size (if so equipped)

Do-it-yourself 8-27

8-28 Do-it-yourself

SDI1949

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press

too hard or force the valve stem

sideways, or air will escape. If the

hissing sound of air escaping from

the tire is heard while checking the

pressure, reposition the gauge to

eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare it to the

specification shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip

of the gauge stem to release

pressure. Recheck the pressure

and add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

SIZE

COLD

TIRE IN-

FLATION

PRES-

SURE

FRONT

ORIGI-

NAL

TIRE

P255/40R-

F19 96V

240 kPa,

35 PSI

P255/35-

R20 97V XL

260 kPa,

38 PSI

255/35R20

97Y XL

280 kPa,

41 PSI

REAR

ORIGI-

NAL

TIRE

P255/40R-

F19 96V

240 kPa,

35 PSI

P255/35-

R20 97V XL

260 kPa,

38 PSI

275/30R20

97Y XL

260 kPa,

38 PSI

SDI1575

Example

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized informa-

tion on the sidewall of all tires. This

information identifies and describes

the fundamental characteristics of

the tire and also provides the tire

identification number (TIN) for safety

standard certification. The TIN can be

used to identify the tire in case of a

recall.

SDI1606

Example

Tire size (example: P215/60R16

94H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is

designed for passenger vehicles.

(Not all tires have this informa-

tion.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (60): This num-

ber, known as the aspect ratio,

gives the tire’s ratio of height to

width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

F: The “F” after “R” indicates Self-

Supporting type run-flat tire.

5. Two-digit number (16): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter in

inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (94):

This number is the tire’s load index.

It is a measurement of how much

weight each tire can support. You

may not find this information on all

tires because it is not required by

law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

8-30 Do-it-yourself

JVM0694X

Example

TIN (Tire Identification Number) for

a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-

partment of Transportation”. The

symbol can be placed above, be-

low or to the left or right of the

Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)

5. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For

example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003. If

these numbers are missing, then

look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount of

air pressure that should be put in the

tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that can

be carried by the tire. When replacing

the tires on the vehicle, always use a

tire that has the same load rating as

the factory installed tire.

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an

inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tube-

less”).

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire

has radial structure.

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, In-

tended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the

sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears manu-

facturer, brand and/or model name

molding that is higher or deeper than

the same molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or (2) the outward

facing sidewall of an asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that

must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

. When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(Example: Summer, All Season or

Snow) and construction. An INFINITI

retailer may be able to help you with

information about tire type, size,

speed rating and availability.

. Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed

rating of the tire.

. Replacing tires with those not origin-

ally specified by INFINITI could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

. For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety

Information” (Canada) in the War-

ranty Information Booklet.

All season tires

INFINITI specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on

the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better

snow traction than All Season tires and may

be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

INFINITI specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance on

dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice. Sum-

mer tires do not have the tire traction rating

M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy

or icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the

use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on

all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rating

to the original equipment tires. If you do not,

it can adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed

ratings than factory equipped tires and may

not match the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum speed

rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their

use. Check local, state and provincial laws

before installing studded tires. Skid and

traction capabilities of studded snow tires,

on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than

that of non-studded snow tires.

Run-flat tires

Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires.

You can continue driving to a safe location

even if they are punctured. Always use run-

flat tires of the specified size on all four

wheels. Mixing tire sizes or construction may

reduce vehicle handling stability. If neces-

sary, contact an INFINITI retailer for assis-

tance.

Frequently check the tire pressure and adjust

pressure of each tire properly. The tire

pressure can be also checked in the vehicle

information display.

It can be difficult to tell if a run-flat tire is

under-inflated or flat. Check the tire pres-

sures as described earlier in this section. If

the tire becomes under-inflated while driv-

ing, the low tire pressure warning light will

illuminate. If the tire becomes flat while

driving, the low tire pressure warning light

Do-it-yourself 8-31

8-32 Do-it-yourself

and the “Flat Tire - Visit dealer” warning will

appear.

Low tire pressure:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the low tire pressure warning light

will illuminate.

Flat tire:

If the vehicle is being driven with one or more

flat tires, the low tire pressure warning light

will illuminate continuously and a chime will

sound for 10 seconds. A “Flat Tire - Visit

dealer” warning also appears in the vehicle

information display.

The chime will only sound at the first

indication of a flat tire and the warning light

will illuminate continuously. When the flat

tire warning is activated, have the system

reset and the tire checked, and replaced if

necessary. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for these services. Even if

the tire is inflated to the specified COLD tire

pressure, the warning light will continue to

illuminate until the system is reset by an

INFINITI retailer.

If the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates continuously and the “Flat Tire - Visit

dealer” warning appears in the vehicle

information display:

. Do not exceed 50 MPH (80 km/h).

. Increase your following distance to allow

for increased stopping distances.

. Avoid sudden maneuvers, hard cornering

and hard braking.

WARNING

. Although you can continue driving

with a punctured run-flat tire, re-

member that vehicle handling stabi-

lity is reduced, which could lead to an

accident and personal injury. Also,

driving a long distance at high speeds

may damage the tire.

. Do not drive at speeds above 50

MPH (80 km/h) and do not drive

more than approximately 93 miles

(150 km) with a punctured run-flat

tire. The actual distance the vehicle

can be driven on a flat tire depends on

outside temperature, vehicle load,

road conditions and other factors.

. Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid

hard cornering or braking, which may

cause you to lose control of the

vehicle.

. If you detect any unusual sounds or

vibrations while driving with a punc-

tured run-flat tire, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. The tire may be

seriously damaged and need to be

replaced.

CAUTION

. Never install tire chains on a punctu-

red run-flat tire, as this could damage

your vehicle.

. Avoid driving over any projection or

pothole, as the clearance between

the vehicle and the ground is smaller

than normal.

. Do not enter an automated car wash

with a punctured run-flat tire.

. It is recommended you have the

punctured tire inspected by an

INFINITI retailer or other authorized

repair shop. Replace the tire as soon

as possible if the tire is seriously

damaged.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be in-

stalled on P255/40RF19,

P255/35R20, 255/35R20 and

275/30R20 tires. Doing so will cause

damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use

tire chains/cables, you should install

245/40RF19 run-flat tires or

245/40R19 non run-flat tires on your

vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord-

ing to location. Check the local laws before

installing tire chains. When installing tire

chains, make sure they are the proper size

for the tires on your vehicle and are installed

according to the chain manufacturer’s sug-

gestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Class

“S” chains are used on vehicles with re-

stricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles

that can use Class “S” chains are designed to

meet the SAE standard minimum clearances

between the tire and the closest vehicle

suspension or body component required to

accommodate the use of a winter traction

device (tire chains or cables). The minimum

clearances are determined using the factory

equipped tire size. Other types may damage

your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when

recommended by the tire chain manufac-

turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of

the tire chain must be secured or removed to

prevent the possibility of whipping action

damage to the fenders or underbody. If

possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle

when using tire chains. In addition, drive at

a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle

may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

and performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire (if so equipped). Never

install tire chains on a punctured run-flat tire

(if so equipped), as this could damage your

vehicle.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving

with tire chains in such conditions can cause

damage to the various mechanisms of the

vehicle due to some overstress.

SDI1662

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation (models equipped with

same size tires on all wheels)

INFINITI recommends rotating the

tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

(See “Flat tire” (P.6-3) for tire repla-

cing procedures.)

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

Do-it-yourself 8-33

8-34 Do-it-yourself

The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-

tened to the specification at all times.

It is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to the specification at each

tire rotation interval.

WARNING

. After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

. Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

. Do not include the T-type spare

tire or any other small size

spare tire in the tire rotation.

. For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

After the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, it may take a period

of time for the tire pressure to be

displayed in the vehicle information

display while the vehicle is driven.

Depending on the radio wave circum-

stance, tire pressure may not cor-

rectly be displayed.

Tire rotation (models equipped with

different size tires on front and rear)

Tires cannot be rotated on this vehi-

cle, as front tires are a different size

from rear tires.

A pin is on the front brake rotor to

prevent the rear wheels from being

installed in place of the front wheels.

The spare tire can be installed in place

of the front and rear wheels. When

installing the spare tire in the front

wheel, the hole in the spare tire wheel

must be aligned with the pin on the

brake rotor.

WARNING

. If your vehicle is equipped with

different size front and rear

tires, never install the rear

tire/wheel on the front of the

vehicle. Doing so can damage

the vehicle or tire. Damage to

the tire may result in a sudden

loss of air pressure which may

cause loss of vehicle control in

some driving conditions and

cause a collision and personal

injury.

. Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

. For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

After the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, it may take a period

of time for the tire pressure to be

displayed in the vehicle information

display while the vehicle is driven.

Depending on the radio wave circum-

stance, tire pressure may not cor-

rectly be displayed.

SDI1663

: Wear indicator

: Wear indicator location mark. The

locations are shown by “

”, “TWI”,

etc. depending on tire types.

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

. Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bul-

ging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

. The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

. Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician, because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

. Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious perso-

nal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, it is re-

commended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for this ser-

vice.

. For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load carrying

capacity as originally equipped. (See “Speci-

fications” (P.10-8) for recommended types

and sizes of tires and wheels.)

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, it may take a period of time for the

tire pressure to be displayed while the

vehicle is driven. Depending on the radio

wave circumstance, tire pressure may not

correctly be displayed.

WARNING

. The use of tires other than those

recommended or the mixed use of

tires of different brands, construc-

tion (bias, bias-belted, radial or run-

flat), or tread patterns can adversely

affect the ride, braking, handling,

ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-

ance, tire chain clearance, speed-

ometer calibration, headlight aim

and bumper height. Some of these

effects may lead to accidents and

could result in serious personal injury.

. For Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models,

if your vehicle was originally

equipped with 4 tires that were the

same size and you are only replacing

2 of the 4 tires, install the new tires

on the rear axle. Placing new tires on

the front axle may cause loss of

vehicle control in some driving condi-

tions and cause an accident and

personal injury.

. If the wheels are changed for any

reason, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear,

degrade vehicle handling character-

istics and/or interference with the

brake discs/drums. Such interference

can lead to decreased braking effi-

ciency and/or early brake pad/shoe

wear. See “Wheels and tires” (P.10-

9) of this manual for wheel off-set

dimensions.

. Since the spare tire is not equipped

with the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced, the

TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash

for approximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute. Have

your tires replaced and/or TPMS

system reset as soon as possible. It

is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for these services.

. Replacing tires with those not origin-

ally specified by INFINITI could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

. The TPMS sensor may be damaged if

it is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

. When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. It is

recommended you contact an

INFINITI retailer for ID registration.

. Do not use a valve stem cap that is

not specified by INFINITI. The valve

stem cap may become stuck.

. Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and

cause a malfunction or loss of pres-

sure.

. Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been

repaired. Such wheels or tires could

have structural damage and could fail

without warning.

. The use of retread tire is not recom-

mended.

. For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety

Information” (Canada) in the War-

ranty Information Booklet.

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

models

CAUTION

. Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), and tread pattern

on all four wheels. Failure to do so

may result in a circumference differ-

ence between tires on the front and

rear axles which will cause excessive

tire wear and may damage the trans-

mission, transfer case and differential

gears.

. ONLY use spare tires specified for

the Intelligent AWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with

tires of the same size, brand, construction

and tread pattern. The tire pressure and

wheel alignment should also be checked and

corrected as necessary. It is recommended

you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle hand-

ling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performed

with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin

balancing the wheels on the vehicle could

lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

See “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2) for details

about care of the wheels.

Emergency tire puncture repair kit

(if so equipped)

The emergency tire puncture repair kit

(Emergency Tire Sealant) is supplied with

the vehicle instead of a spare tire. It can be

used to temporarily repair minor tire punc-

tures. If possible, have the vehicle towed to a

facility that can repair or replace the flat tire.

Using the emergency tire puncture repair kit

may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensor and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate.

See “Flat tire” (P.6-3) for more details.

JACKING UP THE VEHICLE AND

REPLACING TIRES

This section contains the information about

the vehicle jack-up procedures and the tire

replacement.

NOTE:

Jacking tools are not equipped as standard

with this vehicle. It is recommended you

contact an INFINITI retailer about acquiring

the tools.

For models with run-flat tires, you can

continue driving to a safe location even if

they are punctured. (See “Run-flat tires”

(P.6-4) and “Run-flat tires” (P.8-31).)

For models with the emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit, you can temporarily fix a

minor tire puncture using it. (See “Repairing

a flat tire (for models with emergency tire

puncture repair kit)” (P.6-5).)

WARNING

. Make sure the parking brake is

securely applied and the transmission

into the P (Park) position.

. Never change tires when the vehicle

is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

8-38 Do-it-yourself

This is hazardous.

. Never change tires if oncoming traf-

fic is close to your vehicle. Wait for

professional road assistance.

MCE0001A

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the

flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving

when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Jacking up the vehicle and removing

a tire

WARNING

. Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

. Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

. Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

. Never use blocks on or under the jack.

. Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause

the vehicle to move. This is especially

true for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

. Do not allow passengers to stay in

the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

JVE0346X

Jack-up point

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head

between the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

SCE0504

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns

by turning counterclockwise with the

wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the

wheel nuts until the tire is off the

ground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire

clears the ground. To lift the vehicle,

securely hold the jack lever and rod with

both hands as shown above. Remove the

wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

Installing a tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the tire on and tighten the

wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the

sequence illustrated (

, , , , ) until

they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence as illu-

strated. Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

8-40 Do-it-yourself

This could cause an accident.

. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

. Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a

torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-

tened to specification at all times. It

is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to specifications at each

lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD

pressure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked for

three hours or more or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on

the Tire and Loading Information

label affixed to the driver side center

pillar.

Securely store the jacking tools in the

vehicle.

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirement .............................................. 9-2

General maintenance ................................................. 9-2

Scheduled maintenance ............................................. 9-2

Where to go for service ............................................ 9-2

General maintenance ....................................................... 9-2

Explanation of general maintenance items ......... 9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items .......... 9-5

Emission control system maintenance .................. 9-5

Chassis and body maintenance ............................... 9-5

Maintenance schedules .................................................. 9-6

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions ................................................ 9-6

Oil control system ...................................................... 9-7

Standard maintenance .................................................... 9-7

Standard maintenance ............................................. 9-8

Maintenance under severe driving conditions ....... 9-10

Maintenance log ............................................................. 9-11

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Some day-to-day and regular maintenance

is essential to maintain your vehicle in good

mechanical condition, as well as its emission

and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure

that the scheduled maintenance, as well as

general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

the proper maintenance. You are a vital link

in the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal day-

to-day operation. They are essential for

proper vehicle operation. It is your respon-

sibility to perform these procedures regularly

as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks re-

quires minimal mechanical skill and only a

few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, an INFINITI retailer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this section

are required to be serviced at regular inter-

vals. However, under severe driving condi-

tions, additional or more frequent

maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information through technical

bulletins, service tips and training programs.

They are completely qualified to work on

INFINITI vehicles before work begins.

If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is

recommended that you ask your INFINITI

retailer where the nearest INFINITI Certified

Collision Center is located, or go to http://

collision.infinitiusa.com.

You can be confident that an INFINITI

retailer’s service department can perform

the service needed to meet the maintenance

requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should be

performed regularly as prescribed in this

section. If you detect any unusual sounds,

vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the

cause and have it checked promptly. In

addition, it is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer if you think that repairs are

required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, closely observe “Maintenance

precautions” (P.8-2) of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless other-

wise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors

and the engine hood, operate properly. Also

ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubri-

cate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and

links if necessary. Make sure that the

secondary latch keeps the hood from open-

ing when the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

other corrosive materials, check lubrication

frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other

lights are all operating properly and installed

securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are

missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts.

Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km). If your vehicle is

equipped with different sized tires in the

front and rear, tires cannot be rotated.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance trips.

If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,

including the spare, to the pressure speci-

fied. Check carefully for damage, cuts or

excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and

cap when the tires are replaced due to wear

or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect

uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be

a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing

may be needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at least

every six months for cracks or other damage.

Have a damaged windshield repaired by a

qualified repair facility. It is recommended

that you have a damaged windshield re-

paired by an INFINITI retailer, or an INFINITI

Certified Collision Center. To locate a colli-

sion center in your area, refer to http://

collision.infinitiusa.com.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks

or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when

performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning

the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the pedal

does not catch or require uneven effort.

Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mechan-

ism: On a fairly steep hill, check that your

vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in

the P (Park) position without applying any

brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to

stop, have your vehicle checked immediately.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer for this service. Keep the floor mat

away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only

the parking brake applied. If the parking

brake needs adjusted, it is recommended you

visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to

ensure they operate smoothly and that all

latches lock securely in every position. Check

that the head restraints move up and down

smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped)

hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,

adjuster and retractors) operate properly

and smoothly, and are installed securely.

Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive free

play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that

all warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly

and in sufficient quantity when operating

the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and

that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time

you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe condition require frequent

checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electro-

nic accessories that consume battery

power when the engine is not running

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines

on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Intercooler coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is

frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level spot and

turning off the engine. Wait more than 15

minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil

pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound

of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a

smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have

the exhaust system inspected. It is recom-

mended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this

service. (See “Precautions when starting and

driving” (P.5-4).)

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,

oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use is

normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

gasoline fumes are evident, check for the

cause and have it corrected immediately.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-

mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control dust. It

is very important to remove these sub-

stances, otherwise rust will form on the

floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the

exhaust system. At the end of winter, the

underbody should be thoroughly flushed

with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accu-

mulate. For additional information, see

“Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2).

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there

is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to

give you a better understanding of the

scheduled maintenance items that should

be regularly checked or replaced. The main-

tenance schedule indicates at which mile-

age/time intervals each item requires

service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance, your

vehicle requires that some items be checked

during normal day-to-day operation. Refer

to “General maintenance” (P.9-2).

Items marked with “*” are recommended by

INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. You

are not required to perform maintenance on

these items in order to maintain the warran-

ties which come with your vehicle. Other

maintenance items and intervals are re-

quired.

When applicable, additional information can

be found in the “8. Do-it yourself” section of

this manual.

NOTE:

INFINITI does not advocate the use of non-

OEM approved aftermarket flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against perform-

ing these services on an INFINITI product.

Many of the aftermarket flushing systems

use non-OEM approved chemicals or sol-

vents, the use of which has not been

validated by INFINITI.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Capacities

and recommended fluids/lubricants” (P.10-

2) of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE

Drive belts*:

Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or

cracking and for proper tension. Replace any

damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving

for prolonged periods in dusty conditions,

check/replace the filter more frequently.

Engine coolant*:

Replace coolant at the specified interval.

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to

use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-

freeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the

proper mixture. (Refer to “Engine cooling

system” (P.8-3) to determine the proper

mixture for your area.)

NOTE:

Mixing any other type of coolant or the use

of non-distilled water may reduce the

recommended service interval of the cool-

ant.

Intercooler coolant:

Intercooler coolant is maintenance-free.

Engine oil and oil filter:

Replace engine oil and oil filter at the

specified intervals. For recommended oil

grade and viscosity refer to “Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2).

Engine valve clearance*:

Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust

valve clearance if necessary.

Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*:

Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness.

Tighten connections or replace parts as

necessary.

Fuel lines*:

Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections

for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tight-

en connections or replace parts as necessary.

Spark plugs:

Replace at specified intervals. Install new

plugs of the type as originally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTE-

NANCE

Brake lines and cables:

Visually inspect for proper installation.

Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration,

and signs of leaking. Replace any deterio-

rated or damaged parts immediately.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:

Check for wear, deterioration and fluid

leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged

parts immediately.

Exhaust system:

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler

and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration,

and damage. Tighten connections or replace

parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving

for prolonged periods in dusty conditions,

replace the filter more frequently.

Propeller shaft(s):

Check for damage, looseness, and grease

leakage. (4WD/AWD/RWD)

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspen-

sion parts, drive shaft boots:

Check for damage, looseness, and leakage

of oil or grease. Under severe driving condi-

tions, inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation:

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles

(8,000 km) according to the instructions

under “Explanation of general maintenance

items” (P.9-2). When rotating tires, check for

damage and uneven wear. Replace if neces-

sary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil and

transfer case oil:

Visually inspect for signs of leakage at

specified intervals.

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical

driving, INFINITI provides two maintenance

schedules that may be used, depending upon

the conditions in which you usually drive.

These schedules contain both distance and

time intervals, up to 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months. For most peo-

ple, the odometer reading will indicate when

service is needed. However, if you drive very

little, your vehicle should be serviced at the

regular time intervals shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144

months, continue maintenance at the same

mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE

ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions; should be performed

on vehicles that are driven under especially

demanding conditions. Additional mainte-

nance items should be performed if you

primarily operate your vehicle under the

following conditions:

. Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

. Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures re-

maining below freezing.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go

“rush hour” traffic.

. Extensive idling and/or low speed driving

for long distances, such as police, taxi or

door-to-door delivery use.

. Driving in dusty conditions.

. Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

. Using a car-top carrier.

OIL CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with oil control

system. It calculates engine oil and filter

change interval based on driving conditions.

Driving in severe conditions will shorten the

engine oil and filter change interval. When

the oil replacement indicator appears in the

vehicle information display, the engine oil

and filter need to be replaced.

The following tables show the standard

maintenance schedule. Depending upon

weather and atmospheric conditions, vary-

ing road surfaces, individual driving habits

and vehicle usage, additional or more fre-

quent maintenance may be required.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144

months, continue maintenance at the same

mileage/time intervals.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERA-

TION

Perform at number of miles,

kilometers or months, which-

ever comes first.

Miles ×

1,000

(km ×

1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Air cleaner filter NOTE (1) R R R R

Automatic transmission fluid NOTE (2)

Brake fluid$ RRR R R R

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors$ IIIIII I I I I I I

Drive belts NOTE (3) I* I* I* I* I* I* I* I* I*

Engine coolant*

NOTE (4)

(5)

Engine oil & oil filter$ NOTE (6) R R R R R R R R R R R R

EVAP vapor lines & Fuel lines I* I* I* I* I* I*

Exhaust system$ III I I I

Fuel filter NOTE (2)

In-cabin microfilter R R R R R R R R

Intake

& exhaust valve clear-

ance

NOTE (7)

Intelligent Key battery I R R R R R R R

Propeller shaft & drive shaft

boots (AWD models)$

IIIIII I I I I I I

Spark plugs NOTE (8) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Steering gear and linkage, axle

and suspension parts$

III I I I

Stop lamp switch and brake

pedal position switch

NOTE (9) I I I I I I I I I I I I

Tire rotation

NOTE

(10)

Transfer fluid & differential

gear oil

NOTE

(11)

IIIIII I I I I I I

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “$” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions” (P.9-10).

(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(2) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(3) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found

damaged.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000

km) or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%

demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the

factory fill coolant.

(6) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter as soon as possible. After replacing the engine oil, reset the

display.

(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.

(8) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.043 in (1.1 mm) even if within specified replacement mileage.

(9) Inspect the clearance between the brake pedal and the switches.

(10) Refer to “Tire rotation” under “General maintenance” (P.9-2).

(11) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24

months.

*: Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such

maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

The maintenance intervals shown on the

preceding pages are for normal operating

conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated

under severe driving conditions as shown

below, more frequent maintenance must be

performed on the following items as shown

in the table.

Severe driving conditions

. Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

. Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures re-

maining below freezing.

. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go

“rush hour” traffic.

. Extensive idling and/or low speed driving

for long distances, such as police, taxi or

door-to-door delivery use.

. Driving in dusty conditions.

. Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread

roads.

. Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect

and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12

months

Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6

months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6

months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft

boots (AWD models)

Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6

months

Steering gear & linkage, axle &

suspension parts

Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6

months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

DRIVING CONDITIONS

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

MAINTENANCE LOG

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 120 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144 Months

Retailer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Retailer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

MEMO

10 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants ..... 10-2

Fuel information ....................................................... 10-4

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ........... 10-6

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations .................................... 10-7

Specifications .................................................................. 10-8

Engine .......................................................................... 10-8

Wheels and tires ........................................................ 10-9

Dimensions ............................................................... 10-10

When traveling or registering in

another country ............................................................. 10-11

Vehicle identification ................................................... 10-11

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ....... 10-11

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ...................................................... 10-11

Engine serial number ............................................. 10-12

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........ 10-12

Emission control information label ................... 10-12

Tire and loading information label .................... 10-13

Air conditioner specification label ..................... 10-13

Installing front license plate ..................................... 10-13

Removing air deflectors ............................................ 10-14

Vehicle loading information ..................................... 10-15

Terms ....................................................................... 10-15

Vehicle load capacity .......................................... 10-16

Loading tips ............................................................ 10-17

Measurement of weights .................................... 10-17

Towing a trailer ........................................................... 10-18

Flat towing ............................................................. 10-18

Uniform tire quality grading .................................... 10-18

Treadwear .............................................................. 10-18

Traction AA, A, B and C ..................................... 10-19

Temperature A, B and C .................................... 10-19

Emission control system warranty ......................... 10-19

Reporting safety defects .......................................... 10-20

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

test (US only) ................................................................ 10-21

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ................................... 10-22

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual

order information ........................................................ 10-22

10-2 Technical and consumer information

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

instructed in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 76 L 20 gal 16-5/8 gal ā See “Fuel information” (P.10-4).

Engine oil

Drain and refill

: For additional

information, see

“Engine oil” (P.8-

6).

Two-Wheel

Drive (2WD)

model

With oil filter

change

5.3 L 5-5/8 qt 4-5/8 qt ā Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is recommended.

ā If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or

engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as

recommended is not covered under INFINITI’s new vehicle limited warranty. For additional

information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” (P.10-6).

Without oil fil-

ter change

5.1 L 5-3/8 qt 4–1/2 qt

All-Wheel

Drive (AWD)

model

With oil filter

change

5.9 L 6-1/4 qt 5-1/4 qt

Without oil fil-

ter change

5.7 L 6 qt 5 qt

Engine coolant Standard and

premium

grade

Total (with re-

servoir)

9.3 L 9-7/8 qt 8-1/8 qt ā Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

Reservoir 0.5 L 1/2 qt 1/2 qt

Sport grade Total (with re-

servoir)

10.4 L 11 qt 9-1/8 qt

Reservoir 0.5 L 1/2 qt 1/2 qt

Intercooler coolant Total (with reservoir) 3.2 L 3-3/8 qt 2-7/8 qt

Reservoir 0.4 L 3/8 qt 3/8 qt

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) — — — ā Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or equivalent

ā INFINITI recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF (or equivalent) ONLY in INFINITI

automatic transmissions. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the INFINITI’s new vehicle limited

warranty.

Differential gear

oil

Front — — — ā Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or equivalent conventional (non-

synthetic) oil

Rear — — — ā Genuine NISSAN HYPOID FLUID·S1 GL-5 75W-80 or equivalent

Transfer fluid — — — ā Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF or equivalent

ā INFINITI recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF (or equivalent) ONLY in INFINITI

transfers. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN

Matic J ATF may damage the transfer. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as

recommended is not covered under the INFINITI’s new vehicle limited warranty.

Brake fluid Refill to the proper oil level according to

the instructions in the “8. Do-it-yourself”

section.

ā Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid

or equivalent DOT 3

: Available in mainland U.S.A. through an INFINITI retailer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — ā NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — ā HFC-134a (R-134a)

For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” (P.10-11) for air conditioner specification

label.

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — ā NISSAN A/C System Oil PAG or exact equivalent

Window washer fluid — — — ā Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

10-4 Technical and consumer information

FUEL INFORMATION

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number 96).

INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with 93 AKI number

(Research octane number 98) to obtain the

maximum vehicle performance and the best

driveability.

If unleaded premium gasoline is not avail-

able, unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI number

(Research octane number 91) may be tem-

porarily used, but only under the following

precautions:

. Have the fuel tank filled only partially

with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill

up with unleaded premium gasoline as

soon as possible.

. Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt

acceleration.

Use unleaded premium gasoline for max-

imum vehicle performance.

CAUTION

. Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

warranty coverage.

. Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

. Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run on

a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol. Using a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not

specifically designed for a fuel con-

taining more than 15% ethanol can

adversely affect the emission control

devices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is not

covered by the INFINITI new vehicle

limited warranty.

. Do not use fuel that contains the

octane booster methylcyclopentadie-

nyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).

Using fuel containing MMT may

adversely affect vehicle performance

and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel

dispensers are labeled to indicate

MMT content, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for

more details. Note that Federal and

California laws prohibit the use of

MMT in reformulated gasoline.

. U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percen-

tage for that region.

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter

(WWFC) specifications where it is available.

Many of the automobile manufacturers

developed this specification to improve

emission system and vehicle performance.

Ask your service station manager if the

gasoline meets the World-Wide Fuel Char-

ter (WWFC) specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing

reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are

specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-

sions. INFINITI supports efforts towards

cleaner air and suggests that you use

reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and

methanol with or without advertising their

presence. INFINITI does not recommend the

use of fuels of which the oxygenate content

and the fuel compatibility for your INFINITI

cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask

your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please

take the following precautions as the usage

of such fuels may cause vehicle performance

problems and/or fuel system damage.

. The fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that re-

commended for unleaded gasoline.

. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a

methanol blend, is used, it should con-

tain no more than 15% oxygenate.

. If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should

also contain a suitable amount of ap-

propriate cosolvents and corrosion in-

hibitors. If not properly formulated with

appropriate cosolvents and corrosion

inhibitors, such methanol blends may

cause fuel system damage and/or vehi-

cle performance problems. At this time,

sufficient data is not available to ensure

that all methanol blends are suitable for

use in INFINITI vehicles.

If any undesirable driveability problems such

as engine stalling or hard hot starting are

experienced after using oxygenate-blend

fuels, immediately change to a non-oxyge-

nate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during

refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E-15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%

fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-

15 can only be used in vehicles designed to

run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-

tions require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps

to be identified with small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for that

region.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-

85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle

(FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

U.S. government regulations require fuel

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified

by a small, square, orange and black label

with the common abbreviation or the appro-

priate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting

additive. INFINITI does not recommend the

use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may

adversely affect vehicle performance, in-

cluding the emissions control system. Note

that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for more de-

tails.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (Example: fuel

injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve

deposit removers, etc.) which are sold com-

mercially. Many of these additives intended

for gum, varnish or deposit removal may

contain active solvent or similar ingredients

that can be harmful to the fuel system and

engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended above can

cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark

knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe,

this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level roads,

it is recommended you have an INFINITI

retailer correct the condition. Failure to

correct the condition is misuse of the

vehicle, for which INFINITI is not respon-

sible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knock-

ing, after-run or overheating. This in turn

Technical and consumer information 10-5

10-6 Technical and consumer information

may cause excessive fuel consumption or

damage to the engine. If any of the above

symptoms are encountered, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended you visit an

INFINITI retailer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is no

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

JVT0342X

API certification mark

API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance,

see “Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2). INFINITI recommends

the use of an energy conserving oil in order

to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the Amer-

ican Petroleum Institute (API) certification

or International Lubricant Standardization

and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certifica-

tion and SAE viscosity standard. These oils

have the API certification mark on the front

of the container. Oils which do not have the

specified quality label should not be used as

they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives:

INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used

and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has

been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity:

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is

important that the engine oil viscosity be

selected based on the temperatures at which

the vehicle will be operated before the next

oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other

than that recommended could cause serious

engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter:

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-

quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in

change intervals.

Change intervals:

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other

than the specified quality, or oil and filter

change intervals longer than recommended

could reduce engine life. Damage to engines

caused by improper maintenance or use of

incorrect oil and filter quality and/or vis-

cosity is not covered by the new INFINITI

vehicle limited warranties.

Your engine was filled with a high quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not have

to change the oil before the first recom-

mended change interval. Oil and filter

change intervals depend upon how you use

your vehicle.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-

FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in your INFINITI

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,

NISSAN A/C system oil PAG or the exact

equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or

lubricant may cause severe damage to

the air conditioning system and may

require the replacement of all air condi-

tioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does

not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain

governmental regulations require the recov-

ery and recycling of any refrigerant during

automotive air conditioning system service.

Your INFINITI retailer has the trained tech-

nicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioning system

refrigerant.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer when servicing your air conditioning

system.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

10-8 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE

Model VR30DDTT

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

Bore × Stroke in (mm)

3.386× 3.386

(86.0 × 86.0)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 182.88 (2,997)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6

Idle speed rpm

No adjustment is necessary.

Ignition timing

(B.T.D.C.)

degree/rpm

Spark plug DILKAR8K8G

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.031 (0.8)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

STI0425

SPECIFICATIONS

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in (mm)

Conventional

19 × 9J 1.57 (40)

20 × 9J 1.57 (40)

20 × 9.5J 1.85 (47)

Tire

Type Size Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]

Conventional

P255/40RF19 96V 35 (240)

P255/35R20 97V XL 38 (260)

Front: 255/35R20 97Y XL 41 (280)

Rear: 275/30R20 97Y XL 38 (260)

Depending on the models, the emergency tire puncture repair kit is supplied.

Technical and consumer information 10-9

10-10 Technical and consumer information

DIMENSIONS

in (mm)

Overall length 184.4 (4,685)

Overall width 72.8 (1,850)

Overall height 54.9 (1,395)

54.5 (1,385)*1

Front tread 61.2 (1,555)

Rear tread 61.8 (1,570)*2

62.4 (1,585)*3

Wheelbase 112.2 (2,850)

*1: Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

*2: 275/30R20 rear tire models

*3: 255/35R20 or 255/40RF19 tire models

If you plan to travel in another country, you

should first find out if the fuel available is

suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating may

cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline.

Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas

where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards vary

according to the country, state, province or

district; therefore, vehicle specifications may

differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into

another country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsi-

bility of the user. INFINITI is not responsible

for any inconvenience that may result.

STI0716

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUM-

BER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is

attached as shown. This number is the

identification for your vehicle and is used in

the vehicle registration.

STI0717

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUM-

BER (chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown in the

engine compartment.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-12 Technical and consumer information

STI0509

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

STI0707

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICA-

TION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifica-

tion label is affixed as shown. This label

contains valuable vehicle information, such

as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR),

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month

and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identifica-

tion Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

STI0719

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMA-

TION LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached as shown.

JVT0456X

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMA-

TION LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to the

pillar as illustrated.

STI0721

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICA-

TION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is

attached as shown.

JVT0450X

Use the following steps to mount the license

plate.

Only use the recommended mounting posi-

tion, otherwise the radar sensor (Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system) (if so equipped)

obstruction may result.

Before mounting the license plate, confirm

that the following parts are enclosed in the

plastic bag.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

10-14 Technical and consumer information

. License plate bracket

. J-nut × 2

. Screw × 2

1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.

2. Locate the two dimples

in the front

grille.

3. Insert J-nuts

into the license plate

bracket.

4. Insert the bosses of the license plate

bracket into the front grille, aligning the

holes

with the location marks (two

dimples)

5. Install the license plate bracket with the

screws

provided.

6. Install the license plate with bolts that

are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

JVT0455X

Left side

This vehicle is equipped with air deflectors in

front of the front wheels. The deflectors will

change the air flow to help improve aero-

dynamic performance.

When transporting your vehicle on a trailer,

the air deflectors may interfere with a steep

slope to a trailer bed. In this case, remove the

deflectors from the vehicle.

1. Loosen four screws as shown and re-

move the left-side air deflector

2. Tighten the removed screw

in its

original position.

Tightening torque:

4 to 6 ft-lb

(5.6 to 8.4 N·m)

3. Perform the same procedure to remove

the right-side air deflector.

4. Store the two air deflectors and six

screws to reinstall in the reverse order.

5. When reinstalling, make sure all eight

screws are firmly tightened on both air

deflectors.

Tightening torque:

4 to 6 ft-lb

(5.6 to 8.4 N·m)

REMOVING AIR DEFLECTORS

WARNING

. It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside the

vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more

likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

. Do not allow people to ride in

any area of vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

. Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before load-

ing your vehicle:

. Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-

cluding: standard and optional

equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly. This

weight does not include passen-

gers and cargo.

. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -

curb weight plus the combined

weight of passengers and cargo.

. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other op-

tional equipment. This information

is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.

V.S.S. label.

. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

- maximum weight (load) limit

specified for the front or rear axle.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

Rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle, pas-

sengers, cargo, and trailer.

. Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load

limit, Total load capacity - max-

imum total weight limit specified

of the load (passengers and cargo)

for the vehicle. This is the max-

imum combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer,

the trailer tongue weight must be

included as part of the cargo load.

This information is located on the

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

. Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the weight of

total occupants weight subtracted

from the load limit.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

10-16 Technical and consumer information

STI0365

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information

label. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Capa-

city” on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

To get “the combined weight of

occupants and cargo”, add the weight

of all occupants, then add the total

luggage weight. Examples are shown

in the illustration.

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the XXX amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs or

640 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

for your vehicle. (See “Measurement

of weights” (P.10-17).)

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. See the Tire and Loading

Information label.

LOADING TIPS

. The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the F.M.

V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel.

. Do not load the front and rear axle

to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed

the GVWR.

WARNING

. Properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shift-

ing. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden

stop or collision, unsecured car-

go could cause personal injury.

. Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of

your vehicle can break, tire

damage could occur, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury.

. Overloading could not only

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tires, but also could

lead to hazardous vehicle hand-

ling and long braking distance.

This may cause a premature tire

malfunction, which could result

in a serious accident and perso-

nal injury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered by

the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of

your vehicle. When the vehicle is

loaded, drive to a scale and weigh

the front and the rear wheels sepa-

rately to determine axle loads. Indivi-

dual axle loads should not exceed

either of the gross axle weight ratings

(GAWR). The total of the axle loads

should not exceed the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR). These ratings

are given on the vehicle certification

label. If weight ratings are exceeded,

move or remove items to bring all

weights below the ratings.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Do not tow a trailer with your

vehicle.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is sometimes used when towing

a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such

as a motor home.

CAUTION

. Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

. Whenever flat towing your vehicle,

always tow forward, never back-

ward.

. DO NOT tow any Automatic Trans-

mission (AT) vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground (flat towing).

Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal

transmission parts due to lack of

transmission lubrication.

. DO NOT tow any All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) vehicle with any of the wheels

on the ground. Doing so may cause

serious and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

. For emergency towing procedures

refer to “Towing recommended by

INFINITI” (P.6-15).

Automatic Transmission

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models:

Do not tow an AWD vehicle with any of the

wheels on the ground.

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models:

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic

transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly

MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s

drive wheels. Always follow the dolly man-

ufacturer’s recommendations when using

their product.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where applic-

able on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits, service

practices and differences in road character-

istics and climate.

TOWING A TRAILER

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces of as-

phalt and concrete. A tire marked C may

have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking trac-

tion tests, and does not include accel-

eration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak

traction characteristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to

the generation of heat and its ability to

dissipate heat when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to degenerate

and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-

ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combina-

tion, can cause heat build-up and possi-

ble tire failure.

Your INFINITI is covered by the following

emission warranties.

For USA:

. Emission Defects Warranty

. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found

with other vehicle warranties in your War-

ranty Information Booklet that comes with

your INFINITI. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet, or it has

become lost, you may obtain a replacement

by writing to:

. INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

Technical and consumer information 10-19

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

10-20 Technical and consumer information

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found

with other vehicle warranties in your War-

ranty and Roadside Assistance Information

that comes with your INFINITI. If you did not

receive a Warranty and Roadside Assistance

Information, or it has become lost, you may

obtain a replacement by writing to:

. Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario,

L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your retailer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.

gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,

Washington DC 20590. You can also

obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from http://www.

safercar. gov.

You may notify INFINITI by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Transport

Canada in addition to notifying

INFINITI.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

request that INFINITI conduct a recall

campaign. However, Transport Cana-

da cannot become involved in indivi-

dual problems between you, your

retailer, or INFINITI.

You may contact Transport Canada’s

Defect Investigations and Recalls Di-

vision toll free at 1-800-333-0510.

You may also report safety defects

online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-

Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lan-

g=eng (English speakers) or https://

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/

PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra

(French speakers).

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be obtained

from Transport Canada’s Road

Safety Information Centre at 1-

800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.

gc.ca/ roadsafety (English speakers)

or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify INFINITI of any safety

concerns please contact our Consu-

mer Information Centre toll free at 1-

800- 361-4792.

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with Intelligent All-

Wheel Drive (AWD) should never be

tested using a two wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing), or

similar equipment. Make sure you inform

test facility personnel that your vehicle

is equipped with AWD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test

equipment may result in transmission

damage or unexpected vehicle move-

ment which could result in serious vehicle

damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states/

areas, your vehicle may be required to be in

what is called the “ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the

emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the “ready condition” can

be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-

paired or the battery is disconnected, the

vehicle may be reset to a “not ready condi-

tion”. Before taking the I/M test, check the

vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test readi-

ness condition. Place the ignition switch in

the ON position without starting the engine.

If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

comes on steady for 20 seconds and then

blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condition

is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after

20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”.

It is recommended you visit an INFINITI

retailer to set the “ready condition” or to

prepare the vehicle for testing.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

10-22 Technical and consumer information

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a

vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record

such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

. Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver was depres-

sing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

. Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your

vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR

under normal driving conditions and no

personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and

crash location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer and INFINITI re-

tailer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment, can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be

accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

Genuine INFINITI Service Manual for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for

your vehicle. This manual is the same one

used by the factory-trained technicians

working at INFINITI retailers. Genuine

INFINITI Owner’s Manuals can also be

purchased.

For USA:

For current pricing and availability of genu-

ine INFINITI Service Manuals, contact:

www.infiniti-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genu-

ine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this

model year and prior, contact an INFINITI

retailer. For the phone number and location

of an INFINITI retailer in your area call the

INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1-800-361-

4792 and a bilingual INFINITI representative

will assist you.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

11 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ................... 5-127

Active Lane Control ............................................ 5-25

Active noise cancellation ................................. 5-138

Active sound enhancement ............................ 5-138

Active trace control ......................................... 5-130

Air bag system

Front-seat mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system ..................... 1-52

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system ...... 1-52

Air bag warning labels ....................................... 1-55

Air bag warning light ............................... 1-55, 2-17

Air cleaner housing filter ................................... 8-15

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ........................... 4-34

Air conditioner service ................................. 4-41

Air conditioner specification label ......... 10-13

Air conditioning system refrigerant

and lubricant recommendations .... 4-41, 10-7

Automatic air conditioner ........................... 4-36

Heater and air conditioner ......................... 4-34

Servicing air conditioner .............................. 4-41

Sync mode setting ......................................... 4-39

Air deflectors ..................................................... 10-14

Alarm

How to stop alarm (see vehicle security

system) ............................................................. 2-33

Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................ 5-10

Antenna .................................................................. 4-42

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ................... 5-127

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care ............................... 7-2

Interior appearance care ................................ 7-5

Around View

Monitor ...................................... 4-11

Audible reminders ................................................ 2-19

Autolight system .................................................. 2-38

Automatic

Automatic adjusting function

(power windows) ........................................... 2-54

Automatic air conditioner ........................... 4-36

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ......... 8-9

Driving with Automatic

Transmission (AT) .......................................... 5-16

Automatic door locks ............................................ 3-5

Automatic drive positioner ............................... 3-33

Automatic seat positioner ................................ 3-33

Avoiding collision and rollover ............................ 5-9

Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI).............. 5-57

Battery .................................................................... 8-11

Battery replacement, Intelligent Key ......... 3-2

Battery saver system.................................... 2-41

Intelligent Key ................................................. 8-19

Variable voltage control system ............... 8-13

Before starting the engine ................................ 5-14

Belts (See drive belts)......................................... 8-13

Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI) ......................... 5-45

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ............................... 5-37

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............. 5-127

Brake fluid ......................................................... 8-9

Brake force distribution ............................. 5-129

Brake system ................................................ 5-126

Parking brake operation ............................. 5-20

Brake warning light............................................. 2-13

Break-in schedule .............................................. 5-119

Bulb check/instrument panel ........................... 2-12

Bulb replacement ................................................. 8-22

Camera aiding sonar function ......................... 4-24

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ....................... 10-2

Car phone or CB radio ....................................... 4-42

Card holder ............................................................ 2-51

Catalytic converter

Three-way catalyst ......................................... 5-5

Center ventilators ................................................ 4-34

Chassis control ................................................... 5-132

Check tire pressure warning............................. 2-24

Checking intercooler coolant level .................... 8-6

Child restraints ...................................................... 1-19

LATCH system ............................................... 1-21

Precautions on child restraints .................. 1-19

Child safety ............................................................ 1-17

11-2

Chimes

Audible reminders .......................................... 2-19

Seat belt warning light and chime ............ 2-17

Circuit breaker

Fusible link ....................................................... 8-18

Cleaning exterior and interior .................... 7-2, 7-5

Climate control

Automatic air conditioner ........................... 4-36

Clock ...................................................................... 2-31

Coat hooks ............................................................ 2-51

Cockpit ...................................................................... 2-3

Cold weather driving ........................................ 5-135

Compass.................................................................... 2-9

Console box ........................................................... 2-50

Coolant

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ................. 10-2

Changing engine coolant............................... 8-5

Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-4

Corrosion protection ............................................. 7-8

Courtesy light ....................................................... 2-59

Cruise control ....................................................... 5-66

Fixed speed cruise control (on

ICC system) ..................................................... 5-85

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ................. 5-68

Cruise indicator .................................................... 2-25

Cup holders ........................................................... 2-48

Current fuel consumption ................................. 2-29

Daytime running light system .......................... 2-42

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch ............................................. 2-37

Dimensions ......................................................... 10-10

Direct Adaptive Steering ................................. 5-124

Distance Control Assist (DCA) ........................ 5-89

Distance to empty ............................................... 2-29

Drive belts .............................................................. 8-13

Drive positioner .................................................... 3-33

Driver assist system indicator .......................... 2-25

Driving

Cold weather driving .................................. 5-135

Driving with Automatic

Transmission (AT) .......................................... 5-16

Precautions when starting and driving ..... 5-4

ECO drive indicator light ................................... 2-18

ECO mode ............................................................. 5-22

ECO pedal system ............................................... 5-22

Economy

Fuel ................................................................. 5-120

Elapsed time ......................................................... 2-29

Elapsed time and trip odometer ..................... 2-29

Emergency tire puncture repair kit .................... 6-5

Emission control information label ............... 10-12

Emission control system warranty ............... 10-19

Engine

Before starting the engine .......................... 5-14

Break-in schedule ........................................ 5-119

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ................. 10-2

Changing engine coolant ............................... 8-5

Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-7

Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-4

Checking engine oil level ............................... 8-6

Coolant temperature gauge ......................... 2-8

Emergency engine shut off ......................... 5-13

Engine block heater ................................... 5-136

Engine compartment check locations........ 8-3

Engine cooling system ................................... 8-3

Engine oil ........................................................... 8-6

Engine oil and filter

replacement indicator ................................... 2-27

Engine oil and oil

filter recommendation .................................. 10-6

Engine serial number ................................. 10-12

Engine specifications ................................... 10-8

Engine start operation indicator ............... 2-23

If your vehicle overheats ............................. 6-13

Intercooler cooling system ............................ 8-5

Remote engine start ..................................... 3-19

Remote engine start

operation indicator ........................................ 2-23

Starting the engine ....................................... 5-15

Engine coolant temperature gauge .................. 2-8

Entry/exit function

Automatic drive positioner ......................... 3-33

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ........................ 10-22

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ........................ 5-4

Explanation of scheduled

maintenance items ................................................. 9-5

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .... 10-12

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter ............................. 8-15

Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-7

Flashers (See hazard warning

flasher switch) ......................................................... 6-2

Flat tire ...................................................................... 6-3

Repairing flat tire (with emergency tire

puncture repair kit).......................................... 6-5

Flat Tire - Visit dealer warning ....................... 2-24

Flat towing ......................................................... 10-18

Floor mat cleaning ................................................. 7-6

Floor mat installation ............................................ 7-6

Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ......... 8-9

Brake fluid ......................................................... 8-9

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ................. 10-2

Engine coolant .................................................. 8-3

Engine oil ........................................................... 8-6

Intercooler coolant .......................................... 8-5

Window washer fluid .................................. 8-10

Fog light switch ................................................... 2-44

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) system

warning light ......................................................... 2-13

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with

pedestrian detection system ......................... 5-100

Front passenger air bag and status light ..... 1-46

Front power seat adjustment ............................. 1-3

Front seat

Front seat adjustment .................................... 1-3

Fuel

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ................. 10-2

Fuel economy .............................................. 5-120

Fuel information ........................................... 10-4

Fuel octane rating ........................................ 10-4

Fuel-filler cap .................................................. 3-25

Fuel-filler door ............................................... 3-25

Gauge.................................................................. 2-9

Fuel Efficient Driving Tips .............................. 5-119

Fuses ....................................................................... 8-17

Fusible links ........................................................... 8-18

Garage door opener

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver ............ 2-59

Gas cap ................................................................... 3-25

Gauge......................................................................... 2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge ............ 2-8

Fuel gauge ......................................................... 2-9

Odometer............................................................ 2-7

Speedometer ...................................................... 2-7

Tachometer ....................................................... 2-8

Trip computer ................................................. 2-29

General maintenance ............................................. 9-2

Glove box ............................................................... 2-50

Hazard warning flasher switch........................... 6-2

Head restraints/headrests .................................. 1-7

Headlights

Aiming control (See Adaptive Front

lighting System (AFS)) ................................. 2-42

Headlight switch ............................................ 2-38

Heated seats ......................................................... 2-45

Heated steering wheel ....................................... 2-47

Heater

Engine block heater ................................... 5-136

Heater and air conditioner ................................ 4-34

High beam assist ................................................. 2-39

Hill start assist system ..................................... 5-132

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver .................. 2-59

Hood release ......................................................... 3-22

Hook

Coat hooks ...................................................... 2-51

Trunk hooks .................................................... 2-52

Horn......................................................................... 2-44

Ignition switch

(Push-button) ................................................. 5-11

Immobilizer system .............................................. 2-33

Indicator

Lights ................................................................ 2-18

Vehicle information display ........................ 2-20

11-3

11-4

Indicator lights ...................................................... 2-18

Indicators for operation (vehicle

information display) ............................................ 2-23

INFINITI Drive Mode Selector ......................... 5-21

INFINITI InTouch Owner’s Manual .................. 4-2

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ............ 2-33

Engine start ..................................................... 2-33

Inside mirror .......................................................... 3-29

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test.............. 10-21

Instrument brightness control ......................... 2-43

Instrument panel ..................................................... 2-5

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ............... 5-121

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ....................... 5-68

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

ON indicator ......................................................... 2-25

Intelligent Key .......................................................... 3-2

Intelligent Key system ........................................... 3-6

Battery replacement ..................................... 8-19

Key operating range ....................................... 3-8

Key operation ................................................... 3-9

Warning signals .............................................. 3-13

Intercooler cooling system .................................. 8-5

Interior light control switch .............................. 2-57

Interior light replacement .................................. 8-23

Interior lights ......................................................... 2-57

Interior trunk lid release .................................... 3-24

ISOFIX child restraint .......................................... 1-21

Jump starting ........................................................ 6-10

Keyless entry (See remote keyless

entry system) ........................................................ 3-15

Keys ............................................................................ 3-2

For Intelligent Key system ............................ 3-6

Labels

Air bag warning labels ................................. 1-55

Air conditioner specification label ......... 10-13

Emission control information label ........ 10-12

Engine serial number ................................. 10-12

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label ........................................ 10-12

Tire and Loading

information label ............................. 8-27, 10-13

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ....... 10-11

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) .................... 5-33

LATCH system ...................................................... 1-21

License plate

Installing front license plate .................... 10-13

Light

Air bag warning light .................................... 1-55

Bulb replacement ........................................... 8-22

Fog light switch ............................................ 2-44

Headlight switch ............................................ 2-38

Indicator lights ................................................ 2-18

Interior light control switch ........................ 2-57

Interior lights ................................................... 2-57

Map lights ........................................................ 2-57

Replacement ................................................... 8-22

Trunk light ....................................................... 2-59

Vanity mirror lights ....................................... 2-58

Warning/indicator lights and

audible reminders .......................................... 2-12

Lights

Exterior and interior light replacement .... 8-23

Loading information (See vehicle

loading information) ......................................... 10-15

Lock

Automatic door locks ..................................... 3-5

Door locks .......................................................... 3-4

Power door lock............................................... 3-4

Trunk lid ........................................................... 3-22

Locking with mechanical key ............................. 3-4

Log-in function .................................................... 3-15

Loose Fuel Cap warning ....................... 2-24, 3-27

Low fuel warning light ....................................... 2-14

Low outside temperature warning ................. 2-25

Low tire pressure warning light ...................... 2-14

Low tire pressure warning system (See Tire

Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)) ................................ 5-5, 6-3, 8-25

Maintenance

Battery .............................................................. 8-11

General maintenance ...................................... 9-2

Indicators for maintenance (vehicle

information display) ...................................... 2-26

Inside the vehicle ............................................. 9-3

Maintenance log ............................................ 9-11

Maintenance precautions .............................. 8-2

Maintenance requirements ........................... 9-2

Maintenance schedules ................................. 9-6

Maintenance under severe

driving conditions .......................................... 9-10

Outside the vehicle ......................................... 9-2

Seat belt maintenance ................................. 1-17

Standard maintenance .................................... 9-7

Under the hood and vehicle ......................... 9-4

Malfunction indicator light (MIL) .................... 2-18

Map lights .............................................................. 2-57

Master warning light .......................................... 2-16

Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) .......... 3-3

Memory storage

Automatic drive positioner ......................... 3-33

Meter

Trip computer ................................................. 2-29

Meters and gauges ................................................ 2-6

Instrument brightness control ................... 2-43

Mirror

Inside mirror .................................................... 3-29

Outside mirrors .............................................. 3-31

Vanity mirror ................................................... 3-32

Monitor

Around View

Monitor ................................ 4-11

RearView Monitor ........................................... 4-3

Moonroof............................................................... 2-55

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ................... 4-29

New vehicle break-in ........................................ 5-119

Odometer.................................................................. 2-7

Off-road recovery .................................................. 5-9

Oil

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ................. 10-2

Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-7

Checking engine oil level ............................... 8-6

Engine oil ........................................................... 8-6

One touch unlock sensor (See Intelligent

Key system) .............................................................. 3-9

Operation

Indicators for operation............................... 2-23

Outside air temperature .................................... 2-31

Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-31

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ............... 6-13

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual

order information ............................................. 10-22

Panic alarm ............................................................ 3-17

Parking

Parking brake operation ............................. 5-20

Parking on hills ............................................. 5-123

Parking brake break-in .................................... 5-127

PERSONAL mode ............................................... 5-24

Phone

Car phone or CB radio ................................ 4-42

Power

Power door lock............................................... 3-4

Power outlet ................................................... 2-47

Power steering system ............................. 5-124

Power windows ............................................. 2-52

Power moonroof ................................................. 2-55

Power steering warning light........................... 2-16

Pre-crash seat belts with

comfort function ................................................... 1-13

Precautions

Braking precautions .................................... 5-126

Child restraints ............................................... 1-19

Cruise control ................................................. 5-66

Maintenance ..................................................... 8-2

Seat belt usage ............................................... 1-11

Supplemental restraint system .................. 1-38

When starting and driving ............................ 5-4

Predictive Forward Collision

Warning (PFCW) ............................................... 5-110

Push starting ......................................................... 6-12

Push-button ignition switch .............................. 5-11

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ................................ 4-42

Rain-sensing auto wiper system ..................... 2-36

11-5

11-6

Rapid air pressure loss ....................................... 5-10

Readiness for inspection/maintenance

(I/M) test (US only) ........................................... 10-21

Rear seats ................................................................. 1-6

Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch ................................................... 2-37

RearView Monitor ................................................. 4-3

Recorders

Event data .................................................... 10-22

Registering your vehicle in

another country ................................................. 10-11

Remote engine start ........................................... 3-19

Remote keyless entry system .......................... 3-15

Repairing flat tire (with emergency tire

puncture repair kit)................................................. 6-5

Reporting safety defects................................ 10-20

Request switch (See Intelligent

Key system) .............................................................. 3-9

Roadside assistance program ............................. 6-2

Rollover ..................................................................... 5-9

Roof

Moonroof......................................................... 2-55

Run-flat tires .......................................................... 6-4

Safety

Child seat belts............................................... 1-17

Reporting safety defects.......................... 10-20

Seat adjustment

Front power seat adjustment ....................... 1-3

Front seats ......................................................... 1-3

Seat belt(s)

Child safety ..................................................... 1-17

Infants............................................................... 1-18

Injured persons ............................................... 1-13

Larger children ............................................... 1-18

Pre-crash seat belts with

comfort function ............................................ 1-13

Precautions on seat belt usage .................. 1-11

Pregnant women ........................................... 1-13

Seat belt cleaning ............................................. 7-7

Seat belt extenders ....................................... 1-16

Seat belt maintenance ................................. 1-17

Seat belt warning light and chime ............ 2-17

Seat belts .......................................................... 1-11

Seat belts with pretensioners .................... 1-54

Small children .................................................. 1-18

Three-point type ............................................ 1-14

Seat(s)

Driver-side memory ...................................... 3-33

Heated seats ................................................... 2-45

Seats .................................................................... 1-2

Security system

Vehicle security system................................ 2-32

Security system (INFINITI Vehicle

Immobilizer System)

Engine start ..................................................... 2-33

Servicing air conditioner .................................... 4-41

Shift lever

Shift lock release ........................................... 5-19

Shift lock release, Transmission ...................... 5-19

Shifting

Automatic Transmission (AT)..................... 5-16

Side ventilators .................................................... 4-34

SNOW mode ......................................................... 5-22

Sonar settings .................................................... 5-134

Sonar system ...................................................... 5-133

Camera aiding sonar function

(models with Around View

Monitor) .... 4-24

Spare tire ............................................................... 10-9

Spark plugs ............................................................ 8-14

Speedometer ............................................................ 2-7

SPORT mode ........................................................ 5-22

SPORT+ mode ...................................................... 5-22

Standard maintenance ................................ 9-7, 9-8

STANDARD mode ............................................... 5-22

Starting

Before starting the engine .......................... 5-14

Jump starting .................................................. 8-13

Precautions when starting and driving ..... 5-4

Push starting ................................................... 6-12

Starting the engine ....................................... 5-15

Status light, Front passenger air bag ............ 1-46

Steering

Direct Adaptive Steering .......................... 5-124

Heated steering wheel ................................. 2-47

Power steering system ............................. 5-124

Tilt/telescopic steering ................................ 3-27

Storage ................................................................... 2-48

Storage box ........................................................... 2-51

Sun visors ............................................................... 3-29

Sunglasses holder ................................................ 2-49

Supplemental air bag warning labels ............. 1-55

Supplemental air bag warning light .... 1-55, 2-17

Supplemental restraint system ........................ 1-38

Precautions on supplemental

restraint system ............................................. 1-38

Switch

Autolight switch ............................................. 2-38

Fog light switch ............................................ 2-44

Hazard warning flasher switch.................... 6-2

Headlight switch ............................................ 2-38

Power door lock switch ................................. 3-5

Push-button ignition switch ....................... 5-11

Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch ............................................. 2-37

Turn signal switch ......................................... 2-43

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off switch ......................................................... 2-45

Tachometer ............................................................. 2-8

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge ............ 2-8

Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System)

Engine start ..................................................... 2-33

Three-way catalyst ................................................ 5-5

Tilt/telescopic steering ...................................... 3-27

Tire

Flat Tire - Visit dealer warning ................. 2-24

Run-flat tires .................................................... 6-4

Sealant ................................................................ 6-5

Tire replacement indicator .......................... 2-27

Tire rotation .................................................... 8-33

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light ................ 2-14

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning ........... 2-24

Tires

Emergency tire puncture repair kit ............. 6-5

Flat tire ............................................................... 6-3

Low tire pressure

warning system ........................... 5-5, 6-3, 8-25

Run-flat tires .................................................. 8-31

Tire and Loading

information label ............................. 8-27, 10-13

Tire chains ........................................................ 8-33

Tire dressing ...................................................... 7-4

Tire pressure ................................................... 8-25

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) ........................... 5-5, 6-3, 8-25

Types of tires .................................................. 8-31

Uniform tire quality grading .................... 10-18

Wheel/tire size ............................................... 10-9

Wheels and tires ............................................ 8-25

Towing

Flat towing ................................................... 10-18

Tow truck towing .......................................... 6-14

Towing a trailer ........................................... 10-18

TPMS

Tire Pressure

Monitoring System .................... 5-5, 6-3, 8-25

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator ............ 5-8

Trailer towing .................................................... 10-18

Transceiver

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver ............ 2-59

Transmission

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ......... 8-9

Driving with Automatic

Transmission (AT) .......................................... 5-16

Transmission shift lever lock release ....... 5-19

Transmitter (See remote keyless

entry system) ........................................................ 3-15

Traveling or registering in

another country ................................................. 10-11

Trip computer ....................................................... 2-29

Trip odometer ....................................................... 2-29

Trunk

Interior trunk lid release .............................. 3-24

Light .................................................................. 2-59

Trunk hooks .................................................... 2-52

Trunk lid ........................................................... 3-22

Trunk lid release switch ............................... 3-23

Trunk open request switch ......................... 3-23

Trunk release power cancel switch .......... 3-24

Turn signal switch ............................................... 2-43

Underbody cleaning ............................................... 7-3

Uniform tire quality grading .......................... 10-18

Vanity mirror ......................................................... 3-32

Vanity mirror lights ............................................. 2-58

11-7

11-8

Variable voltage control system ..................... 8-13

Vehicle

Dimensions ................................................... 10-10

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ............ 6-16

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off switch ......................................................... 2-45

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system ................................................ 5-129

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light ................................................... 2-17

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ............. 10-11

Vehicle information display .............................. 2-20

Vehicle loading information............................ 10-15

Vehicle security system...................................... 2-32

Vehicle speedAverage speed............................ 2-29

Ventilators ............................................................. 4-34

Walk-in mechanism ............................................... 1-5

Warning

Flat Tire - Visit dealer warning ................. 2-24

Hazard warning flasher switch.................... 6-2

Indicators for operation (vehicle

information display) ...................................... 2-23

Lights ................................................................ 2-12

Power steering warning light..................... 2-16

Predictive Forward Collision

Warning (PFCW) ........................................ 5-110

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) ........................... 5-5, 6-3, 8-25

Vehicle information display ........................ 2-20

Warning lights, indicator lights and

audible reminders .......................................... 2-12

Warning labels

Air bag warning labels ................................. 1-55

Warning light

Air bag warning light ......................... 1-55, 2-17

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

warning light ................................................... 2-12

Brake warning light....................................... 2-13

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)

system warning light .................................... 2-13

Low fuel warning light ................................. 2-14

Low tire pressure warning light ................ 2-14

Seat belt warning light and chime ............ 2-17

Warranty

Emission control system warranty ........ 10-19

Washer switch

Wiper and washer switch ........................... 2-34

Washing .................................................................... 7-2

Waxing....................................................................... 7-2

Welcome light and farewell light function .... 3-10

Wheel/tire size ..................................................... 10-9

Wheels and tires .................................................. 8-25

Care of wheels .................................................. 7-3

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels .................. 7-3

Cleaning bright wheels .................................. 7-4

Window washer fluid ......................................... 8-10

Window(s)

Automatic adjusting function .................... 2-54

Cleaning............................................................... 7-3

Power windows ............................................. 2-52

Wiper

Rain-sensing auto wiper system ............... 2-36

Wiper and washer switch ........................... 2-34

Wiper blades ................................................... 8-15

Wiper and washer switch ................................. 2-34

MEMO

11-9

MEMO

FUEL INFORMATION

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number 96).

INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with 93 AKI number

(Research octane number 98) to obtain the

maximum vehicle performance and the best

driveability.

If unleaded premium gasoline is not avail-

able, unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI number

(Research octane number 91) may be tem-

porarily used, but only under the following

precautions:

. Have the fuel tank filled only partially

with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill

up with unleaded premium gasoline as

soon as possible.

. Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt

acceleration.

Use unleaded premium gasoline for max-

imum vehicle performance.

CAUTION

. Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

warranty coverage.

. Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

. Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol. Your vehicle is not

designed to run on a fuel containing

more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol in

a vehicle not specifically designed for

a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol can adversely affect the

emission control devices and systems

of the vehicle. Damage caused by

such fuel is not covered by the

INFINITI new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

. Do not use fuel that contains the

octane booster methylcyclopentadie-

nyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).

Using fuel containing MMT may

adversely affect vehicle performance

and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel

dispensers are labeled to indicate

MMT content, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for

more details. Note that Federal and

California laws prohibit the use of

MMT in reformulated gasoline.

. U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percen-

tage for that region.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDA-

TION:

See “Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2) for engine oil and oil

filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, see “Wheels and

tires” (P.8-25).

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PRO-

CEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of

vehicle use, follow the recommendations

outlined in the “Break-in schedule” (P.5-

119) of this Owner’s Manual. Follow these

recommendations for the future reliability

and economy of your new vehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

CV37-D

Printing : September 2019

Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.

OM20E0 CV37U0

Infiniti Q60 Coupe 2020

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Infiniti 2020 INFINITI Q60 COUPE Questions and Answers

Related Products

BMW 2007 Z4 M Coupe Car

Husqvarna CEORA UNITé DE COUPE RZ 43L CEORA Unité de coupe RZ 43L CEORA UNIT DE COUPE RZ 43L

Robot-Coupe CL 40 Vegetable Preparation Machine

Robot-Coupe R 301 DICE Single Phase 120 V Food Processor

Robot-Coupe R 301 ULTRA DICE Single Phase 120V

Robot-Coupe R 301 ULTRA Single Phase 120 V Food Processor